X11DPU - Motherboard Supermicro - Free user manual and instructions

USER MANUAL X11DPU Supermicro

The information in this user's manual has been carefully reviewed and is believed to be accurate. The vendor assumes no responsibility for any inaccuracies that may be contained in this document, and makes no commitment to update or to keep current the information in this manual, or to notify any person or organization of the updates. Please Note: For the most up-to-date version of this manual, please see our website at www.supermicro.com.

Super Micro Computer, Inc. ("Supermicro") reserves the right to make changes to the product described in this manual at any time and without notice. This product, including software and documentation, is the property of Supermicro and/or its licensors, and is supplied only under a license. Any use or reproduction of this product is not allowed, except as expressly permitted by the terms of said license.

IN NO EVENT WILL SUPER MICRO COMPUTER, INC. BE LIABLE FOR DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, SPECULATIVE OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING FROM THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THIS PRODUCT OR DOCUMENTATION, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. IN PARTICULAR, SUPER MICRO COMPUTER, INC. SHALL NOT HAVE LIABILITY FOR ANY HARDWARE, SOFTWARE, OR DATA STORED OR USED WITH THE PRODUCT, INCLUDING THE COSTS OF REPAIRING, REPLACING, INTEGRATING, INSTALLING OR RECOVERING SUCH HARDWARE, SOFTWARE, OR DATA.

Any disputes arising between manufacturer and customer shall be governed by the laws of Santa Clara County in the State of California, USA. The State of California, County of Santa Clara shall be the exclusive venue for the resolution of any such disputes. Supermicro's total liability for all claims will not exceed the price paid for the hardware product.

FCC Statement: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in an industrial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the manufacturer's instruction manual, may cause harmful interference with radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference, in which case you will be required to correct the interference at your own expense.

California Best Management Practices Regulations for Perchlorate Materials: This Perchlorate warning applies only to products containing CR (Manganese Dioxide) Lithium coin cells. "Perchlorate Material-special handling may apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate".

The products sold by Supermicro are not intended for and will not be used in life support systems, medical equipment, nuclear facilities or systems, aircraft, aircraft devices, aircraft/emergency communication devices or other critical systems whose failure to perform be reasonably expected to result in significant injury or loss of life or catastrophic property damage. Accordingly, Supermicro disclaims any and all liability, and should buyer use or sell such products for use in such ultra-hazardous applications, it does so entirely at its own risk. Furthermore, buyer agrees to fully indemnify, defend and hold Supermicro harmless for and against any and all claims, demands, actions, litigation, and proceedings of any kind arising out of or related to such ultra-hazardous use or sale.

WARNING: This product can expose you to chemicals including lead, known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. For more information, go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov.

Manual Revision 1.1c

Release Date: November 18, 2020

Unless you request and receive written permission from Super Micro Computer, Inc., you may not copy any part of this document. Information in this document is subject to change without notice. Other products and companies referred to herein are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies or mark holders.

Copyright © 2020 by Super Micro Computer, Inc.

All rights reserved.

Printed in the United States of America

Preface

About This Manual

This manual is written for system integrators, IT technicians, and knowledgeable end users. It provides information for the installation and use of the X11DPU-Z+/ZE+ motherboard.

About This Motherboard

The X11DPU-Z+/ZE+ motherboard supports dual Intel® Xeon Scalable-SP or 2nd Generation Intel® Xeon Scalable-SP (Socket P) processors with a Thermal Design Power (TDP) of up to 205W, and three Ultra Path Interconnects (UPIs) with speeds of up to 10.4 GT/s (Note below). With the Intel® C621 PCH built-in, this motherboard supports up to 6 TB of 3DS LRDIMM/LRDIMM/3DS RDIMM/RDIMM/NV-DIMM DDR4 ECC 2933/2666/2400/2133 MHz in 24 DIMM slots with four Non-volatile Memory Express (NVMe) slots onboard. It also supports up to 5TB memory with DCPMM modules. The X11DPU-Z+/ZE+ provides the maximum system performance and I/O expandability currently available on the market. This motherboard is optimized for PCI-E expansion with flexible I/O support and is ideal for use in High Performance Computing (HPC) and Enterprise Computing server platforms. Please note that this motherboard is intended to be installed and serviced by professional technicians only. For processor/memory updates, please refer to our website at http://www.supermicro.com/products/.

Note 1: UPI/memory speeds are dependent on the processors installed in your system.

Note 2: The X11DPU-Z/ZE+ supports Intel C621 chipsets.

Note 3: Support for 2933 MHz memory is dependent on the CPU SKU.

Manual Organization

Chapter 1 describes the features, specifications, and performance of the motherboard. Detailed information on the chipset and processors is also provided.

Chapter 2 provides hardware installation instructions. Read this chapter when installing the processor, memory modules, and other hardware components into the system.

Chapter 3 describes troubleshooting procedures for video, memory, and system setup stored in the CMOS.

Chapter 4 includes an introduction to the BIOS and provides detailed information on how to run the CMOS setup utility.

Appendix A provides BIOS Error Beep Codes.

Appendix B lists software program installation instructions.

Appendix C lists standardized warning statements in various languages.

Appendix D provides UEFI BIOS Recovery instructions.

Appendix E provides information on how to configure secure boot settings.

Appendix F provides information on how to configure VROC RAID settings.

Appendix G provides information on how to configure Network Interface Card (NIC) settings.

Appendix H provides information on how to configure iSCSI settings.

Contacting Supermicro

Headquarters

Address: Super Micro Computer, Inc.

980 Rock Ave.

San Jose, CA 95131 U.S.A.

Tel: [phone]

Fax: [phone]

Email: [e-mail] (General Information)

[e-mail] (Technical Support)

Website: www.supermicro.com

Europe

Address: Super Micro Computer B.V.

's-Hertogenbosch, The Netherlands

Tel: [phone]

Fax: [phone]

Email: [e-mail] (General Information)

[e-mail] (Technical Support)

[e-mail] (Customer Support)

Website: www.supermicro.nl

Asia-Pacific

Address: Super Micro Computer, Inc.

3F, No. 150, Jian 1st Rd.

Zhonghe Dist., New Taipei City 235

Taiwan (R.O.C)

Tel: [phone]

Fax: [phone]

Email: [e-mail]

Website: www.supermicro.com.tw

Table of Contents

Chapter 1 Introduction

1.1 Checklist....10
1.2 Processor and Chipset Overview....20
1.3 Special Features ....21
1.4 System Health Monitoring 21
1.5 ACPI Features....22
1.6 Power Supply 22
1.7 Advanced Power Management....22

Intel® Intelligent Power Node Manager (IPNM)....22

Management Engine (ME)....23

1.8 Intel® Optane DC Persistent Memory Overview ......23

Chapter 2 Installation

2.1 Static-Sensitive Devices....24
2.2 Motherboard Installation....25
2.3 Processor and Heatsink Installation....27
2.4 Memory Support and Installation ....35
2.5 Rear I/O Ports 45
2.6 Front Control Panel 49
2.7 Connectors....54
2.7 Jumper Settings ....65
2.8 LED Indicators....69

Chapter 3 Troubleshooting

3.1 Troubleshooting Procedures 72
3.2 Technical Support Procedures 76
3.3 Frequently Asked Questions....77
3.4 Battery Removal and Installation .....79
3.5 Returning Merchandise for Service 80

Chapter 4 UEFI BIOS

4.1 Introduction....81
4.2 Main Setup 82
4.3 Advanced Setup Configurations....84
4.4 Event Logs 129

4.5 IPMI....131
4.6 Security Settings ....134
4.7 Boot Settings....138
4.8 Save & Exit....140

Appendix A BIOS Codes

A.1 BIOS Error POST (Beep) Codes ....142
A.2 Additional BIOS POST Codes....143

Appendix B Software Installation

B.1 Installing Software Programs ....144
B.2 SuperDoctor ^® 5....145
B.3 Logging into the BMC (Baseboard Management Controller)....146

Appendix C Standardized Warning Statements

Appendix D UEFI BIOS Recovery

D.1 Overview....150
D.2 Recovering the UEFI BIOS Image....150
D.3 Recovering the Main BIOS Block with a USB Device....151

Appendix E Configuring VROC RAID Settings

E.1 All Intel VMD Controllers Menu....155
E.2 Configuring RAID Settings 159
E.3 Use of Journaling Drive....175

Appendix F Secure Boot Settings

F.1 Boot mode select Feature....179
F.2 Secure Boot/ Secure Boot Mode/ CSM Support Features....180
F.3 Secure Boot Settings ....181
F.4 Key Management Settings....184

Appendix G Configuring iSCSI Settings

Appendix H Configuring Network Interface Card (NIC) Settings

H.1 Network Interface Card (NIC) Settings 223

Chapter 1

Introduction

Congratulations on purchasing your computer motherboard from an industry leader. Supermicro motherboards are designed to provide you with the highest standards in quality and performance.

1.1 Checklist

This motherboard was designed to be used in an SMCI-proprietary chassis as a part of an integrated server platform solution. This motherboard is not intended to be sold as a standalone, independent product. No shipping package will be provided in your shipment.

Important Links

For your system to work properly, please follow the links below to download all necessary drivers/utilities and the user's manual for your motherboard.

• Supermicro product manuals: http://www.supermicro.com/support/manuals/
- Product drivers and utilities: http://www.supermicro.com/wftp
- Product safety info: http://www.supermicro.com/about/policies/safety_information.cfm
- A secure data deletion tool designed to fully erase all data from storage devices can be found at our website: https://www.supermicro.com/about/policies/disclaimer.cfm?url=/wftp/utility/Lot9_Secure_Data_Deletion_Utility/
- If you have any questions, please contact our support team at: [e-mail]

This manual may be periodically updated without notice. Please check the Supermicro website for possible updates to the manual revision level.

Green computer motherboard with multiple CPU and RAM slots, no visible text or symbols

Figure 1-1. X11DPU-Z+/ZE+ Motherboard Image

Note: All graphics shown in this manual were based upon the latest PCB revision available at the time of publication of the manual. The motherboard you received may or may not look exactly the same as the graphics shown in this manual.

Figure 1-2. X11DPU-Z+/ZE+ Motherboard Layout (not drawn to scale)

VGA LEDM1 JPM1 IPMI LAN COM1 USB0/1(3.0) SXB2 CPU2_PORT1A CPU2_DM BMC SXB1A SXB1_A SXB1_B CPU2_PORT1A CPU2_PORT1C SXB1_C SXB1_A SXB1_B CPU2_PORT1A CPU2_PORT1C SXB1_C SP1 I-SATA0-3I-SATA4-7 JSD2JSD1 JPM1_USD0 JS1 JS2 USB3A(3.0) JCPW2 GPU PWR2 JF1 LE2 JGPW GPU PWR1 SUPER●X11DPU-Z+ REV:1.01 CE FC IPMI CODE CPU2 P2-DIMXD2 P2-DIMXD1 P2-DIMME2 P2-DIMME1 P2-DIMME0 P2-DIMME1 P2-DIMME2 P2-DIMME3 P2-DIMME4 P2-DIMME5 P2-DIMME6 P2-DIMME7 P2-DIMME8 P2-DIMME9 P2-DIMME10 P2-DIMME11 P2-DIMME12 P2-DIMME13 P2-DIMME14 P2-DIMME15 P2-DIMME16 P2-DIMME17 P2-DIMME18 P2-DIMME19 P2-DIMME20 P2-DIMME21 P2-DIMME22 P2-DIMME23 P2-DIMME24 P2-DIMME25 P2-DIMME26 P2-DIMME27 P2-DIMME28 P2-DIMME29 P2-DIMME30 P2-DIMME31 P2-DIMME32 P2-DIMME33 P2-DIMME34 P2-DIMME35 P2-DIMME36 P2-DIMME37 P2-DIMME38 P2-DIMME39 P2-DIMME40 P2-DIMME41 P2-DIMME42 P2-DIMME43 P2-DIMME44 P2-DIMME45 P2-DIMME46 P2-DIMME47 P2-DIMME48 P2-DIMME49 P2-DIMME50 P2-DIMME51 P2-DIMME52 P2-DIMME53 P2-DIMME54 P2-DIMME55 P2-DIMME56 P2-DIMME57 P2-DIMME58 P2-DIMME59 P2-DIMME60

Notes:

1. Components not documented are for internal testing only.
2. Intel C621 supports two 1G (1 GbE) LAN ports on the X11DPU-Z+ and two 10G (10 GbE) LAN ports on the X11DPU-ZE+.
3. Intel VMD is for NVMe SSD drive. After you've enabled VMD in the BIOS on a PCI-E slot of your choice, this PCI-E slot will be dedicated to VMD use only, and it will no longer support any PCI-E device. To re-activate this slot for PCI-E use, please disable VMD in the BIOS.

Quick Reference

LEDM1 VGA LED1 JUIDB2 COM1 JIPMB1 IPMI LAN USB 0/1 (3.0) JSDCARD1 JBT1 VROC (JRK1) JP2 SXB1A SXB2 BIOS Battery JPME1 SXB1B SP1 I-SATA4-7 I-SATA0~3 SXB1C JTPM1 (TPM / PORT 80) JUSB3 (USB3/4) NVME13 JF1 LE2 JL1 JNVI2C2 JGPW4 JGPW2 NVME12 FAN8 P2-DIMMF2 P2-DIMMD2 P2-DIMME1 P2-DIMMD1 P2-DIMMD2 P2-DIMME1 P2-DIMMD1 P2-DIMMD2 P2-DIMME1 P2-DIMMD1 P2-DIMMD2 P2-DIMME1 P2-DIMMD1 P2-DIMMD2 P2-DIMME1 P2-DIMMD1 P2-DIMMD2 P2-DIMME1 FAN7 FAN6 FAN5 FAN4 FAN3 FAN2 FAN1 JSD3A JSD2 JSD1 JVRM2 JVRM1 JWD1 SXB3B S-SATA4 S-SATA5 USB2 (3.0) SXB3C JNVI2C1 PSU2 PSU1 NVME11 JPW4 JPW2 JPW1 JPW3 NVME10 T-SGPIO3 SUPER X11DPU-Z+ REV:1.01 CE F€ FXI CODE BAR CODE 30S ICE#S# X11DPU-Z+ REVI:0.01 P2-DIMMC1 P2-DIMMC2 P2-DIMMC1 P2-DIMMC2 P2-DIMMC1 P2-DIMMC2 P2-DIMMC1 P2-DIMMC2 P2-DIMMC1 P2-DIMMC2 P2-DIMMC1 P2-DIMMC2 P2-DIMMC1 P2-DIMMC2 P2-DIMMC1 P2-DIMMC2 FAN4 FAN3

Notes:

• See Chapter 2 for detailed information on jumpers, I/O ports, and JF1 front panel connections.
  • " " indicates the location of Pin 1.
• Jumpers/LED indicators not indicated are used for testing only.
• Use only the correct type of onboard CMOS battery as specified by the manufacturer. Do not install the onboard battery upside down to avoid a possible explosion.
• To avoid causing interference with other components, please be sure to use an add-on card that is fully compliant with the PCI-standard on a PCI slot.

Quick Reference Table

Jumper Description Default Setting

JBT1 CMOS Clear Open (Normal) (See Chapter 2)

JPME1 Manufacture Mode Select (ME Mode Select) Pins 1-2 (Normal)

JWD1 Watch Dog Timer Enable Pins 1-2 (Reset to System)

Connector Description

BT1 (Battery) Onboard CMOS battery
COM1 Back panel COM port
FAN1-8 4-pin system/CPU cooling fan headers (FAN8: a 4-pin vertical fan header)
IPMI_LAN Dedicated IPMI_LAN port
JF1	Front Panel Control header
I-SATA0-3, I-SATA4-7	SATA 3.0 connections 0-3, 4-7 supported by the Intel PCH
JIPMB1	4-pin BMC external I^2C header (for an IPMI-supported card)
JL1	Chassis intrusion header
JNVI^2C1/JNVI^2C2	NVMe SMBus ( I^2C ) headers used for PCI-E hot-plug SMBus clock & data connections (an SMCI-proprietary NVMe add-on card and a cable are required for the NVME I^2C header. This feature is available for a Supermicro complete system only.)
JP2	Complex Programmable Logical Device (CPLD) header
JGPW2/JGPW4	GPU power connectors (JGPW4: GPU Power Connector1/JGPW2: GPU Power Connector2)
JPW1/JPW2 8-pin power supply connectors for backplane devices
JPW3/JPW4 8-pin power supply connectors
JSD1/JSD2	Power connectors used for SATA DOM (Disk_on-Module) devices
JSDCARD1	Solid State Device (SSD) add-on card header (Reserved for manufacture use)
JTPM1	Trusted Platform Module (TPM)/Port 80 connector
NVME10/JNVME11	NVMe Connector1/NVMe Connector2 for CPU1
NVME12/JNVME13	NVMe Connector1/NVMe Connector2 for CPU2
PSU1/PSU2	Power supply unit 1/power supply unit 2 reserved for Supermicro system use
SP1	Internal speaker/buzzer
S-SATA4/S-SATA5	Powered S-SATA ports 4/5 with power pins built-in and with support of Supermicro SuperDOM (Disk On Module) devices
SXB1A/SXB1B/SXB1C	PCI-Express 3.0 (x16+x16) slots supported by CPU2 for Supermicro proprietary riser card (w/left riser card support)

Note 1: Intel VMD is for NVMe SSD drive.

Note 2: After you've enabled VMD in the BIOS on a PCI-E slot of your choice, this PCI-E slot will be dedicated to VMD use only, and it will no longer support any PCI-E device. To reactivate this slot for PCI-E use, please disable VMD in the BIOS.

Connector Description

SXB2 PCI-Express 3.0 x8 (in x16) slot for center right riser card slot
SXB3A/SXB3B/SXB3C	PCI-Express 3.0 x16+x16+x8 slots far right ultra riser card w/support of SAS3 AOM and LAN options (via four NVMe ultra riser cards)
T-SGPIO3 Serial Link General Purpose I/O (GPIO) port
UID (JUIDB2) Unit Identifier (UID) switch
USB0/1 (USB 3.0) Back panel USB 3.0 ports
USB2 (USB 3.0) Type A USB 3.0 header (JUSBA1)
USB3/4 (3.0) USB header for two USB 3.0 connections 3/4 for front access (JUSB3)
VGA VGA Port
VROC (JRK1) Intel VROC RAID key header for NVMe SSD

LED Description Status

LED1 UID (Unit Identifier) LED Solid Blue: Unit identified
LE2 Onboard Power LED	On: Onboard power on
LEDM1	BMC Heartbeat LED	Blinking Green: BMC normal

Note: To avoid causing interference with other components, please be sure to use an add-on card that is fully compliant with the PCI-standard on a PCI slot.

Motherboard Features

Motherboard Features
CPU
This motherboard supports dual Intel® Xeon Scalable-SP or 2nd Generation Intel® Xeon Scalable-SP (Socket P) socket processors which offer Intel UltraPath Interconnect (UPI) of up to 10.4 GT/sNote: Both CPUs need to be installed for full access to the PCI-E slots, DIMM slots, and onboard controllers. Refer to the block diagram on page 18 to determine which slots or devices may be affected.
Memory
Integrated memory controller embedded in the processor supports up to 6 TB of 3DS LRDIMM/LRDIMM/3DS RDIMM/RDIMM/NV-DIMM DDR4 ECC 2933/2666/2400/2133 MHz in 24 DIMM slots.
Note 1: Up to 4TB of memory is supported with DCPMM modules installed.
Note 2: Support for 2933 MHz memory is dependent on the CPU SKU.
DIMM Size
Up to 128 GB at 1.2V
Note 1: Memory speed support depends on the processors used in the system.
Note 2: For the latest CPU/memory updates, please refer to our website athttp://www.supermicro.com/products/motherboard.
Chipset
Intel C621 PCH
Expansion Slots
PCI-Express 3.0 (x16+x16) slots supported by CPU2 for left riser card use (SXB1A/SXB1B//SXB1C)PCI-Express 3.0 x8 (in x16) slot for center right riser card slot (SXB2)PCI-Express 3.0 x16+x16+x8 slots far right ultra riser card (used for SAS3 AOM expansion and LAN options via NVMe ultra riser card support) (SXB3A/SXB3B//SXB3C)
BaseBoard Management Controller (BMC)
ASPEED AST 2500 Baseboard Controller (BMC) supports IPMI 2.0One (1) Dedicated IPMI LAN located on the rear IO back panel
Graphics
Graphics controller via AST 2500 BMC (BaseBoard Management Controller)
Network Connection
Intel C621 supports two Gigabit LAN (1 GbE) ports on the X11DPU-Z+/ZE+One IPMI-dedicated LAN supported by the AST2500 BMC
I/O Devices
Serial (COM) Port	One (1) Fast UART 16550 port on the I/O back panel
SATA 3.0	Eight (8) SATA 3.0 ports supported by Intel PCH (I-SATA 0-3, I-SATA 4-7)Two (2) SATA 3.0 ports with power-pins built-in, w/support of Supermicro SuperDOM (S-SATA4/S-SATA5)
RAID	RAID 0, 1, 5, and 10
NVMe	Four (4) NVMe (x4) PCI-E 3.0 slots

Motherboard Features

Peripheral Devices

• Two (2) USB 3.0 ports on the rear I/O panel (USB 0/1)
• One (1) Type A USB 3.O connection header (USB2)
• One (1) USB 3.0 header with two USB 3.0 connections (USB 3/4)

BIOS

• 32 MB SPI AMI BIOSSM Flash UEFI BIOS (X11DPU-Z+)
• 64 MB SPI AMI BIOSSM Flash UEFI BIOS (X11DPU-ZE+)
- ACPI 3.0/4.0, USB keyboard, Plug-and-Play (PnP), SPI dual/quad speed support, riser-card auto detection support, and SMBIOS 2.7 or later

Power Management

• Main switch override mechanism
• Power-on mode for AC power recovery
- Intel® Intelligent Power Node Manager 4.0 (available when the Supermicro Power Manager [SPM] is installed and a special power supply is used)
• Management Engine (ME)

System Health Monitoring

• Onboard voltage monitoring for +3.3V, 3.3V standby, +5V, +5V standby, +12V, CPU core, memory, chipset, BMC, and PCH
  • CPU System LED and control
  • CPU Thermal Trip support
  • Status monitor for on/off control
  • CPU Thermal Design Power (TDP) support of up to 205W (See Note 1 on next page.)

Fan Control

• Fan status monitoring via IPMI
- Dual cooling zone
• Multi-speed fan control via onboard BMC
• Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) fan control

System Management

• Trusted Platform Module (TPM) support
• PECI (Platform Environment Control Interface) 2.0a support
• UID (Unit Identification)/Remote UID
• System resource alert via SuperDoctor® 5
• SuperDoctor® 5, Watch Dog, NMI
• Chassis intrusion header and detection

LED Indicators

• CPU/Overheating
• Fan Failure
• UID/remote UID
  • LAN activity

Dimensions

• 17.0" (L) x 16.8" (W) (431.80 mm x 426.72 mm)

Note 1: The CPU maximum thermal design power (TDP) is subject to chassis and heatsink cooling restrictions. For proper thermal management, please check the chassis and heatsink specifications for proper CPU TDP sizing.

Note 2: For IPMI configuration instructions, please refer to the Embedded IPMI Configuration User's Guide available at http://www.supermicro.com/support/manuals/.

Note 3: It is strongly recommended that you change BMC log-in information upon initial system power-on. The manufacturer default username is ADMIN and the password is ADMIN. For proper BMC configuration, please refer to http://www.supermicro.com.

Figure 1-3. System Block Diagram

graph TD
    subgraph PowerInversion
        A["DDR4 DIMM"] --> B["DDR4 DIMM"]
        C["DDR4 DIMM"] --> D["DDR4 DIMM"]
        E["DDR4 DIMM"] --> F["DDR4 DIMM"]
        G["DDR4 DIMM"] --> H["DDR4 DIMM"]
        I["DDR4 DIMM"] --> J["DDR4 DIMM"]
        K["DDR4 DIMM"] --> L["DDR4 DIMM"]
        M["DDR4 DIMM"] --> N["DDR4 DIMM"]
        O["DDR4 DIMM"] --> P["DDR4 DIMM"]
        Q["DDR4 DIMM"] --> R["DDR4 DIMM"]
        S["DDR4 DIMM"] --> T["DDR4 DIMM"]
        U["DDR4 DIMM"] --> V["DDR4 DIMM"]
        W["DDR4 DIMM"] --> X["DDR4 DIMM"]
        Y["DDR4 DIMM"] --> Z["DDR4 DIMM"]
        AA["DDR4 DIMM"] --> AB["DDR4 DIMM"]
        AC["DDR4 DIMM"] --> AD["DDR4 DIMM"]
        AE["DDR4 DIMM"] --> AF["DDR4 DIMM"]
        AG["DDR4 DIMM"] --> AH["DDR4 DIMM"]
        AI["DDR4 DIMM"] --> AJ["DDR4 DIMM"]
        AK["DDR4 DIMM"] --> AL["DDR4 DIMM"]
        AM["DDR4 DIMM"] --> AN["DDR4 DIMM"]
        AO["DDR4 DIMM"] --> AP["DDR4 DIMM"]
        AQ["DDR4 DIMM"] --> AR["DDR4 DIMM"]
        AS["DDR4 DIMM"] --> AT["DDR4 DIMM"]
        AU["DDR4 DIMM"] --> AV["DDR4 DIMM"]
        AW["DDR4 DIMM"] --> AX["DDR4 DIMM"]
        AY["DDR4 DIMM"] --> AZ["DDR4 DIMM"]
        BA["DDR4 DIMM"] --> BB["DDR4 DIMM"]
        BC["DDR4 DIMM"] --> BD["DDR4 DIMM"]
        BE["DDR4 DIMM"] --> BF["DDR4 DIMM"]
        BG["HSSI CPU1 Socket ID 01"] --> BH["HSSI CPU0 Socket ID 00"]
    end

    subgraph PowerInversion
        BI["P2_NVMc1"] --> BJ["P2_NVMc+1"]
        BK["P2_NVMc-1"] --> BL["P2_NVMc+2"]
        BM["P2_NVMc+3"] --> BN["P2_NVMc+4"]
        BO["P2_NVMc+5"] --> BP["P2_NVMc+6"]
        BQ["P2_NVMc+7"] --> BR["P2_NVMc+8"]
        BS["P2_NVMc+9"] --> BT["P2_NVMc+10"]
        BU["P2_NVMc+11"] --> BV["P2_NVMc+12"]
        BW["P2_NVMc+13"] --> BX["P2_NVMc+14"]
        BY["P2_NVMc+15"] --> BZ["P2_NVMc+16"]
        CA["P2_NVMc+17"] --> CB["P2_NVMc+18"]
        CC["P2_NVMc+19"] --> CD["P2_NVMc+20"]
        DD["P2_NVMc+21"] --> DE["P2_NVMc+22"]
        FD["P2_NVMc+23"] --> FDZ["P2_NVMc+24"]
        DG["P2_NVMc+25"] --> DGZ["P2_NVMc+26"]
        DH["P2_NVMc+27"] --> DHZ["P2_NVMc+28"]
        DI["P2_NVMc+29"] --> DJ["P2_NVMc+30"]
        DK["P2_NVMc+31"] --> DL["P2_NVMc+32"]
        DN["P2_NVMc+33"] --> DNZ["P2_NVMc+34"]
        DOP["P2_NVMc+35"] --> DPZ["P2_NVMc+36"]
        DPZ["P2_NVMc+37"] --> DPZP["P2_NVMc+38"]
        DPZ["P2_NVMc+39"] --> DPZQ["P2_NVMc+40"]
        DPZQ["P2_NVMc+41"] --> DPZR["P2_NVMc+42"]
        DPZR["P2_NVMc+43"] --> DPZS["P2_NVMc+44"]
        DPZS["P2_NVMc+45"] --> DPZT["P2_NVMc+46"]
        DPZT["P2_NVMc+47"] --> DPZU["P2_NVMc+48"]
        DPZU["P2_NVMc+49"] --> DPZV["P2_NVMc+50"]
    end

    subgraph PowerInversion
        W["WIO"] --> X["WIO"]
    end

    subgraph PowerInversion
        Y["WIO"] --> Z["WIO"]

    subgraph PowerInversion
        AA["WIO"] --> AB["WIO"]

    subgraph PowerInversion
        AC["WIO"] --> AD["WIO"]

    subgraph PowerInversion
        AE["WIO"] --> AF["WIO"]

    subgraph PowerInversion
        AG["WIO"] --> AH["WIO"]

    subgraph PowerInversion
        AI["WIO"] --> AJ["WIO"]

    subgraph PowerInversion
        AK["WIO"] --> AL["WIO"]

    subgraph PowerInversion
        AM["WIO"] --> AN["WIO"]

    subgraph PowerInversion
        AO["WIO"] --> AP["WIO"]

    subgraph PowerInversion
        AQ["WIO"] --> AR["WIO"]

    subgraph PowerInversion
        AS["WIO"] --> AT["WIO"]

    subgraph PowerInversion
        AU["WIO"] --> AV["WIO"]

    subgraph PowerInversion
        AW["WIO"] --> AX["WIO"]

    subgraph PowerInversion
        AY["WIO"] --> AZ["WIO"]

    subgraph PowerInversion
        BA["WIO"] --> BB["WIO"]

    subgraph PowerInversion
        BC["WIO"] --> BD["WIO"]

    subgraph PowerInversion
        BE["WIO"] --> BF["WIO"]

    subgraph PowerInversion
        BG["WIO"] --> BH["WIO"]

    subgraph PowerInversion
        BI["WIO"] --> BJ["WIO"]

    subgraph PowerInversion
        BK["WIO"] --> BL["WIO"]

    subgraph PowerInversion
        BM["WIO"] --> BN["WIO"]

    subgraph PowerInversion
        BO["WIO"] --> BP["WIO"]

    subgraph PowerInversion
        BQ["WIO"] --> BR["WIO"]

    subgraph PowerInversion
        BS["WIO"] --> BT["WIO"]

    subgraph PowerInversion
        BU["WIO"] --> BV["WIO"]

    subgraph PowerInversion
        BW["WIO"] --> BX["WIO"]

    subgraph PowerInversion
        BYW["WIO"] --> BZ["WIO"]

    subgraph PowerInversion
        BZ["WIO"] --> BNW["WIO"]

    subgraph PowerInversion
        BWX["WIO"] --> BYX["WIO"]

    subgraph PowerInversion
        BZW["WIO"] --> BYXW["WIO"]

    subgraph PowerInversion
        BZXW["WIO"] --> BYZXW["WIO"]

    end

    style PowerInversion fill:#f9f,stroke:#333,stroke-width:2px

Note: This is a general block diagram and may not exactly represent the features on your motherboard. See the previous pages for the actual specifications of your motherboard.

1.2 Processor and Chipset Overview

Built upon the functionality and capability of Intel Xeon Scalable-SP and 2nd Generation Intel Xeon Scalable-SP processors (Socket P0) with support of C621/C622 chipset (Note 1 below), this motherboard provides superb system performance, efficient power management, and a rich feature set based on cutting-edge technologies to address the needs of next-generation users. It offers innovative solutions with unprecedented system reliability and scalability to meet the demands of High Performance Computing (HPC) platforms.

Features Supported by Intel Xeon Scalable-SP Processors

Intel® Xeon Scalable-SP processors support the following features:

• Intel AVX-512 instruction support to handle complex workloads
• 1.5x memory bandwidth increased to 6 channels
• Hot plug and enclosure management with Intel Volume Management Device (Intel VMD)
- Rich set of available IOs with increased PCI-E lanes (48 lanes)
- Integrated Intel Ethernet Connection X722 with iWARP RDMA

New features supported by 2nd Generation Intel Xeon Scalable-SP Processors

Intel 2nd Generation Intel Xeon Scalable-SP processors support the following features:

• Higher performance for a wider range of workloads with per-core performance increase
• Support of Optane DC Persistent Memory (DCPMM) with a/ordable, persistent, and large capacity

- Up to 2993 MHz memory supported (Refer to Section 1.8 for details.)

- Vector Neural Network Instruction (VNNI) support for Accelerate Deep Learning & Artificial Intelligence (AI) workloads

- Speed Select Technology provides multiple CPU profiles that can be set in the BIOS. (This feature is available on select CPU SKUs).

- Seamless hardware security mitigations & performance/frequency flexibility

Note 1: X11DPU-Z/ZE+ supports Intel C621 chipset.

Note 2: Support for 2933 MHz and DCPMM memory is dependent on the CPU SKU.

1.3 Special Features

This section describes the health monitoring features of the X11DPU-Z+/ZE+ motherboard. The motherboard has an onboard ASPEED AST2500 Baseboard Management Controller (BMC) that supports system health monitoring.

Recovery from AC Power Loss

The Basic I/O System (BIOS) provides a setting that determines how the system will respond when AC power is lost and then restored to the system. You can choose for the system to remain powered off (in which case you must press the power switch to turn it back on), or for it to automatically return to the power-on state. See the Advanced BIOS Setup section for this setting. The default setting is Last State.

1.4 System Health Monitoring

This section describes the health monitoring features of the X11DPU-Z+/ZE+. The motherboard has an onboard Baseboard Management Controller (BMC) chip that supports system health monitoring.

Onboard Voltage Monitors

The onboard voltage monitor will continuously scan crucial voltage levels. Once a voltage becomes unstable, it will give a warning or send an error message to the IPMI WebGUI and IPMIView. The user can adjust the voltage thresholds to define the sensitivity of the voltage monitor. Real-time readings of these voltage levels are all displayed in IPMI 2.0.

Fan Status Monitor with Firmware Control

The system health monitor embedded in the BMC chip can check the RPM status of the cooling fans. The CPU and chassis fans are controlled via IPMI Interface.

Environmental Temperature Control

System Health sensors in the BMC monitor the temperatures and voltage settings of onboard processors and the system in real-time via the IPMI interface. Whenever the temperature of the CPU or the system exceeds a pre-defined or a manufacturer-defined threshold, system/CPU cooling fans will be turned on to prevent the CPU or the system from overheating.

Note: To avoid possible system overheating, please be sure to provide adequate airflow to your system.

System Resource Alert

This feature is available when used with SuperDoctor 5 ^® . SuperDoctor 5 is used to notify the user of certain system events. For example, you can configure SuperDoctor 5 to provide you with warnings when the system temperature, CPU temperatures, voltages, or fan speeds go beyond a predefined range.

1.5 ACPI Features

ACPI stands for Advanced Configuration and Power Interface. The ACPI specification defines a flexible and abstract hardware interface that provides a standard way to integrate power management features throughout a computer system including its hardware, operating system, and application software. This enables the system to automatically turn on and off peripherals such as network cards, hard disk drives, and printers.

In addition to enabling operating system-directed power management, ACPI also provides a generic system event mechanism for Plug and Play and an operating system-independent interface for configuration control. ACPI leverages the Plug and Play BIOS data structures while providing a processor architecture-independent implementation that is compatible with appropriate Windows operating systems. For detailed information on OS support, please refer to our website at www.supermicro.com.

1.6 Power Supply

As with all computer products, a stable power source is necessary for proper and reliable operation. It is even more important for processors that have high CPU clock rates.

1.7 Advanced Power Management

The following new advanced power management features are supported by the motherboard.

Intel® Intelligent Power Node Manager (IPNM)

Intel's Intelligent Power Node Manager (IPNM) provides your system with real-time thermal control and power management for maximum energy efficiency. Although IPNM Specification Version 2.0/3.0 is supported by the BMC (Baseboard Management Controller), your system must also have IPNM-compatible Management Engine (ME) firmware installed to use this feature.

Note: Support for IPNM 2.0/3.0 support is dependent on the power supply used in the system.

Management Engine (ME)

The Management Engine, which is an ARC controller embedded in the IOH (I/O Hub), provides Server Platform Services (SPS) to your system. The services provided by SPS are different from those provided by the ME on client platforms.

1.8 Intel® Optane DC Persistent Memory Overview

The 2nd Gen Intel 82xx/62xx/52xx/4215 series processors support new DCPMM (Optane™ DC Persistent Memory Modules) technology. DCPMM offers data persistence with higher capacity at lower latencies than the existing memory modules and provides hyper-speed storage capability for high-performance computing platforms with flexible configuration options.

Chapter 2

Installation

2.1 Static-Sensitive Devices

Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) can damage electronic components. To avoid damaging your motherboard and your system, it is important to handle it very carefully. The following measures are generally sufficient to protect your equipment from ESD.

Precautions

• Use a grounded wrist strap designed to prevent static discharge.
• Touch a grounded metal object before removing the motherboard from the antistatic bag.
• Handle the motherboard by its edges only; do not touch its components, peripheral chips, memory modules or gold contacts.
• When handling chips or modules, avoid touching their pins.
• Put the motherboard and peripherals back into their antistatic bags when not in use.
• For grounding purposes, make sure that your chassis provides excellent conductivity between the power supply, the case, the mounting fasteners and the motherboard.
• Use only the correct type of CMOS onboard battery as specified by the manufacturer. To avoid possible explosions, do not Install the CMOS battery upside down.

Unpacking

The motherboard is shipped in antistatic packaging to avoid static damage. When unpacking the motherboard, make sure that the person handling it is static protected.

2.2 Motherboard Installation

All motherboards have standard mounting holes to fit different types of chassis. Make sure that the locations of all the mounting holes for both the motherboard and the chassis match. Although a chassis may have both plastic and metal mountiJng fasteners, metal ones are highly recommended because they ground the motherboard to the chassis. Make sure that the metal standoffs click in or are screwed in tightly.

Tools Needed

SUPER X11DPU-Z+ REV 1.01 I/O X33 U255 BAR CODS C E FC PMI CODE X11DPU-Z+

Location of Mounting Holes

Note 1: To avoid damaging the motherboard and its components, please do not use a force greater than 8 lb/inch on each mounting screw during motherboard installation.

Note 2: Some components are very close to the mounting holes. Please take precautionary measures to avoid damaging these components when installing the motherboard to the chassis.

Installing the Motherboard

1. Install the I/O shield into the back of the chassis as needed.

2. Locate the mounting holes on the motherboard. See the previous page for the locations.

Dress Chassis

1. Locate the matching mounting holes on the chassis. Align the mounting holes on the motherboard against the mounting holes on the chassis.

328 Motherboard Chassis Motherboard Chassis

1. Install standoffs in the chassis as needed.

2. Install the motherboard into the chassis carefully to avoid damaging other motherboard components.

3. Using the Phillips screwdriver, insert a Phillips head #6 screw into a mounting hole on the motherboard and its matching mounting hole on the chassis.

4. Repeat Step 5 to insert #6 screws into all mounting holes.

5. Make sure that the motherboard is securely placed in the chassis.

Note: Images displayed in this manual are for illustration only. Your chassis or components might look different from those shown in this manual.

2.3 Processor and Heatsink Installation

Warning: When handling the processor package, avoid placing direct pressure on the label area of the CPU or CPU socket. Also, improper CPU installation or socket misalignment can cause serious damage to the CPU or motherboard which may result in RMA repairs. Please read and follow all instructions thoroughly before installing your CPU and heatsink.

• Always connect the power cord last, and always remove it before adding, removing, or changing any hardware components. Please note that the processor and heatsink should be assembled together first to form the Processor Heatsink Module (PHM), and then install the entire PHM into the CPU socket.
• When you receive a motherboard without a processor pre-installed, make sure that the plastic CPU socket cap is in place and that none of the socket pins are bent; otherwise, contact your retailer immediately.
  • Refer to the Supermicro website for updates on CPU support.
• Please follow the instructions given in the ESD Warning section on the first page of this chapter before handling, installing, or removing system components.

The Intel® Xeon Scalable-SP and 2nd Generation Intel® Xeon Scalable-SP Series Processors

Technical line drawing of a rectangular electronic component with mounting holes and internal structure (no text or symbols)

Intel Xeon Scalable-SP and 2nd Gen Intel Xeon Scalable-SP Processor

Note: All graphics, drawings, and pictures shown in this manual are for illustration only. The components that came with your machine may or may not look exactly the same as those shown in this manual.

Overview of the Processor Socket Assembly

The processor socket assembly contains 1) the Intel Intel® Xeon Scalable-SP or 2nd Generation Intel® Xeon Scalable-SP processor, 2) the narrow processor clip, 3) the dust cover, and 4) the CPU socket.

1. Intel Processor

Line drawing of a rectangular electronic device casing with mounting holes (no text or symbols)

1. Narrow processor clip (the plastic processor package carrier used for the CPU)

Technical line drawing of a mechanical bracket or frame structure (no text or symbols)

1. Dust Cover

Line drawing of a microprocessor base with mounting holes and a central chip (no text or symbols)

1. CPU Socket

Technical line drawing of a mechanical component with mounting holes and internal grid structure (no text or symbols)

Note: Be sure to cover the CPU socket with the dust cover when the CPU is not installed.

Overview of the Processor Heatsink Module (PHM)

The Processor Heatsink Module (PHM) contains 1) a heatsink, 2) a narrow processor clip, and 3) the Intel® Xeon Scalable-SP or 2nd Generation Intel® Xeon Scalable-SP processor.

1. Heatsink

2. Narrow processor clip

3. Intel Processor

Processor Heatsink Module (PHM)

Technical line drawings of a mechanical component with a green downward arrow indicating a reduction or disassembly (no text or symbols present)

Technical line drawing of a mechanical housing component with no visible text or symbols

Attaching the Processor to the Narrow Processor Clip to Create the Processor Package Assembly

To properly install the CPU into the narrow processor clip, please follow the steps below.

1. Locate pin 1 (notch A), which is the triangle located on the top of the narrow processor clip. Also locate notch B and notch C on the processor clip.

2. Locate pin 1 (notch A), which is the triangle on the substrate of the CPU. Also, locate notch B and notch C on the CPU as shown below.

3. Align pin 1 (the triangle on the substrate) of the CPU with pin 1 (the triangle) of the narrow processor clip. Once they are aligned, carefully insert the CPU into the processor clip by sliding notch B of the CPU into notch B of the processor clip, and sliding notch C of the CPU into notch C of the processor clip.

4. Examine all corners of the CPU to ensure that it is properly seated on the processor clip. Once the CPU is securely attached to the processor clip, the processor package assembly is created.

Note: Please exercise extreme caution when handling the CPU. Do not touch the CPU LGA-lands to avoid damaging the LGA-lands or the CPU. Be sure to wear ESD gloves when handling components.

CPU (Upside Down) w/CPU LGA Lands up C Align Notch C of the CPU and Notch C of the Processor Clip Pin 1 A Align Notch B of the CPU and Notch B of the Processor Clip B CPU/Heatsink Package ( Upside Down ) Align CPU Pin 1 A Processor Package Carrier (w/CPU mounted on the Processor Clip)

Attaching the Processor Package Assembly to the Heatsink to Form the Processor Heatsink Module (PHM)

After you have made a processor package assembly by following the instructions on the previous page, please follow the steps below to mount the processor package assembly onto the heatsink to create the Processor Heatsink Module (PHM).

1. Locate "1" on the heatsink label and the triangular corner next to it on the heatsink. With your index finger pressing against the screw at this triangular corner, carefully hold and turn the heatsink upside down with the thermal-grease side facing up. Remove the protective thermal film if present, and apply the proper amount of the thermal grease as needed. (Skip this step if you have a new heatsink because the necessary thermal grease is pre-applied in the factory.)

2. Holding the processor package assembly at the center edge, turn it upside down. With the thermal-grease side facing up, locate the hollow triangle located at the corner of the processor carrier assembly ("a" in the graphic). Note a larger hole and plastic mounting clicks located next to the hollow triangle. Also locate another set of mounting clicks and a larger hole at the diagonal corner of the same (reverse) side of the processor carrier assembly ("b" in the graphic). Non-Fabric CPU and Processor Clip

3. With the back of heatsink and the reverse side of the processor package assembly facing up, align the triangular corner on the heatsink ("A" in the graphic) against the mounting clips next to the hollow triangle ("a") on the processor package assembly.

4. Also align the triangular corner ("B") at the diagonal side of the heatsink with the corresponding clips on the processor package assembly ("b").

5. Once the mounting clips on the processor package assembly are properly aligned with the corresponding holes on the back of heatsink, securely attach the heatsink to the processor package assembly by snapping the mounting clips at the proper places on the heatsink to create the processor heatsink module (PHM).

Non-Fabric CPU and Processor Clip (Upside Down) Triangle on the CPU Triangle on the Processor Clip Heatsink (Upside Down) On Locations of (C, D), the notches snap onto the heat sink's mounting holes On Locations (A, B), the notches snap onto the heatsink's sides Make sure Mounting Notches snap into place

Preparing the CPU Socket for Installation

This motherboard comes with the CPU socket pre-assembled in the factory. The CPU socket contains 1) a dust cover, 2) a socket bracket, 3) the CPU (P0) socket, and 4) a back plate. These components are pre-installed on the motherboard before shipping.

Technical line drawing of a computer processor base with visible internal components and mounting holes (no text or symbols)

CPU Socket w/Dust Cover On

Removing the Dust Cover from the CPU Socket

Remove the dust cover from the CPU socket, exposing the CPU socket and socket pins as shown on the illustration below.

Note: Do not touch the socket pins to avoid damaging them, causing the CPU to malfunction.

Dusk Cover Remove the dust cover from the CPU socket. Do not touch the socket pins! Socket Pins CPU Socket

Installing the Processor Heatsink Module (PHM)

1. Once you have assembled the processor heatsink module (PHM) by following the instructions listed on page 31, you are ready to install the processor heatsink module (PHM) into the CPU socket on the motherboard. To install the PHM into the CPU socket, follow the instructions below.
2. Locate the triangle (pin 1) on the CPU socket, and locate the triangle (pin 1) at the corner of the PHM that is closest to "1." (If you have difficulty locating pin 1 of the PHM, turn the PHM upside down. With the LGA-lands side facing up, you will note the hollow triangle located next to a screw at the corner. Turn the PHM right side up, and you will see a triangle marked on the processor clip at the same corner of hollow triangle.)
3. Carefully align pin 1 (the triangle) on the the PHM against pin 1 (the triangle) on the CPU socket.
4. Once they are properly aligned, insert the two diagonal oval holes on the heatsink into the guiding posts.
5. Using a T30 Torx-bit screwdriver, install four screws into the mounting holes on the socket to securely attach the PHM onto the motherboard starting with the screw marked "1" (in the sequence of 1, 2, 3, and 4).

Note: Do not use excessive force when tightening the screws to avoid damaging the LGA-lands and the processor.

Oval C Oval D Large Guiding Post Small Guiding Post Printed Triangle Mounting the Processor Heatsink Module into the CPU socket (on the motherboard) T30 Torx Driver Use a torque of 12 lbf #1 #2 #3 Tighten the screws in the sequence of 1, 2, 3, 4 (top 3 quarter view)

Removing the Processor Heatsink Module (PHM) from the Motherboard

Before removing the processor heatsink module (PHM), unplug power cord from the power outlet.

1. Using a T30 Torx-bit screwdriver, turn the screws on the PHM counterclockwise to loosen them from the socket, starting with screw marked #4 (in the sequence of 4, 3, 2, 1).

2. After all four screws are removed, wiggle the PHM gently and pull it up to remove it from the socket.

Note: To properly remove the processor heatsink module, be sure to loosen and remove the screws on the PHM in the sequence of 4, 3, 2, 1 as shown below.

Removing the screws in the sequence of 4, 3, 2, 1 #1 #2 #3 #4 Printed Triangle on Motherboard CPU Socket After removing the screws, lift the Processor Heatsink Module off the CPU socket.

2.4 Memory Support and Installation

Note: Check the Supermicro website for recommended memory modules. Exercise extreme care when installing or removing DIMM modules to prevent any damage.

Memory Support

The motherboard supports up to 6TB of 3DS Load Reduced DIMM (3DS LRDIMM), Load Reduced DIMM (LRDIMM), 3DS Registered DIMM (3DS RDIMM), Registered DIMM (RDIMM), Non-Volatile DIMM (NV-DIMM) DDR4 (288-pin) ECC 2933*/2666/2400/2133 MHz memory in 24 slots (*Note 1 below). This motherboard also supports up to 5TB memory with DCPMM modules installed based on the DCPMM population table on page 42.

Note 1: Support for 2933 MHz memory is dependent on the CPU SKU.

Note 2: 16Gb-based memory modules are supported by 2nd Gen Intel Xeon Scalable-SP processors only.

Memory Installation Sequence

Memory modules for the X11 UP/DP/MP motherboards are populated using the "Fill First" method. The blue memory slot of each channel is considered the "first DIMM module" of the channel, and the black slot, the second module of the channel. When installing memory modules, be sure to populate the blue memory slots first and then populate the black slots. To maximize memory capacity, please populate all DIMM slots on the motherboard, including all blue slots and black slots.

General Memory Population Requirements

1. Be sure to use the memory modules of the same type and speed on the motherboard. Mixing of memory modules of different types and speeds is not allowed.
2. Using unbalanced memory topology such as populating two DIMMs in one channel while populating one DIMM in another channel on the same motherboard will result in reduced memory performance.
3. Populating memory slots with a pair of DIMM modules of the same type and size will result in interleaved memory, which will improve memory performance.

DDR4 Memory Support for Intel Xeon Scalable-SP Processors

DDR4 Memory Support
Type	Ranks Per DIMM & Data Width	DIMM Capacity (GB)		Speed (MT/s); Voltage (V); Slots Per Channel (SPC) and DIMMs Per Channel (DPC)
				1 Slot Per Channel 2 Slots	Per Channel
		DRAM Density		1DPC (1-DIMM Per Channel)	1DPC (1-DIMM Per Channel)	2DPC (2-DIMM Per Channel)
		4Gb* 8Gb	1.2 V 1.2 V 1.2 V
RDIMM SRx4 4GB	8GB 2666 2666	2666
RDIMM SRx8 8GB	16GB 2666 2666	2666
RDIMM DRx8 8GB	16GB 2666 2666	2666
RDIMM DRx4 16GB	32GB 2666 2666	2666
RDIMM 3Ds	QRX4	N/A	2H-64GB	2666	2666	2666
RDIMM 3Ds	8RX4	N/A	4H-128GB	2666	2666	2666
LRDIMM QRx4 32GB	64GB 2666 2666	2666
LRDIMM 3Ds	QRX4	N/A	2H-64GB	2666	2666	2666
LRDIMM 3Ds	8Rx4	N/A	4H-128GB	2666	2666	2666

DDR4 Memory Support for 2nd Gen Intel Xeon Scalable-SP Processors

DDR4 Memory Support
Type	Ranks Per DIMM & Data Width	DIMM Capacity (GB)			Speed (MT/s); Voltage (V); Slots Per Channel (SPC) and DIMMs Per Channel (DPC)
					1 Slot Per Channel 2 Slots Per Channel
		DRAM Density			1DPC (1-DIMM Per Channel)	1DPC (1-DIMM Per Channel)	2DPC (2-DIMM Per Channel)
		4Gb* 8Gb 16Gb 1.2 V 1.2 V 1.2 V
RDIMM SRx4 4GB 8GB 16GB 2933 2933
RDIMM SRx8 8GB 16GB 32GB 2933 2933 2933
RDIMM DRx8 8GB 16GB 32GB 2933 2933 2933
RDIMM DRx4 16GB 32GB 64GB 2933 2933 2933
RDIMM 3Ds	QRX4	N/A	2H-64GB	2H-128GB	2933	2933	2933
RDIMM 3Ds	8RX4	N/A	4H-128GB	4H-256GB	2933	2933	2933
LRDIMM	QRx4	32GB	64GB	128GB	2933	2933	2933
LRDIMM 3Ds	QRX4	N/A	2H-64GB	2H-128GB	2933	2933	2933
LRDIMM 3Ds	8Rx4	N/A	4H-128GB	4H-256GB	2933	2933	2933

Note 1: 2933 MHz memory support in two-DIMMs per-channel (2DPC) configuration can be achieved by using memory purchased from Supermicro.

Note 2: Support for 2933 MHz memory is dependent on the CPU SKU.

Note 3: 16Gb-based memory modules are supported by 2nd Gen Intel Xeon Scalable-SP processors only.

DIMM Population Guidelines for Optimal Performance

For optimal memory performance, follow the instructions listed in the tables below when populating memory modules.

Key Parameters for DIMM Configuration

Key Parameters for DIMM Configurations
Parameters Possible Values
Number of Channels 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6
Number of DIMMs per Channel 1DPC (1 DIMM Per Channel) or 2DPC (2 DIMMs Per Channel)
DIMM Type RDIMM (w/ECC), LRDIMM, 3DS-LRDIMM
DIMM Construction	non-3DS RDIMM Raw Cards: A/B (2RX4), C (1RX4), D (1RX8), E (2RX8)3DS RDIMM Raw Cards: A/B (4RX4)non-3DS LRDIMM Raw Cards: D/E (4RX4)3DS LRDIMM Raw Cards: A/B (8RX4)

DIMM Mixing Guidelines

General Population Requirements

DIMM Mixing Rules

Please populate all memory modules with DDR4 DIMMs only.X4 and X8 DIMMs can be mixed in the same channel.Mixing of LRDIMMs and RDIMMs is not allowed in the same channel, across different channels, and across different sockets.Mixing of non-3DS and 3DS LRDIMM is not allowed in the same channel, across different channels, and across different sockets.

Mixing of DIMM Types within a Channel
DIMM Types RDIMM LRDIMM 3DS LRDIMM
RDIMM Allowed Not Allowed Not Allowed
LRDIMM	Not Allowed	Allowed	Not Allowed
3DS LRDIMM	Not Allowed	Not Allowed	Allowed

DIMM Population Table

Note 1: Unbalanced memory configuration decreases memory performance and is not recommended for Supermicro motherboards.

Note 2: Only 2nd Gen Intel Xeon Scalable-SP (82xx/62xx/52xx/4215 series) processors support DCPMM memory.

Memory Population Table
When 1 CPU is used: Memory Population Sequence
1 CPU & 1 DIMM CPU1: P1-DIMMA1
1 CPU & 2 DIMMs CPU1: P1-DIMMA1/P1-DIMMD1
1 CPU & 3 DIMMs CPU1: P1-DIMMC1/P1-DIMMB1/P1-DIMMA1
1 CPU & 4 DIMMs CPU1: P1-DIMMB1/P1-DIMMA1/P1-DIMMD1/P1-DIMME1
1 CPU & 5 DIMMs(Unbalanced: not recommended)	CPU1: P1-DIMMC1/P1-DIMMB1/P1-DIMMA1/P1-DIMMD1/P1-DIMME1
1 CPU & 6 DIMM CPU1: P1-DIMMC1/P1-DIMMB1/P1-DIMMA1/P1-DIMMD1/P1-DIMME1/P1-DIMMF1
1 CPU & 7 DIMMs(Unbalanced: not recommended)	CPU1: P1-DIMMB1/P1-DIMMB2/P1-DIMMA1/P1-DIMMA2/P1-DIMMD1/P1-DIMME1/P1-DIMMF1
1 CPU & 8 DIMMs	CPU1: P1-DIMMB1/P1-DIMMB2/P1-DIMMA1/P1-DIMMA2/P1-DIMMD2/P1-DIMMD1/P1-DIMME2/P1-DIMME1
1 CPU & 9 DIMMs(Unbalanced: not recommended)	CPU1: P1-DIMMC1/P1-DIMMC2/P1-DIMMB1/P1-DIMMB2/P1-DIMMA1/P1-DIMMA2/P1-DIMMD1/P1-DIMME1/P1-DIMMF1
1 CPU & 10 DIMMs(Unbalanced: not recommended)	CPU1: P1-DIMMC1/P1-DIMMB1/P1-DIMMB2/P1-DIMMA1/P1-DIMMA2/P1-DIMMD2/P1-DIMMD1/P1-DIMME2/P1-DIMME1/P1-DIMMF1
1 CPU & 11 DIMMs(Unbalanced: not recommended)	CPU1: P1-DIMMC1/P1-DIMMC2/P1-DIMMB1/P1-DIMMB2/P1-DIMMA1/P1-DIMMA2/P1-DIMMD2/P1-DIMMD1/P1-DIMME2/P1-DIMME1/P1-DIMMF1
1 CPU & 12 DIMMs	CPU1: P1-DIMMC1/P1-DIMMC2/P1-DIMMB1/P1-DIMMB2/P1-DIMMA1/P1-DIMMA2/P1-DIMMD2/P1-DIMMD1/P1-DIMME2/P1-DIMME1/P1-DIMMF2/P1-DIMMF1
When 2 CPUs are used: Memory Population Sequence
2 CPUs & 2 DIMMs	CPU1: P1-DIMMA1CPU2: P2-DIMMA1
2 CPUs & 4 DIMMs	CPU1: P1-DIMMA1/P1-DIMMD1CPU2: P2-DIMMA1/P2-DIMMD1
2 CPUs & 6 DIMMs	CPU1: P1-DIMMC1/P1-DIMMB1/P1-DIMMA1CPU2: P2-DIMMC1/P2-DIMMB1/P2-DIMMA1
2 CPUs & 8 DIMMs	CPU1: P1-DIMMB1/P1-DIMMA1/P1-DIMMD1/P1-DIMME1CPU2: P2-DIMMB1/P2-DIMMA1/P2-DIMMD1/P2-DIMME1
2 CPUs & 10 DIMMs	CPU1: P1-DIMMC1/P1-DIMMB1/P1-DIMMA1/P1-DIMMD1/P1-DIMME1/P1-DIMMF1CPU2: P2-DIMMB1/P2-DIMMA1/P2-DIMMD1/P2-DIMME1
2 CPUs & 12 DIMMs	CPU1: P1-DIMMC1/P1-DIMMB1/P1-DIMMA1/P1-DIMMD1/P1-DIMME1/P1-DIMMF1CPU2: P2-DIMMC1/P2-DIMMB1/P2-DIMMA1/P2-DIMMD1/P2-DIMME1/P2-DIMMF1
2 CPUs & 14 DIMMs	CPU1: P1-DIMMB1/P1-DIMMB2/P1-DIMMA1/P1-DIMMA2/P1-DIMMD2/P1-DIMMD1/P1-DIMME2/P1-DIMME1CPU2: P2-DIMMC1/P2-DIMMB1/P2-DIMMA1/P2-DIMMD1/P2-DIMME1/P2-DIMMF1
2 CPUs & 16 DIMMs	CPU1: P1-DIMMB1/P1-DIMMB2/P1-DIMMA1/P1-DIMMA2/P1-DIMMD2/P1-DIMMD1/P1-DIMME2/P1-DIMME1CPU2: P2-DIMMB1/P2-DIMMB2/P2-DIMMA1/P2-DIMMA2/P2-DIMMD2/P2-DIMMD1/P2-DIMME2/P2-DIMME1
2 CPUs & 18 DIMMs	CPU1: P1-DIMMC1/P1-DIMMC2/P1-DIMMB1/P1-DIMMB2/P1-DIMMA1/P1-DIMMA2/P1-DIMMD2/P1-DIMMD1/P1-DIMME2/P1-DIMME1/P1-DIMMF2/P1-DIMMF1CPU2: P2-DIMMC1/P2-DIMMB1/P2-DIMMA1/P2-DIMMD1/P2-DIMME1/P2-DIMMF1
2 CPUs & 20 DIMMs	CPU1: P1-DIMMC1/P1-DIMMC2/P1-DIMMB1/P1-DIMMB2/P1-DIMMA1/P1-DIMMA2/P1-DIMMD2/P1-DIMMD1/P1-DIMME2/P1-DIMME1/P1-DIMMF2/P1-DIMMF1CPU2: P2-DIMMB1/P2-DIMMB2/P2-DIMMA1/P2-DIMMA2/P2-DIMMD2/P2-DIMMD1/P2-DIMME2/P2-DIMME1
2 CPUs & 22 DIMMs(Unbalanced: not recommended)	CPU1: P1-DIMMC1/P1-DIMMC2/P1-DIMMB1/P1-DIMMB2/P1-DIMMA1/P1-DIMMA2/P1-DIMMD2/P1-DIMMD1/P1-DIMME2/P1-DIMME1/P1-DIMMF1CPU2: P2-DIMMC1/P2-DIMMC2/P2-DIMMB1/P2-DIMMB2/P2-DIMMA1/P2-DIMMA2/P2-DIMMD2/P2-DIMMD1/P2-DIMME2/P2-DIMME1/P2-DIMMF1
2 CPUs & 24 DIMMs	CPU1: P1-DIMMC1/P1-DIMMC2/P1-DIMMB1/P1-DIMMB2/P1-DIMMA1/P1-DIMMA2/P1-DIMMD2/P1-DIMMD1/P1-DIMME2/P1-DIMME1/P1-DIMMF2/P1-DIMMF1CPU2: P2-DIMMC1/P2-DIMMC2/P2-DIMMB1/P2-DIMMB2/P2-DIMMA1/P2-DIMMA2/P2-DIMMD2/P2-DIMMD1/P2-DIMME2/P2-DIMME1/P2-DIMMF1

Note: Please refer to the Memory Configuration User Guide for the X11 UP/DP/MP Motherboards that is posted on our website for detailed information on memory support for this motherboard.

Memory Rank Sparing Tables

Dual Rank Memory Rank Sparing (16GB DIMM)
Memory Population Total RAM Detected
	One Rank Configuration Two Rank Configuration
A1 8GB	8GB
A1+B1 16GB 16GB
A1+B1+C1 24GB 24GB
A1+B1+C1+D1 32GB 32GB
A1+B1+C1+D1+E1 40GB 40GB
A1+B1+C1+D1+E1+F1 49GB 49GB
A1+A2 24GB 16GB
A1+A2+B1+B2 48GB 32GB
A1+A2+B1+B2+C1+C2 72GB 48GB
A1+A2+B1+B2+C1+C2+D1+D2 96GB 64GB
A1+A2+B1+B2+C1+C2+D1+D2+E1+E2 120GB 80GB
A1+A2+B1+B2+C1+C2+D1+D2+E1+E2+F1+F2 144GB 96GB

Quad Rank Memory Rank Sparing (64GB DIMM)
Memory Population Total RAM Detected
	One Rank Configuration Two Rank Configuration
A1 48GB 32GB
A1+B1 96GB 64GB
A1+B1+C1 144GB 96GB
A1+B1+C1+D1 192GB 128GB
A1+B1+C1+D1+E1 240GB 160GB
A1+B1+C1+D1+E1+F1 288GB 192GB
A1+A2 112GB 96GB
A1+A2+B1+B2 224GB 192GB
A1+A2+B1+B2+C1+C2 336GB 288GB
A1+A2+B1+B2+C1+C2+D1+D2 448GB 384GB
A1+A2+B1+B2+C1+C2+D1+D2+E1+E2 560GB	480GB
A1+A2+B1+B2+C1+C2+D1+D2+E1+E2+F1+F2 672GB 576GB

DCPMM Memory Population Tables for 2nd Gen Intel Xeon Scalable-SP Processors

Note: Only 2nd Gen Intel Xeon Scalable-SP (82xx/62xx/52xx/4215 series) processors support DCPMM memory.

Symmetric Population within 1 CPU Socket

Modes

P1-DIMMF1

P1-DIMMF2

P1-DIMME1

P1-DIMME2

P1-DIMMD1

P1-DIMMD2

P1-DIMMA2

P1-DIMMA1

P1-DIMMB2

P1-DIMMB1

P1-DIMMC2

P1-DIMMC1

Channel Config.

AD

DRAM1

DCPMM

DRAM1

DCPMM

DRAM1

DCPMM

DCPMM

DRAM1

DCPMM

DRAM1

DCPMM

DRAM1

2-2-2

MM

DRAM1

DCPMM

DRAM1

DCPMM

DRAM1

DCPMM

DCPMM

DRAM1

DCPMM

DRAM1

DCPMM

DRAM1

2-2-2

AD + MM

DRAM3

DCPMM

DRAM3

DCPMM

DRAM3

DCPMM

DCPMM

DRAM3

DCPMM

DRAM3

DCPMM

DRAM3

2-2-2

AD

DRAM1

-

DRAM1

-

DRAM1

DCPMM

DCPMM

DRAM1

-

DRAM1

-

DRAM1

2-1-1

MM

DRAM2

-

DRAM2

-

DRAM2

DCPMM

DCPMM

DRAM2

-

DRAM2

-

DRAM2

2-1-1

AD + MM

DRAM3

-

DRAM3

-

DRAM3

DCPMM

DCPMM

DRAM3

-

DRAM3

-

DRAM3

2-1-1

AD

DRAM1

-

DRAM1

DCPMM

DRAM1

DCPMM

DCPMM

DRAM1

DCPMM

DRAM1

-

DRAM1

2-2-1

MM

DRAM1

-

DRAM1

DCPMM

DRAM1

DCPMM

DCPMM

DRAM1

DCPMM

DRAM1

-

DRAM1

2-2-1

AD + MM

DRAM3

-

DRAM3

DCPMM

DRAM3

DCPMM

DCPMM

DRAM3

DCPMM

DRAM3

-

DRAM3

2-2-1

AD

DCPMM

-

DRAM1

-

DRAM1

-

-

DRAM1

-

DRAM1

-

DCPMM

1-1-1

MM

DCPMM

-

DRAM1

-

DRAM1

-

-

DRAM1

-

DRAM1

-

DCPMM

1-1-1

AD + MM

DCPMM

-

DRAM3

-

DRAM3

-

-

DRAM3

-

DRAM3

-

DCPMM

1-1-1

AD

DCPMM

-

DRAM1

DRAM1

DRAM1

DRAM1

DRAM1

DRAM1

DRAM1

DRAM1

-

DCPMM

2-2-1

Asymmetric Population within 1 CPU Socket

Modes

P1-DIMMF1

P1-DIMMF2

P1-DIMME1

P1-DIMME2

P1-DIMMD1

P1-DIMMD2

P1-DIMMA2

P1-DIMMA1

P1-DIMMB2

P1-DIMMB1

P1-DIMM2

P1-DIMMC1

Channel Config.

AD

DRAM1

-

DRAM1

-

DRAM1

-

DCPMM

DRAM1

-

DRAM1

-

DRAM1

2/1-1-1

AD*

DRAM1

-

DRAM1

-

DRAM1

-

DCPMM

DRAM1

-

DRAM1

-

DRAM1

2/1-1-1

Asymmetric Population within 1 CPU Socket

Modes

P1-DIMMF1

P1-DIMMF2

P1-DIMME1

P1-DIMME2

P1-DIMMD1

P1-DIMMD2

P1-DIMMA2

P1-DIMMA1

P1-DIMMB2

P1-DIMMB1

P1-DIMMC2

P1-DIMMC1

Channel Config.

AD

DRAM1

-

DRAM1

-

DRAM1

-

DCPMM

DRAM1

-

DRAM1

-

DRAM1

2/1-1-1

AD*

DRAM1

-

DRAM1

-

DRAM1

-

DCPMM

DRAM1

-

DRAM1

-

DRAM1

2/1-1-1

Legend (for the two tables above)
DDR4 Type					Capacity
DRAM1	RDIMM 3DS	RDIMM LRDIMM	MM 3DS LRDIMM		Refer to Validation Matrix (DDR4 DIMMs validated with DCPMM) below.
DRAM2	RDIMM	-		-
DRAM3	RDIMM 3DS	RDIMM LRDIMM

Note: DDR4 single rank x8 is not available for DCPMM Memory Mode or App-Direct Mode.

Legend (for the first two tables above)
Capacity
DCPMM	Any Capacity (Uniformly for all channels for a given configuration)

• * 2nd socket has no DCPMM DIMM
- Mode definitions: AD=App Direct Mode, MM=Memory Mode, AD+MM=Mixed Mode
- For MM, general DDR4+DCPMM ratio is between 1:4 and 1:16. Excessive capacity for DCPMM can be used for AD.
- For each individual population, rearrangements between channels are allowed as long as the resulting population is compliant with the X11 memory population rules for the 2nd Gen Intel Xeon Scalable-SP processors.
- For each individual population, please use the same DDR4 DIMM in all slots.
- For each individual population, sockets are normally symmetric with exceptions for 1 DCPMM per socket and 1 DCPMM per node case. Currently, DCPMM modules operate at 2666 MHz.
- No mixing of DCPMM and NVMDIMMs within the same platform is allowed.
- This DCPMM population guide targets a balanced DCPMM-to-DRAM-cache ratio in MM and MM + AD modes.

Note: Only 2nd Gen Intel Xeon Scalable-SP (82xx/62xx/52xx/4215 series) processors support DCPMM memory.

Validation Matrix (DDR4 DIMMs Validated w/DCPMM)
DIMM Type	Ranks Per DIMM & Data Width (Stack)	DIMM Capacity (GB)
		DRAM Density
		4Gb 8Gb
RDIMM	1Rx4 8GB 16GB
	2Rx8 8GB 16GB
	2Rx4 16GB 32GB
LRDIMM 4Rx4 N/A 64GB
LRDIMM 3DS 8Rx4 (4H) N/A 128GB

DIMM Installation

1. Insert DIMM modules in the sequence listed in the memory population table on the previous page. For the system to work properly, please use memory modules of the same type and speed on the motherboard.
2. Push the release tabs outwards on both ends of the DIMM slot to unlock it.
3. Align the key of the DIMM module with the receptive point on the memory slot.
4. Align the notches on both ends of the module against the receptive points on the ends of the slot.
5. Use two thumbs together to press on both ends of the module straight down into the slot until the module snaps into place.
6. Press the release tabs to the lock positions to secure the DIMM module into the slot.

DIMM Module Removal

Press the release tabs on both ends of the DIMM socket to release the DIMM module from the socket as shown in the drawing on the right.

Diagram of a computer motherboard layout showing CPU socket, RAM slots, and connected hardware components with labeled ports and connectors.

Technical diagram of a mechanical component with internal structure and highlighted section (no text or symbols)

Notches Release Tabs

Diagram of a mechanical component with two views showing internal structure and directional arrows (no text or symbols)

Warning 1: Please do not use excessive force when pressing the release tabs on the ends of the DIMM socket to avoid causing any damage to the DIMM module or the DIMM socket.

Warning 2: Please handle DIMM modules with care. Carefully follow all the instructions given on Page 1 of this chapter to prevent ESD-related damages to your memory modules or components.

2.5 Rear I/O Ports

See the layout below for the locations and descriptions of the various I/O ports on the rear of the motherboard.

SUPER CPU2008 X110PU-2+ CPU2008 CPU2008 CE FC CPU2008 X3 CPU2008

Back panel I/O Port Locations and Definitions

Diagram showing six labeled electronic connectors with blue and black connectors, numbered 1 to 6.

No. Description No. Description
1. USB 0 (USB 3.0) 4. COM1
2. USB 1 (USB 3.0) 5. Unit Identifier Switch (UID)
3. IPMI LAN 6. VGA

VGA Port

The onboard VGA port is located next to the COM port on the I/O back panel. Use this connection for VGA display.

Serial Port

There is one COM port (COM1) located next to the IPMI_LAN port on the I/O back panel. The COM port provides serial communication support.

1. VGA Port 2. COM1 SUPER X110PG-Z REX-16T CE F6 PNTCK6 ETS LCSK6 BASCCS ② ①

Universal Serial Bus (USB) Ports

There are two USB 3.0 ports (USB0/1) on the I/O back panel. A USB header, located next to the front control panel (JF1), provides two USB 3.0 connections (USB3/4) for front access. USB2, a Type A USB header, also provides front USB 3.0 support. The onboard headers can be used for front side USB access with appropriate cables (not included).

Back Panel USB 0/1 (3.0)Pin Definitions
Pin# Definition Pin# Definition
A1 VB	JS B1 Power
A2 D-	B2 USB_N
A3 D+	B3 USB_P
A4 GND	B4 GND
A5 Stda_SSRX-	B5 USB3_RN
A6 Stda_SSRX+	B6 USB3_RP
A7 GND	B7 GND
A8 Stda_SSTX-	B8 USB3_TN
A9 Stda_SSTX+	B9 USB3_TP

Type A USB 2 (3.0)Pin Definitions
Pin# Definition		Pin# Definition
1	VBUS	5	SSRX-
2	USB_N	6	SSRX+
3	USB_P	7	GND
4	Ground	8	SSTX-
		9	SSTX+

Front Panel USB 3/4 (3.0) Pin Definitions
Pin# Definition Pin# Definition
1	VBUS 19 Power
2	Stda_SSRX- 18 USB3_RN
3	Stda_SSRX+	17 USB3_RP
4	GND	16 GND
5	Stda_SSTX-	15 USB3_TN
6	Stda_SSTX+	14 USB3_TP
7	GND	13 GND
8	D-	12 USB_N
9	D+	11	USB_P
10		x

1. USB0 (3.0)
2. USB1 (3.0)
3. USB2: Type A (3.0)
4. USB3/4 (3.0)

Diagram of a computer motherboard showing CPU socket, drive, and port connections with numbered labels

Unit Identifier Switch/UID LED Indicator

A Unit Identifier (UID) switch and a rear UID LED (LED1) are located on the I/O back panel. A front UID switch is located on pins 7 & 8 of the front panel control (JF1). When you press the front or the rear UID switch, both front and rear UID LEDs will be turned on. Press the UID switch again to turn off the LED indicators. The UID indicators provide easy identification of a system that may be in need of service. (Note: UID can also be triggered via IPMI on the motherboard. For more information, please refer to the IPMI User's Guide posted on our website at http://www.supermicro.com.)

UID Switch Pin Definitions
Pin#	Definition
1	Ground
2	Ground
3	Button In
4	Button In

UID LEDPin Definitions

Color Status

Blue: On Unit Identified

Power Button Reset Button 3.3V UID LED 3.3V Stby 3.3V Stby 3.3V Stby 3.3V X NMI 19 20 Ground Ground Power Fail LED OH/PWR Fail/Fan Fail LED NIC2 Active LED NIC1 Active LED HDD LED PWR LED X Ground

3. Front UID LED (on JF1) 1 2 3. Front UID LED (on JF1)

1. UID Indicator

2. Rear UID LED (next to UID Switch)

3. Front UID LED (on JF1)

2.6 Front Control Panel

JF1 contains header pins for various buttons and indicators that are normally located on a control panel at the front of the chassis. These connectors are designed specifically for use with Supermicro chassis. See the figure below for the descriptions of the front control panel buttons and LED indicators.

SUPER X11DPU Z+ REV-101 CE C RVT-203 BOS UCESF BAR-CCOE

Power Button Reset Button 3.3V UID LED 3.3V Stby 3.3V Stby 3.3V Stby X NMI 19 20 Ground Ground Power Fail LED OH/PWR Fail/Fan Fail LED NIC2 Active LED NIC1 Active LED HDD LED PWR LED X Ground

Figure 2-3. JF1 Header Pins

Power Button

The Power Button connection is located on pins 1 and 2 of JF1. Momentarily contacting both pins will power on/off the system. This button can also be configured to function as a suspend button (with a setting in the BIOS - see Chapter 4). To turn off the power when the system is in suspend mode, press the button for 4 seconds or longer. Refer to the table below for pin definitions.

Power ButtonPin Definitions (JF1)

Pins Definition

1 Signal

2 Ground

Reset Button

The Reset Button connection is located on pins 3 and 4 of JF1. Attach it to a hardware reset switch on the computer case to reset the system. Refer to the table below for pin definitions.

Reset ButtonPin Definitions (JF1)

Pins Definition

3 Reset

4 Ground

1 Power Button Reset Button 3.3V UID LED 3.3V Stby 3.3V Stby 3.3V Stby 3.3V X NMI 19 20 Ground Ground Power Fail LED OH/PWR Fail/Fan Fail LED NIC2 Active LED NIC1 Active LED HDD LED PWR LED X Ground

1. PWR Button

2. Reset Button

Power Fail LED

The Power Fail LED connection is located on pins 5 and 6 of JF1. Refer to the table below for pin definitions.

Power Fail LEDPin Definitions (JF1)
Pin#	Definition
5	3.3V
6	PWR Supply Fail

Overheat/Fan Fail and UID LED

Connect an LED cable to pins 7 and 8 of the Front Control Panel to use the UID/Overheat/Fan Fail LED. UID LED indicates a unit that might need service is identified; while the OH/FanFail LE provides warnings when an overheating or fan failure occurs. Refer to the table below for pin definitions.

Information LED-UID/OH/PWR Fail/Fan Fail LEDPin Definitions (Pin 7 & Pin 8 of JF1)
Status Description
Solid red An overheat condition has occurred. (This may be caused by cable congestion).
Blinking red (1Hz) Fan failure: check for an inoperative fan.
Blinking red (0.25Hz) Power failure: check for a non-operational power supply
Solid blue Local UID is activated. Use this function to locate a unit in a rack mount environment that might be in need of service.
Blinking blue (300 msec)	Remote UID is on. Use this function to identify a unit from a remote location that might be in need of service.

Power Button Reset Button 3.3V UID LED 3.3V Stby 3.3V Stby 3.3V Stby 3.3V X NMI 19 20 Ground Ground Power Fail LED ① OH/PWR Fail/Fan Fail LED ② NIC2 Active LED NIC1 Active LED HDD LED PWR LED X Ground

1. Front UID LED
2. OH/Fan Fail LED

The NIC (Network Interface Controller) LED connection for LAN port 1 is located on pins 11 and 12 of JF1, and LAN port 2 is on pins 9 and 10. Attach the NIC LED cables here to display network activity. Refer to the table below for pin definitions.

HDD LED

The HDD LED connection is located on pins 13 and 14 of JF1. Attach a cable to pin 14 to show hard drive activity status. Refer to the table below for pin definitions.

HDD LEDPin Definitions (JF1)

Pins Definition

13 3.3V Stdby

14 HDD Active

Power Button Reset Button 3.3V UID LED 3.3V Stby 3.3V Stby 3.3V Stby X NMI 19 20 Ground Ground Power Fail LED OH/PWR Fail/Fan Fail LED NIC2 Active LED NIC1 Active LED HDD LED PWR LED X Ground

1. NIC2 LED

2. NIC1 LED

3. HDD LED

Power LED

The Power LED connection is located on pins 15 and 16 of JF1. Refer to the table below for pin definitions.

Power LEDPin Definitions (JF1)

Pins Definition

15 3.3V

16 PWR LED

NMI Button

The non-maskable interrupt (NMI) button header is located on pins 19 and 20 of JF1. Refer to the table below for pin definitions.

NMI ButtonPin Definitions (JF1)

Pins Definition

19 Control

20 Ground

Power Button Reset Button 3.3V UID LED 3.3V Stby 3.3V Stby 3.3V Stby 3.3V X 2 NMI 1 2 Ground Ground Power Fail LED OH/PWR Fail/Fan Fail LED NIC2 Active LED NIC1 Active LED HDD LED PWR LED ① X Ground 19 20

1. PWR LED

2. NMI

2.7 Connectors

Power Connector

SMCI-Proprietary Power Connectors

Two SMCI-proprietary Power Supply Unit connectors, located at PSU1/PSU2, provides the main power to your system. Please note that these power connectors are reserved for Supermicro system use only.

GPU Power Connectors

JGPW2/JGPW4 are 8-pin power connectors used for onboard GPU (Graphics Processing Unit) and video devices. Connect appropriate power cables here to provide power to your GPU/VGA devices.

8-pin GPU Power Pin Definitions
Pin#	Definition
1 - 4	Ground
5 - 8	+12V

VGA LED1 CCM1 USB0103.5j JIM61 IPR1_DON SCE1 PDU BMC BIOS JSDCARD1 PATE JKT BATTERY JKT1 PCI SP1 I-SATAO-3I-SATAI-7 JSDJSD1 SATAI-2 USEQAL NWE10 SODC1 SODC2 CPU2 PSU2 PSU1 PUER X11 DPU 24 REV101 CPU2 FAN3 FAN4 FAN5 FAN6 FAN7 FAN8 FAN9 FAN10 FAN11 FAN12 FAN13 FAN14 FAN15 FAN16 FAN17 FAN18 FAN19 FAN20 FAN21 FAN22 FAN23 FAN24 FAN25 FAN26 FAN27 FAN28 FAN29 FAN30 FAN31 FAN32 FAN33 FAN34 FAN35 FAN36 FAN37 FAN38 FAN39 FAN40 FAN41 FAN42 FAN43 FAN44 FAN45 FAN46 FAN47 FAN48 FAN49 FAN50

1. PSU1
2. PSU2
3. JGPW2 (GPU PWR)
4. JGPW4 (GPU PWR)

12V 8-pin Power Connectors

Four 12V 8-pin power connectors (JPW1/JPW2 and JPW3/JPW4) are located on the motherboard. JPW1 and JPW2 are used for backplane devices. Refer to the table below for pin definitions.

12V 8-pin Power Pin Definitions

Pin# Definition

1 - 4 Ground

5 - 8 +12V

VGA COM1 USB(03.0) LEDM1 R2 I-PT LCN BAC HCS JSDC4RC1 BATTERY JET1 JKT PCI SP1 I-STAT49-31-SATA47-7 USD25D USB23D NME12 NVNE13 CPU-FAR1 GPU-FAR1 SUPER X1 1DPLU-Z1 REV1X1 CPU2 CPU1 FAN8 FAN6 FAN5 FAN4 FAN3 FAN2 FAN1 SWE1 SWE2 SWE3 SWE4 SWE5 SWE6 PBU2 PBU1 JN72C1 NVME11 BVR CODE3 4 3 1 2

1. JPW1
2. JPW2
3. JPW3
4. JPW4

Headers

Onboard Fan Header

This motherboard has eight system fan headers (FAN1\~7 & FAN8). All these 4-pin fan headers are backward-compatible with traditional 3-pin fans. However, onboard fan speed control is available only when all 4-pin fans are used on the motherboard. Fan speed control is supported by Thermal Management via IPMI 2.0 interface. See the table below for pin definitions.

Fan HeaderPin Definitions
Pin#	Definition
1	Ground (Black)
2	+12V (Red)
3	Tachometer
4	PWM Control

VGA COM1 USB0/1(3.0) LEDM PMT LAN BMC S252 CPU_PORT1 C012_DMI BIOS JSDCARD1 BATTERY JBT1 JRKT SP1 I-SATA0-3 I-SATA4-7 JS21JS01 S22A4A USB2/3.0 JCPW2 GPU PWR2 CE FEC PMI CODE X11DPU-Z+ REV1.01 CPU2 FAN6 FAN5 FAN3 FAN2 FAN1 PSU2 PSU1 PSU0/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/8/9/10/11/12/13/14/15/16/17/18/19/20/21/22/23/24/25/26/27/28/29/30/31/32/33/34/35/36/37/38/39/40/41/42/43/44/45/46/47/48/49/50/51/52/53/54/55/56/57/58/59/60/61/62/63/64/65/66/67/68/69/70/71/72/73/74/75/76/77/78/79/80/81/82/83/84/85/86/87/88/89/90/91/92/93/94/95/96/97/98/99/100/ SPBIC I-TAM0-3 I-TAM4-7 JS1 JS21JS01 S22A4A USB2/3.0 JCPW2 GPU PWR2 CE FEC PMI CODE X11DPU-Z+ REV1.01 CPU1 FAN3 FAN2 FAN1 PSU0 1 S252 2 CPU_PORT1A CPU_PORT2A CPU_PORT3A CPU_PORT4A CPU_PORT5A CPU_PORT6A CPU_PORT7A CPU_PORT8A CPU_PORT9A CPU_PORT10A CPU_PORT11A CPU_PORT12A CPU_PORT13A CPU_PORT14A CPU_PORT15A CPU_PORT16A CPU_PORT17A CPU_PORT18A CPU_PORT19A CPU_PORT20A CPU_PORT21A CPU_PORT22A CPU_PORT23A CPU_PORT24A CPU_PORT25A CPU_PORT26A CPU_PORT27A CPU_PORT28A CPU_PORT29A CPU_PORT30A CPU_PORT31A CPU_PORT32A CPU_PORT33A CPU_PORT34A CPU_PORT35A CPU_PORT36A CPU_PORT37A CPU_PORT38A CPU_PORT39A CPU_PORT40A CPU_PORT41A CPU_PORT42A CPU_PORT43A CPU_PORT44A CPU_PORT45A CPU_PORT46A CPU_PORT47A CPU_PORT48A CPU_PORT49A CPU_PORT50A

1. FAN1
2. FAN2
3. FAN3
4. FAN4
5. FAN5
6. FAN6
7. FAN7
8. FAN8 (Vertical)

TPM Header

The JTPM1 header is used to connect a Trusted Platform Module (TPM)/Port 80, which is available from Supermicro (optional). A TPM/Port 80 connector is a security device that supports encryption and authentication in hard drives. It allows the motherboard to deny access if the TPM associated with the hard drive is not installed in the system. See the layout below for the location of the TPM header.

TPM/Port 80 HeaderPin Definitions
Pin #	Definition	Pin #	Definition
1	LCLK	2	GND
3	LFRAME#	4	<(KEY)>
5	LRESET#	6	+5V (X)
7	LAD 3	8	LAD 2
9	+3.3V	10	LAD1
11	LAD0	12	GND
13	SMB_CLK	14	SMB_DAT
15	+3V_DUAL	16	SERIRQ
17	GND	18	CLKRUN# (X)
19	LPCPD#	20	LDRQ# (X)

1. TP VGA COM1 USB0/1(3.0) LEDM1 JPM1 IPM-LAN SXB2 BMC SXB3_1 SXB3_2 CPU-PORT1A JSDCARD1 PCI-PORT1 JSP1 JSP2 JSP3 JSP4 JSP5 JSP6 JSP7 JSP8 JSP9 JSP10 JSP11 JSP12 JSP13 JSP14 JSP15 JSP16 JSP17 JSP18 JSP19 JSP20 JSP21 JSP22 JSP23 JSP24 JSP25 JSP26 JSP27 JSP28 JSP29 JSP30 JSP31 JSP32 JSP33 JSP34 JSP35 JSP36 JSP37 JSP38 JSP39 JSP40 JSP41 JSP42 JSP43 JSP44 JSP45 JSP46 JSP47 JSP48 JSP49 JSP50 JSP51 JSP52 JSP53 JSP54 JSP55 JSP56 JSP57 JSP58 JSP59 JSP60 JSP61 JSP62 JSP63 JSP64 JSP65 JSP66 JSP67 JSP68 JSP69 JSP70 JSP71 JSP72 JSP73 JSP74 JSP75 JSP76 JSP77 JSP78 JSP79 JSP80 JSP81 JSP82 JSP83 JSP84 JSP85 JSP86 JSP87 JSP88 JSP89 JSP90 JSP91 JSP92 JSP93 JSP94 JSP95 JSP96 JSP97 JSP98 JSP99 JSP100 JPW12C1 JPW12C2C1 JPW12C3C2C3C3C4C4C5C5C6C7C8C9C10C11C12C13C14C15C16C17C18C19C20C21C22C23C24C25C26C27C28C29C30C31C32C33C34C35C36C37C38C39C40C41C42C43C44C45C46C47C48C49C50C51C52C53C54C55C56C57C58C59C60C61C62C63C64C65C66C67C68C69C70C71C72C73C74C75C76C77C78C79C80C81C82C83C84C85C86C87C88C89C90C91C92C93C94C95C96C97C98C99C100NVSU2 2PFSU1 2PFSU2 2PFSU3 2PFSU4 2PFSU5 2PFSU6 2PFSU7 2PFSU8 2PFSU9 2PFSU10 2PFSU11 2PFSU12 2PFSU13 2PFSU14 2PFSU15 2PFSU16 2PFSU17 2PFSU18 2PFSU19 2PFSU20 2PFSU21 2PFSU22 2PFSU23 2PFSU24 2PFSU25 2PFSU26 2PFSU27 2PFSU28 2PFSU29 2PFSU30 2PFSU31 2PFSU32 2PFSU33 2PFSU34 2PFSU35 2PFSU36 2PFSU37 2PFSU38 2PFSU39 2PFSU40 2PFSU41 2PFSU42 2PFSU43 2PFSU44 2PFSU45 2PFSU46 2PFSU47 2PFSU48 2PFSU49 2PFSU50 2PFSU51 2PFSU52 2PFSU53 2PFSU54 2PFSU55 2PFSU56 2PFSU57 2PFSU58 2PFSU59 2PFSU60 2PFSU61 2PFSU62 2PFSU63 2PFSU64 2PFSU65 2PFSU66 2PFSU67 2PFSU68 2PFSU69 2PFSU70 2PFSU71 2PFSU72 2PFSU73 2PFSU74 2PFSU75 2PFSU76 2PFSU77 2PFSU78 2PFSU79 2PFSU80 2PFSU81 2PFSU82 2PFSU83 2PFSU84 2PFSU85 2PFSU86 2PFSU87 2PFSU88 2PFSU89 2PFSU90 2PFSU91 2PFSU92 2PFSU93 2PFSU94 2PFSU95 2PFSU96 2PFSU97 2PFSU98 2PFSU99 2PFSU100 NVSU10 PVS U10 PVS U11 PVS U12 PVS U13 PVS U14 PVS U15 PVS U16 PVS U17 PVS U18 PVS U19 PVS U20 PVS U21 PVS U22 PVS U23 PVS U24 PVS U25 PVS U26 PVS U27 PVS U28 PVS U29 PVS U30 PVS U31 PVS U32 PVS U33 PVS U34 PVS U35 PVS U36 PVS U37 PVS U38 PVS U39 PVS U40 PVS U41 PVS U42 PVS U43 PVS U44 PVS U45 PVS U46 PVS U47 PVS U48 PVS U49 PVS U50 PVS U51 PVS U52 PVS U53 PVS U54 PVS U55 PVS U56 PVS U57 PVS U58 PVS U59 PVS U60 PVS U61 PVS U62 PVS U63 PVS U64 PVS U65 PVS U66 PVS U67 PVS U68 PVS U69 PVS U70 PVS U71 PVS U72 PVS U73 PVS U74 PVS U75 PVS U76 PVS U77 PVS U78 PVS U79 PVS U80 PVS U81 PVS U82 PVS U83 PVS U84 PVS U85 PVS U86 PVS U87 PVS U88 PVS U89 PVS U90 PVS U91 PVS U92 PVS U93 PVS U94 PVS U95 PVS U96 PVS U97 PVS U98 PVS U99 PVS U100 NVSU10 CDSI SCSI SCSI SCSI SCSI SCSI SCSI SCSI SCSI SCSI SCSI SCSI SCSI SCSI SCSI SCSI SCSI SCSI SCSI SCSI SCSI SCSI SCSI SCSI SCSI SCSI SCSI SCSI SCSI SCSI SCSI SCSI SCSI SCSI SCSi SCSi SCSi SCSi SCSi SCSi SCSi SCSi SCSi SCSi SCSi SCSi SCSi SCSi SCSi SCSi SCSi SCSi SCSi SCSi SCSi SCSi SCSi SCSi SCSi SCSi SCSi SCSi SCSi SCSi SCSi SCSi SCSi SCSi TSGXO3 FANF B FANF C FANF D FANF E FANF F FANF G FANF H FANF I FANF J FANF K FANF L FANF M FANF N FANF O FANF P FANF Q FANF R FANF S FANF T FANF U FANF V FANF W FANF X FANF Y FANF Z FANF A FANF AB FANF AC FANF AD FANF AE FANF AF FANF AG FANF AH FANF AI FANF AJ FANF AK FANF AL FANF AM FANF AN FANF AO FANF AP FANF AQ FANF AR FANF AS FANF AT FANF AU FANF AV FANF AW FANF AX FANF AY FANF AZ FANF BA FANF BB FANF BC FANF BD FANF BE FANF BF FANF BG FANF BH FANF BI FANF BJ FANF BK FANF BL FANF BM FANF BN FANF BO FANF BP FANF BQ FANF BR FANF CA FANF CB FANF CC FANF CD FANF DE FANF ED FANF EF FANF BG FANF BH FANF BI FANF BJ FANF BK FANF BL FANF BJ FANF AK FANF AL FANF AM FANF AN FANF AO FANF AP FANF AQ FANF BR FANF AC FANF AD FANF AE FANF AF FANF BG FANF BH FANF BI FANF BJ FANF BK FANF BL FANF BJ FANF AK FANF AL FANF AM FANF AN FANF AO FANF AP FANF AQ FANF BR FANF AC FANF AD FANF AE FANF AF FANF BG FANF BH FANF BI FANF BJ FANF BK FANF EL G N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N-N

1. TPM/Port 80 Header

VROC RAID Key Header

A VROC RAID Key header is located at JRK1 on the motherboard. Install a VROC RAID Key on JRK1 for NVMe RAID support as shown in the illustration below. Please refer to the layout below for the location of JRK1.

Intel VROC Key Pin Definitions
Pin#	Definition
1	Ground
2	3.3V Standby
3	Ground
4	PCH RAID Key

VROCK Key VROCK Key Header (JRK1)

Note: The graphics contained in this user's manual are for illustration only. The components installed in your system may or may not look exactly the same as the graphics shown in the manual.

The T-SGPIO3 (Serial-Link General Purpose Input/Output) header is used for the SATA devices to communicate with the enclosure management chip on the back plane.

SGPIO Header Pin Definitions
Pin#	Definition	Pin#	Definition
1	NC	2	NC
3	Ground	4	DATA Out
5	Load	6	Ground
7	Clock	8	NC

NC = No Connection

1. Serial Header VGA COM1 USB01(3.0) LEDM1 JPM1 IPMI_LAN SXB1 1 SXB2 CPU2 PORTA BMC JSDCARD1 BOS JSP BATTERY JPM7 SBT1 JRK1 PCH SXB3 2 SXB4 CPU1 PORTA SXC3 CPU1 PORTA SXT3 JSP1 JSP2 JSP3 JSP4 JSP5 JSP6 JSP7 JSP8 JSP9 JSP10 JSP11 JSP12 JSP13 JSP14 JSP15 JSP16 JSP17 JSP18 JSP19 JSP20 JSP21 JSP22 JSP23 JSP24 JSP25 JSP26 JSP27 JSP28 JSP29 JSP30 JSP31 JSP32 JSP33 JSP34 JSP35 JSP36 JSP37 JSP38 JSP39 JSP40 JSP41 JSP42 JSP43 JSP44 JSP45 JSP46 JSP47 JSP48 JSP49 JSP50 JSP51 JSP52 JSP53 JSP54 JSP55 JSP56 JSP57 JSP58 JSP59 JSP60 JSP61 JSP62 JSP63 JSP64 JSP65 JSP66 JSP67 JSP68 JSP69 JSP70 JSP71 JSP72 JSP73 JSP74 JSP75 JSP76 JSP77 JSP78 JSP79 JSP80 JSP81 JSP82 JSP83 JSP84 JSP85 JSP86 JSP87 JSP88 JSP89 JSP90 JSP91 JSP92 JSP93 JSP94 JSP95 JSP96 JSP97 JSP98 JSP99 JSP100

1. Serial General Purpose Header

CPLD Header

The Complex Programmable Logical Device (CPLD) header is located on JP2 on the motherboard. Connect an appropriate cable to use this feature.

BMC SMB (PC) Header

A System Management Bus (SMBus) header for IPMI 2.0 is located at JIPMB1. Connect an appropriate cable here to use the IPMB I²C connection on your system. Refer to the table below for pin definitions.

External I2C Header Pin Definitions
Pin#	Definition
1	Data
2	Ground
3	Clock
4	No Connection

1. CPL 2. BM VGA COM US80/1(3.0) LEDM1 BMC JPME1 IPMI_LAN SXB3_1 SXB3_2 SXB1_1 CPU_PORT1A CPU_PORT1A CPU_PORT1A CPU_PORT1A CPU_PORT1A CPU_PORT1A CPU_PORT1A CPU_PORT1A CPU_PORT1A CPU_PORT1A CPU_PORT1A CPU_PORT1A CPU_PORT1A CPU_PORT1A CPU_PORT1A CPU_PORT1A CPU_PORT1A CPU_PORT1A CPU_PORT1A CPU_PORT1A CPU_PORT1B BOS JSDCARD1 BATTERY WT1 JPME1 BT1 SP1 I-SATAO-3I-SATAO-7 JPM1 USR3 USBV40.00 JF1 JPMW LE2 GPU PWR2 CE FC XII CODE SUPER X11DPU-Z+ REV:1.01 CPU2 CPU1 FAN5 FAN6 FAN7 FAN8 FAN9 FAN10 FAN11 FAN12 FAN13 FAN14 FAN15 FAN16 FAN17 FAN18 FAN19 FAN20 FAN21 FAN22 FAN23 FAN24 FAN25 FAN26 FAN27 FAN28 FAN29 FAN30 FAN31 FAN32 FAN33 FAN34 FAN35 FAN36 FAN37 FAN38 FAN39 FAN40 FAN41 FAN42 FAN43 FAN44 FAN45 FAN46 FAN47 FAN48 FAN49 FAN50 FAN51 FAN52 FAN53 FAN54 FAN55 FAN56 FAN57 FAN58 FAN59 FAN60

1. CPLD Header
2. BMC SMBus Header

Internal Speaker/Buzzer Header

An internal speaker/buzzer header is located on SP1. Close SP1 to use the onboard speaker to provide audio warnings when a system error or memory error occurs. See the layout below for location.

Chassis Intrusion

A Chassis Intrusion header is located at JL1 on the motherboard. Attach the appropriate cable from the chassis to inform you of a chassis intrusion when the chassis is opened. Refer to the table below for pin definitions.

Chassis Intrusion Pin Definitions

Pin# Definition

1 Intrusion Input

2 Ground

VGA COM1 USB01(3.0) LEDM1 JPN51 IPM1_LAN BMC RICS JSDCARD1 PCH PCB72 JPN6 ST1 SP1 I-SATA0-3-SATA4-7 JSD2/ISD US52(3.0) JGP_W2 GPU PWR2 CE F& PMI CODE CPU1 PSU2 PSU1 NVME12 NVME13 SXC3C 3CS UCX8E BAR CODE CPU1 FAN3 FAN2 FAN1 NVT1-59F-003 NVT2-30F-002 NVT3-20F-001 NVT4-10F-000 NVT5-5F-000 NVT6-3F-000 NVT7-2F-000 NVT8-1F-000 NVT9-5F-000 NVT10-3F-000 NVT11-2F-000 NVT12-1F-000 NVT13-5F-000 NVT14-3F-000 NVT15-2F-000 NVT16-1F-000 NVT17-5F-000 NVT18-3F-000 NVT19-2F-000 NVT20-1F-000 NVT21-5F-000 NVT22-3F-000 NVT23-2F-000 NVT24-1F-000 NVT25-5F-000 NVT26-3F-000 NVT27-2F-000 NVT28-1F-000 NVT29-5F-000 NVT30-3F-000 NVT31-2F-000 NVT32-1F-000 NVT33-5F-000 NVT34-3F-000 NVT35-2F-000 NVT36-1F-000 NVT37-5F-000 NVT38-3F-000 NVT39-2F-000 NVT40-1F-000 NVT41-5F-000 NVT42-3F-000 NVT43-2F-000 NVT44-1F-000 NVT45-5F-000 NVT46-3F-000 NVT47-2F-000 NVT48-1F-000 NVT49-5F-000 NVT50-3F-000 NVT51-2F-000 NVT52-1F-000 NVT53-5F-000 NVT54-3F-000 NVT55-2F-000 NVT56-1F-000 NVT57-5F-000 NVT58-3F-000 NVT59-2F-000 NVT60-1F-000

1. Internal Speaker Header
2. Chassis Intrusion

NVMe SMBus Headers

NVMe SMBus (I²C) headers (JNVI²C1/2), used for PCI-E SMBus clock and data connections, provide hot-plug support via a dedicated SMBus interface. This feature is only available for a Supermicro complete system with an SMCI-proprietary NVMe add-on card and cable installed. See the table below for pin definitions.

NVMe SMBus Header Pin Definitions
Pin#	Definition
1	Data
2	Ground
3	Clock
4	VCCIO

NVMe Connectors

Four NVMe connectors (NVME10/NVME11 & NVME12/NVME13) are used for high-speed PCI-E storage devices. NVME10/NVME11 are supported by CPU1, and NVME12/NVME13 are for CPU2.

1. NVM 2. NVM 3. NVM 4. NVM 5. NVM 4. NVM 1. NVM 2. NVM 3. NVM 4. NVM 5. NVM 4. NVM 1. NVM 2. NVM 3. NVM 4. NVM 5. NVM 4. NVM 1. NVM 2. NVM 3. NVM 4. NVM 5. NVM 4. NVM 1. NVM 2. NVM

1. NVMe I²C Header 1
2. NVMe I²C Header 2
3. NVMe Connector 10
4. NVMe Connector 11
5. NVMe Connector 12
6. NVMe Connector 13

SATA DOM Power Connector

The SATA Disk-On-Module (DOM) power connectors at JSD1 and JSD2 provide 5V power to solid-state storage devices connected to the SATA ports. See the table below for pin definitions.

DOM PWRPin Definitions
Pin#	Definition
1	+5V
2	Ground
3	Ground

VGA LEDMI B2 COM JPMB1 IPMC_LAN US30/1(3.0) SXE1A SXE1A SXE1C SXE1C SXE1C SXE1C SXE1C SXE1C SXE1C SXE1C SXE1C SXE1C SXE1C SXE1C SXE1C SXE1C SXE1C SXE1C SXE1C SXE1C SXE1C SXE1C SXE13 SXE1C SXE1C SXE1C SXE1C SXE1C SXE1C SXE1C SXE1C SXE1C SXE1C SXE1C SXE1C SXE1C SXE1C SXE1C SXE1C SXE1C SXE1C SXE1C SXE1D SXE1D SXE1D SXE1D SXE1D SXE1D SXE1D SXE1D SXE1D SXE1D SXE1D SXE1D SXE1D SXE1D SXE1D SXE1D SXE1D SXE1D SXE1D SP1 SP2 SP3 SP4 SP5 SP6 SP7 SP8 SP9 SP10 SP11 SP12 SP13 SP14 SP15 SP16 SP17 SP18 SP19 SP20 SP21 SP22 SP23 SP24 SP25 SP26 SP27 SP28 SP29 SP30 SP31 SP32 SP33 SP34 SP35 SP36 SP37 SP38 SP39 SP40 SP41 SP42 SP43 SP44 SP45 SP46 SP47 SP48 SP49 SP50 SP51 SP52 SP53 SP54 SP55 SP56 SP57 SP58 SP59 SP60 SP61 SP62 SP63 SP64 SP65 SP66 SP67 SP68 SP69 SP70 SP71 SP72 SP73 SP74 SP75 SP76 SP77 SP78 SP79 SP80 SP81 SP82 SP83 SP84 SP85 SP86 SP87 SP88 SP89 SP90 SP91 SP92 SP93 SP94 SP95 SP96 SP97 SP98 SP99 SP100

I-SATA 3.0 and S-SATA 3.0 Ports

The X11DPU-Z+/ZE+ has eight I-SATA 3.0 ports (I-SATA0-3, I-SATA4-7) and two S-SATA (S-SATA4, S-SATA5) on the motherboard. These SATA ports are supported by the Intel PCH (C621). S-SATA4/S-SATA5 support Supermicro SuperDOMs (Disk_on_Modules), which are yellow SATA DOM connectors with power pins built in, and do not require external power cables. Supermicro SuperDOMs are backward-compatible with regular SATA HDDs or SATA DOMs that need external power cables. All these SATA ports provide serial-link signal connections, which are faster than the connections of Parallel ATA.

1. I-SATA0-3 2. I-SATA4-7 3. S-SATA4 4. S-SATA5 VGA LEDMI COM1 USB0/1(3.0) UPC1 UPC2 IPM1LAN BMC SXB1_A SXB1_B SXB1_C SXB1_D SXB1_E SXB1_F SXB1_G SXB1_H SXB1_I SXB1_J SXB1_K SXB1_L SXB1_M SXB1_N SXB1_O SXB1_P SXB1_S SXB1_T SXB1_U SXB1_V SXB1_W SXB1_Z SXB1_A SXB1_B SXB1_C SXB1_D SXB1_E SXB1_F SXB1_G SXB1_H SXB1_I SXB1_J SXB1_K SXB1_L SXB1_M SXB1_N SXB1_O SXB1_P SXB1_S SXB1_T SXB1_U SXB1_J SXB1_K SXB1_L SXB1_M SXB1_N SXB1_O SXB1_P SXB1_J SXB1_K SXB1_L SXB1_M SXB1_T SXB1_U SXB1_J SXB1_K SXB1_L SXB1_M SXB1_N SXB1_O SXB1_P SXB1_J SXB1_K SXB1_L SXB1_M SXB1_T SXB1_U SXB1_J SXB1_K SXB1_L SXB1_M SXB1_T SXB1_U SXB1_J SXB1_K SXB1_L SXB1_M SXB1_T SXB1_U SXB1_J SXB1_K SXB1_L SXB1_M SXB1_T SXB1_U SXB1_J SXB1.K SXB1_T SXB1_U SXB1_J SXB1_K SXB1_L SXB1_M SXB1_T SXB1_U SXB1_J SXB1_K SXB1_L SXB1_M SXB1_T SXB1_U SXB1_J SXB1_K SXB1_L SXB1_M SXB1_T SXB1-U SXB1_J SXB1_K SXB1_L SXB1_M SXB1_T SXB1_U SXB1_J SXB1_K SXB1_L SXB1_M SXB1_T SXB1_U SXB1_J SXB1_K SXB1_L SXB1_M SXB1_T SXB1_U SXB1_J SXB1_k SP0000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 ① ② ③ ④ ⑤ ⑥ ⑦ ⑧ ⑨ ⑩ ⑪ ⑫ ⑬ ⑭ ⑮ ⑯ ⑰ ⑱ ⑲ ⑳ ㉑ ㉒ ㉓ ㉔ ㉕ ㉖ ㉗ ㉘ ㉙ ㉚ ㉛ ㉜ ㉝ ㉞ ㉟ ㉳ ㉻ ㉒ ㉓ ㉔ ㉕ ㉖ ㉗ ㉘ ㉙ ㉚ ㉛ ㉜ ㉝ ㉞ ㉟ ㉳ ㉴ ㉵ ㉜ ㉝ ㉞ ㉟ ㉟ ㉟ ㉟ ㉟ ㉟ ㉟ ㉟ ㉟ ㉟ ㉟ ㉟ ㉟ ㉟ ㉟ ㉟ ㉟ ㉟

2.7 Jumper Settings

How Jumpers Work

To modify the operation of the motherboard, jumpers can be used to choose between optional settings. Jumpers create shorts between two pins to change the function of the connector. Pin 1 is identified with a square solder pad on the printed circuit board. See the diagram at right for an example of jumping pins 1 and 2. Refer to the motherboard layout page for jumper locations.

Note: On two-pin jumpers, "Closed" means the jumper is on and "Open" means the jumper is off the pins.

Connector Pins Jumper Setting 3 2 1 ● ● ■ 3 2 1

CMOS Clear

JBT1 is used to clear CMOS, which will also clear the passwords, if any. Instead of pins, this jumper consists of contact pads to prevent accidentally clearing the contents of CMOS.

To Clear CMOS

1. First power down the system and unplug the power cord(s).

2. Remove the cover of the chassis to access the motherboard.

3. Remove the onboard battery from the motherboard.

4. Short the CMOS pads with a metal object such as a small screwdriver for at least four seconds.

5. Remove the screwdriver (or shorting device).

6. Replace the cover, reconnect the power cord(s), and power on the system.

Note: Clearing CMOS will also clear all passwords.

Do not use the PW ON connector to clear CMOS.

JBT1 contact pads 1. Clear CMOS VGA COM1 US30+1(3.0) LEDM1 JPI1B1 IPKM-LAN BMC SXE2 CPU2 PORT1A CPU2 DMI SXE1 SXE2 SXE1 SXE1 SXE1 SXE1 SXE1 SXE1 SXE1 SXE1 SXE1 SXE1 SXE1 SXE1 SXE1 SXE1 SXE1 SXE1 SXE1 SXE1 SXE1 SXE1 SXE1 SXE1 SXE1 SXE1 SXE1 SXE3 1 SXE3 2 CPI1 PORT3A CPI1 PORT3B CPI1 PORT3C CPI1 PORT3D CPI1 PORT3E CPI1 PORT3F CPI1 PORT3G CPI1 PORT3H CPI1 PORT3I CPI1 PORT3J CPI1 PORT3K CPI1 PORT3L CPI1 PORT3M CPI1 PORT3N CPI1 PORT40 CPI1 PORT41 CPI1 PORT42 CPI1 PORT43 CPI1 PORT44 CPI1 PORT45 CPI1 PORT46 CPI1 PORT47 CPI1 PORT48 CPI1 PORT49 CPI1 PORT50 CPI1 PORT51 CPI1 PORT52 CPI1 PORT53 CPI1 PORT54 CPI1 PORT55 CPI1 PORT56 CPI1 PORT57 CPI1 PORT58 CPI1 PORT59 CPI1 PORT60 CPI1 PORT61 CPI1 PORT62 CPI1 PORT63 CPI1 PORT64 CPI1 PORT65 CPI1 PORT66 CPI1 PORT67 CPI1 PORT68 CPI1 PORT69 CPI1 PORT70 CPI1 PORT71 CPI1 PORT72 CPI1 PORT73 CPI1 PORT74 CPI1 PORT75 CPI1 PORT76 CPI1 PORT77 CPI1 PORT78 CPI1 PORT79 CPI1 PORT80 CPI1 PORT81 CPI1 PORT82 CPI1 PORT83 CPI1 PORT84 CPI1 PORT85 CPI1 PORT86 CPI1 PORT87 CPI1 PORT88 CPI1 PORT89 CPI1 PORT90 CPI1 PORT91 CPI1 PORT92 CPI1 PORT93 CPI1 PORT94 CPI1 PORT95 CPI1 PORT96 CPI1 PORT97 CPI1 PORT98 CPI1 PORT99 CPI1 USB4 2.0000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000

Manufacturing Mode Select

Close JPME1 to bypass SPI flash security and force the system to use the Manufacturing Mode, which will allow you to flash the system firmware from a host server to modify system settings. See the table below for jumper settings.

Manufacturing Mode SelectJumper Settings
Jumper Setting	Definition
Pins 1-2 Normal	(Default)
Pins 2-3 Manufacturing Mode

1. Manufa VGA COM US30-1(3.0) LEDMI JIPMB1 IPMI_LAN BMC SXE1 SXE2 SXE3 SXE4 SXE5 SXE6 SXE7 SXE8 SXE9 SXE10 SXE11 SXE12 SXE13 SXE14 SXE15 SXE16 SXE17 SXE18 SXE19 SXE20 SXE21 SXE22 SXE23 SXE24 SXE25 SXE26 SXE27 SXE28 SXE29 SXE30 SXE31 SXE32 SXE33 SXE34 SXE35 SXE36 SXE37 SXE38 SXE39 SXE40 SXE41 SXE42 SXE43 SXE44 SXE45 SXE46 SXE47 SXE48 SXE49 SXE50 SXE51 SXE52 SXE53 SXE54 SXE55 SXE56 SXE57 SXE58 SXE59 SXE60 SXE61 SXE62 SXE63 SXE64 SXE65 SXE66 SXE67 SXE68 SXE69 SXE70 SXE71 SXE72 SXE73 SXE74 SXE75 SXE76 SXE77 SXE78 SXE79 SXE80 SXE81 SXE82 SXE83 SXE84 SXE85 SXE86 SXE87 SXE88 SXE89 SXE90 SXE91 SXE92 SXE93 SXE94 SXE95 SXE96 SXE97 SXE98 SXE99 SXE100 SP1 I:SATAO-3I:SATAA-7 JSD2 JSD1 S:SATAA J:SATAA J:SATAA J:SATAA J:SATAA J:SATAA J:SATAA J:SATAA J:SATAA J:SATAA J:SATAA J:SATAA J:SATAA J:SATAA J:SATAA J:SATAA J:SATAA J:SATAA J:SATAA J:SATAA J:SATAA J:SATAA J:SATAA J:SATAA J:SATAA J:SATAA 10000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 1 PWE2 PWE1 PFEW2 PFW2 PWR1 PWR2 PWR3 PWR4 PWR5 PWR6 PWR7 PWR8 PWR9 PWR10 PWR11 PWR12 PWR13 PWR14 PWR15 PWR16 PWR17 PWR18 PWR19 PWR20 PWR21 PWR22 PWR23 PWR24 PWR25 PWR26 PWR27 PWR28 PWR29 PWR30 PWR31 PWR32 PWR33 PWR34 PWR35 PWR36 PWR37 PWR38 PWR39 PWR40 PWR41 PWR42 PWR43 PWR44 PWR45 PWR46 PWR47 PWR48 PWR49 PWR50 PWR51 PWR52 PWR53 PWR54 PWR55 PWR56 PWR57 PWR58 PWR59 PWR60 PWR61 PWR62 PWR63 PWR64 PWR65 PWR66 PWR67 PWR68 PWR69 PWR70 PWR71 PWR72 PWR73 PWR74 PWR75 PWR76 PWR77 PWR78 PWR79 PWR80 PWR81 PWR82 PWR83 PWR84 PWR85 PWR86 PWR87 PWR88 PWR89 PWR90 PWR91 PWR92 PWR93 PWR94 PWR95 PWR96 PWR97 PWR98 PWR99 PWR100

1. Manufacturing Mode Select

Watch Dog Timer

JWD1 controls the Watch Dog function. Watch Dog is a monitor that can reboot the system when a software application hangs. Jumping pins 1-2 will cause Watch Dog to reset the system if an application hangs. Jumping pins 2-3 will generate a non-maskable interrupt signal for the application that hangs. Watch Dog must also be enabled in BIOS. The default setting is Reset.

Note: When Watch Dog is enabled, the user needs to write their own application software to disable it.

Watch DogJumper Settings
Jumper Setting	Definition
Pins 1-2 Reset
Pins 2-3 NMI
Open Disabled

1. Wat VGA COM1 USB0/1(3.0) LEDM1 JPM81 IPM1_DAN SXB2 BMC SXB1A CPU2 PORT1A CPU2 DMI SXB1_3 SXB1B CPU2_PORT1A CPU2_PORT2A SXB1_2 SXB1C CPU2_PORT2C I-SATAO-3I-SATA4-7 JPM1 JPM2 JST JSP1A JSP2A JSP3A JSP4A JSP5A JSP6A JSP7A JSP8A JSP9A JSP10A JSP11A JSP12A JSP13A JSP14A JSP15A JSP16A JSP17A JSP18A JSP19A JSP20A JSP21A JSP22A JSP23A JSP24A JSP25A JSP26A JSP27A JSP28A JSP29A JSP30A JSP31A JSP32A JSP33A JSP34A JSP35A JSP36A JSP37A JSP38A JSP39A JSP40A JSP41A JSP42A JSP43A JSP44A JSP45A JSP46A JSP47A JSP48A JSP49A JSP50A JSP51A JSP52A JSP53A JSP54A JSP55A JSP56A JSP57A JSP58A JSP59A JSP60A JSP61A JSP62A JSP63A JSP64A JSP65A JSP66A JSP67A JSP68A JSP69A JSP70A JSP71A JSP72A JSP73A JSP74A JSP75A JSP76A JSP77A JSP78A JSP79A JSP80A JSP81A JSP82A JSP83A JSP84A JSP85A JSP86A JSP87A JSP88A JSP89A JSP90A JSP91A JSP92A JSP93A JSP94A JSP95A JSP96A JSP97A JSP98A JSP99A JSP100A I-SATAO-3I-SATA4-7 JSDBSD1 SATAAS-JUSA- NVME12 NVME13 CPU PORT1A CPU PORT2X CPU PORT3X CPU PORT4X CPU PORT5X CPU PORT6X CPU PORT7X CPU PORT8X CPU PORT9X CPU PORT10X CPU PORT11X CPU PORT12X CPU PORT13X CPU PORT14X CPU PORT15X CPU PORT16X CPU PORT17X CPU PORT18X CPU PORT19X CPU PORT20X CPU PORT21X CPU PORT22X CPU PORT23X CPU PORT24X CPU PORT25X CPU PORT26X CPU PORT27X CPU PORT28X CPU PORT29X CPU PORT30X CPU PORT31X CPU PORT32X CPU PORT33X CPU PORT34X CPU PORT35X CPU PORT36X CPU PORT37X CPU PORT38X CPU PORT39X CPU PORT40X CPU PORT41X CPU PORT42X CPU PORT43X CPU PORT44X CPU PORT45X CPU PORT46X CPU PORT47X CPU PORT48X CPU PORT49X CPU PORT50X

1. Watch Dog

2.8 LED Indicators

IPMI-Dedicated LAN LEDs

An IPMI-dedicated LAN is located on the I/O Backplane of the motherboard. The LED indicator on the right indicates activity, while the yellow LED on the left indicates the status of the IPMI LED connection. See the tables below for more information.

IPMI LAN Link LED (Left)
LED Color	Definition
Link	Solid: Yellow
IPMI LAN Activity LED (Right)
LED	Color/State	Definition
Activity (Right)	Green: Blinking	100 Mbps
Activity (Right)	Amber: Blinking	1G

1. IPMI LAN LEDs 1. 1. IPMI LAN LEDs

BMC Heartbeat LED

LEDM1 is the BMC heartbeat LED. When the LED is blinking green, BMC is functioning normally. See the table below for the LED status.

Onboard Power LED Indicator
LED Color	Definition
Green:Blinking	BMC Normal

Onboard Power LED

The Onboard Power LED is located at LE2 on the motherboard. When this LED is on, the system is on. Be sure to turn off the system and unplug the power cord before removing or installing components. Refer to the table below for more information.

Onboard Power LED Indicator
LED Color	Definition
Off	System Off(power cable not connected)
Green System	On

VGA COM1 USB0/1(3.0) LEDM1 BMC IPMI_LAN SXB1_1 SXB2_1 SXB3_1 SXB4_1 SXB5_1 SXB6_1 SXB7_1 SXB8_1 SXB9_1 SXB10_1 SXB11_1 SXB12_1 SXB13_1 SXB14_1 SXB15_1 SXB16_1 SXB17_1 SXB18_1 SXB19_1 SXB20_1 SXB21_1 SXB22_1 SXB23_1 SXB24_1 SXB25_1 SXB26_1 SXB27_1 SXB28_1 SXB29_1 SXB30_1 SXB31_1 SXB32_1 SXB33_1 SXB34_1 SXB35_1 SXB36_1 SXB37_1 SXB38_1 SXB39_1 SXB40_1 SXB41_1 SXB42_1 SXB43_1 SXB44_1 SXB45_1 SXB46_1 SXB47_1 SXB48_1 SXB49_1 SXB50_1 SXB51_1 SXB52_1 SXB53_1 SXB54_1 SXB55_1 SXB56_1 SXB57_1 SXB58_1 SXB59_1 SXB60_1 SXB61_1 SXB62_1 SXB63_1 SXB64_1 SXB65_1 SXB66_1 SXB67_1 SXB68_1 SXB69_1 SXB70_1 SXB71_1 SXB72_1 SXB73_1 SXB74_1 SXB75_1 SXB76_1 SXB77_1 SXB78_1 SXB79_1 SXB80_1 SXB81_1 SXB82_1 SXB83_1 SXB84_1 SXB85_1 SXB86_1 SXB87_1 SXB88_1 SXB89_1 SXB90_1 SXB91_1 SXB92_1 SXB93_1 SXB94_1 SXB95_1 SXB96_1 SXB97_1 SXB98_1 SXB99_1 SXB100_1 SPCPIA CPU PORT-3A PORT-3A PORT-3A PORT-3A PORT-3A PORT-3A PORT-3A PORT-3A PORT-3A PORT-3A PORT-3A PORT-3A PORT-3A PORT-3A PORT-3A PORT-3A PORT-3A PORT-3A PORT-3A PORT-3A PORT-3C USB4/40/70 JFJ USB4/40/70 JFJ USB4/40/70 JFJ USB4/40/70 JFJ USB4/40/70 JFJ USB4/40/70 JFJ USB4/40/70 JFJ USB4/40/70 JFJ USB4/40/70 J FJN2C2 LE2 CE FC PMI CODE X:I:SATAO~I:SATAA4~I:SJD2/JSDI S:SATAG USB2(3.0) S:SATAG USB2(3.0) S:SATAG USB2(3.0) S:SATAG USB2(3.0) S:SATAG USB2(3.0) S:SATAG USB2(3.0) S:SATAG USB2(3.0) S:SATAG USB2(3.0) S:SATAG USB2 (3.0) S:SATAG USB2(3.0) S:SATAG USB2(3.0) S:SATAG USB2(3.0) S:SATAG USB2(3.0) S:SATAG USB2(3.0) S:SATAG USB2(3.0) S:SATAG USB2(3.0) S:SATACP U P R A P U P R A P U P R A P U P R A P U P R A P U P R A P U P R A P U P R A P U P R A P U P R A P U P R A P U P R A P U P R A P U P R A P U P R A P U P R A P U P R A P U P R A P U P R A P U P R A P U P R A B C EFS BAR CODE CPU2 CPU2 CPU2 CPU2 CPU2 CPU2 CPU2 CPU2 CPU2 CPU2 CPU2 CPU2 CPU2 CPU2 CPU2 CPU2 CPU2 CPU2 CPU2 CPU2 CPU2 CPU2 CPU2 CPU2 CPU2 CPU2 CPU2 CPU2 CPU2 CPU2 CPU2 CPU2 CPU2 CPU2 CPU2 CPU2 CPU2 CPU2 CPU2 CPU2 CPU2 CPU2 CPU2 CPU2 CPU2 CPU2 CPU2 CPU2 CPU2 CPU2 CPU2CPU2 CPU2 CPU2 CPU2 CPU2 CPU2 CPU2 CPU2 CPU2 CPU2 CPU2 CPU2 CPU2 CPU2 CPU2 CPU2 CPU2 CPU2 CPU2 CPU2 CPU2 CPU2 CPU2 CPU2 CPU2 CPU2 CPU2 CPU2 CPU2 CPU2 CPU2 CPU2 CPU2 CPU2 CPU2 CPU2 CPU2 CPU2 CPU2 CPU2 CPU2 CPU2 CPU2 CPU2 CPU2 CPU2 CPU2 CPU2 CPU2 CPU2 C EFS BAR CODE CPUJ CPUJ CPUJ CPUJ CPUJ CPUJ CPUJ CPUJ CPUJ CPUJ CPUJ CPUJ CPUJ CPUJ CPUJ CPUJ CPUJ CPUJ CPUJ CPUJ CPUJ CPUJ CPUJ CPUJ CPUJ CPUJ CPUJ CPUJ CPUJ CPUJ CPUJ CPUJ CPUJ CPUJ CPUJ CPUJ CPUJ CPUJ CPUJCPU8 FAN6 FAN7 FAN8 FAN9 FAN5 FAN6 FAN7 FAN8 FAN9 FAN5 FAN6 FAN7 FAN8 FAN9 FAN5 FAN6 FAN7 FAN8 FAN9 FAN5 FAN6 FAN7 FAN8 FAN9 FAN5 FAN6 FAN7 FAN8 FAN9 FAN5 FAN6 FAN7 FAN8 FAN9 FAN5 FAN6 FAN7 FAN8FAN6 FAN7 FAN8 FAN9 FAN5 FAN6 FAN7 FAN8 FAN9 FAN5 FAN6 FAN7 FAN8 FAN9 FAN5 FAN6 FAN7 FAN8 FAN9 FAN5 FAN6 FAN7 FAN8FAN6 FAN7 FAN8FAN8FAN9 FAN5 FAN6 FAN7 FAN8FAN6 FAN7 FAN8FAN9FAN5 FAN6 FAN7 FAN8FAN9FAN5 FAN6 FAN7 FAN8FAN9FAN5 FAN6 FAN7 FAN8FAN9FAN5 FAN6 FAN7 FAN8FAN9FAN5F AN

1. BMC Heartbeat LED
2. Onboard Power LED

Unit ID LED

A rear UID LED indicator at LED1 is located next to the UID switch on the motherboard. This UID indicator provides easy identification of a system unit that might be in need of service.

UID LEDLED Indicator
LED Color	Definition
Blue: On Unit	Identified

1. VGA COM1 US80(1/3.0) LEDM10 UPM1 IPM1_CAN SXB3_1 SXB3_2 SXTB0 CPU2_PORT1A CPU2_DMI SXB1_2 SXTB0PUZ_PORT3A1 CPU2_PORT2C SXB1_3 PCH_PORT1 PCH_DMI JSP1 JSP2 JSP3 JSP4 JSP5 JSP6 JSP7 JSP8 JSP9 JSP10 JSP11 JSP12 JSP13 JSP14 JSP15 JSP16 JSP17 JSP18 JSP19 JSP20 JSP21 JSP22 JSP23 JSP24 JSP25 JSP26 JSP27 JSP28 JSP29 JSP30 JSP31 JSP32 JSP33 JSP34 JSP35 JSP36 JSP37 JSP38 JSP39 JSP40 JSP41 JSP42 JSP43 JSP44 JSP45 JSP46 JSP47 JSP48 JSP49 JSP50 JSP51 JSP52 JSP53 JSP54 JSP55 JSP56 JSP57 JSP58 JSP59 JSP60 JSP61 JSP62 JSP63 JSP64 JSP65 JSP66 JSP67 JSP68 JSP69 JSP70 JSP71 JSP72 JSP73 JSP74 JSP75 JSP76 JSP77 JSP78 JSP79 JSP80 JSP81 JSP82 JSP83 JSP84 JSP85 JSP86 JSP87 JSP88 JSP89 JSP90 JSP91 JSP92 JSP93 JSP94 JSP95 JSP96 JSP97 JSP98 JSP99 JSP100 JSP101 JSP102 JSP103 JSP104 JSP105 JSP106 JSP107 JSP108 JSP109 JSP110 JSP111 JSP112 JSP113 JSP114 JSP115 JSP116 JSP117 JSP118 JSP119 JSP120 JSP121 JSP122 JSP123 JSP124 JSP125 JSP126 JSP127 JSP128 JSP129 JSP130 JSP131 JSP132 JSP133 JSP134 JSP135 JSP136 JSP137 JSP138 JSP139 JSP140 JSP141 JSP142 JSP143 JSP144 JSP145 JSP146 JSP147 JSP148 JSP149 JSP150 JSP151 JSP152 JSP153 JSP154 JSP155 JSP156 JSP157 JSP158 JSP159 JSP160 JSP161 JSP162 JSP163 JSP164 JSP165 JSP166 JSP167 JSP168 JSP169 JSP170 JSP171 JSP172 JSP173 JSP174 JSP175 JSP176 JSP177 JSP178 JSP179 JSP180 JSP181 JSP182 JSP183 JSP184 JSP185 JSP186 JSP187 JSP188 JSP189 JSP190 JSP191 JSP192 JSP193 JSP194 JSP195 JSP196 JSP197 JSP198 JSP199 JSP200

Chapter 3

Troubleshooting

3.1 Troubleshooting Procedures

Use the following procedures to troubleshoot your system. If you have followed all of the procedures below and still need assistance, refer to the 'Technical Support Procedures' and/or 'Returning Merchandise for Service' section(s) in this chapter. Always disconnect the AC power cord before adding, changing, or installing any non hot-swap hardware components.

Before Power On

1. Check that the power LED on the motherboard is on.
2. Make sure that the power connector is connected to your power supply.
3. Make sure that no short circuits exist between the motherboard and chassis.
4. Disconnect all cables from the motherboard, including those for the keyboard and mouse.
5. Remove all add-on cards.
6. Install a CPU, a heatsink*, and connect the internal speaker and the power LED to the motherboard. Check all jumper settings as well. (Make sure that the heatsink is fully seated.)
7. Use the correct type of onboard CMOS battery as recommended by the manufacturer. To avoid possible explosion, do not install the CMOS battery upside down.

No Power

1. Make sure that no short circuits exist between the motherboard and the chassis.
2. Verify that all jumpers are set to their default positions.
3. Check that the 115V/230V switch on the power supply is properly set.
4. Turn the power switch on and off to test the system.
5. If the battery on your motherboard is old, please replace it with a new one.

No Video

1. If the power is on but you have no video, remove all the add-on cards and cables.
2. Use the speaker to determine if any beep codes exist. Refer to Appendix A for details on beep codes.

System Boot Failure

If the system does not display POST (Power-On-Self-Test) or does not respond after the power is turned on, check the following:

1. Check for any error beep from the motherboard speaker.

2. If there is no error beep, try to turn on the system without DIMM modules installed. If there is still no error beep, replace the motherboard.

3. If there are error beeps, clear the CMOS settings by unplugging the power cord and contacting both pads on the CMOS Clear Jumper (JBT1). Refer to chapter 2.

4. Remove all components from the motherboard, especially the DIMM modules. Make sure that system power is on and that memory error beeps are activated.

5. Turn on the system with only one DIMM module installed. If the system boots, check for bad DIMM modules or slots by following the Memory Errors Troubleshooting procedure in this Chapter.

Memory Errors

1. Make sure that the DIMM modules are properly and fully installed.
2. Confirm that you are using the correct memory. Also, it is recommended that you use the same memory type and speed for all DIMMs in the system. See Section 2.4 for memory details.
3. Check for bad DIMM modules or slots by swapping modules between slots and noting the results.
4. Check the power supply voltage 115V/230V switch.

Losing the System's Setup Configuration

1. Make sure that you are using a high-quality power supply. A poor quality power supply may cause the system to lose the CMOS setup information. Refer to Section 1.6 for details on recommended power supplies.
2. The battery on your motherboard may be old. Check to verify that it still supplies \~3VDC. If it does not, replace it with a new one.
3. If the above steps do not fix the setup configuration problem, contact your vendor for repairs.

When the System Becomes Unstable

A. If the system becomes unstable during or after OS installation, check the following:

1. CPU/BIOS support: Make sure that your CPU is supported and that you have the latest BIOS installed in your system.
2. Memory support: Make sure that the memory modules are supported by testing the modules using memtest86 or a similar utility.

Note: Refer to the product page on our website at http://www.supermicro.com for memory and CPU support and updates.

1. HDD support: Make sure that all hard disk drives (HDDs) work properly. Replace the bad HDDs with good ones.

2. System cooling: Check the system cooling to make sure that all heatsink fans and CPU/system fans, etc., work properly. Check the hardware monitoring settings in the IPMI to make sure that the CPU and system temperatures are within the normal range. Also, check the front panel Overheat LED and make sure that it is not on.

3. Adequate power supply: Make sure that the power supply provides adequate power to the system. Make sure that all power connectors are connected. Please refer to our website for more information on the minimum power requirements.

4. Proper software support: Make sure that the correct drivers are used.

B. If the system becomes unstable before or during OS installation, check the following:

1. Source of installation: Make sure that the devices used for installation are working properly, including boot devices such as CD.

2. Cable connection: Check to make sure that all cables are connected and working properly.

3. Using the minimum configuration for troubleshooting: Remove all unnecessary components (starting with add-on cards first), and use the minimum configuration (but with a CPU and a memory module installed) to identify the trouble areas. Refer to the steps listed in Section A above for proper troubleshooting procedures.

4. Identifying bad components by isolating them: If necessary, remove a component in question from the chassis, and test it in isolation to make sure that it works properly. Replace a bad component with a good one.
5. Check and change one component at a time instead of changing several items at the same time. This will help isolate and identify the problem.
6. To find out if a component is good, swap this component with a new one to see if the system will work properly. If so, then the old component is bad. You can also install the component in question in another system. If the new system works, the component is good and the old system has problems.

3.2 Technical Support Procedures

Before contacting Technical Support, please take the following steps. Also, note that as a motherboard manufacturer, we do not sell directly to end-users, so it is best to first check with your distributor or reseller for troubleshooting services. They should know of any possible problem(s) with the specific system configuration that was sold to you.

1. Please review the 'Troubleshooting Procedures' and 'Frequently Asked Questions' (FAQs) sections in this chapter or see the FAQs on our website before contacting Technical Support.
2. BIOS upgrades can be downloaded from our website. Note: Not all BIOS can be flashed depending on the modifications to the boot block code.

3. If you still cannot resolve the problem, include the following information when contacting us for technical support:

4. Motherboard model and PCB revision number

5. BIOS release date/version (this can be seen on the initial display when your system first boots up)
6. System configuration

An example of a Technical Support form is posted on our website.

Distributors: For immediate assistance, please have your account number ready when contacting our technical support department by e-mail.

3.3 Frequently Asked Questions

Question: What type of memory does my motherboard support?

Answer: The X11DPU-Z+/ZE+ motherboard supports up to 6TB of 3DS Load Reduced DIMM (3DS LRDIMM), Load Reduced DIMM (LRDIMM), 3DS Registered DIMM (3DS RDIMM), Registered DIMM (RDIMM), Non-Volatile DIMM (NV-DIMM) DDR4 (288-pin) ECC 2933*/2666/2400/2133 MHz memory in 24 slots (*Note below.) See Section 2.4 for details on installing memory.

Note: Support for 2933 MHz memory is dependent on the CPU SKU. See Section 2.4 for details on installing memory.

Question: Why can't I turn off the power using the momentary power on/off switch?

Answer: The instant power off function is controlled in BIOS by the Power Button Mode setting. When the On/Off feature is enabled, the motherboard will have instant off capabilities as long as the BIOS is in control of the system. When the Standby or Suspend feature is enabled or when the BIOS is not in control such as during memory count (the first screen that appears when the system is turned on), the momentary on/off switch must be held for more than four seconds to shut down the system. This feature is required to implement the ACPI features on the motherboard.

Question: How do I update my BIOS?

Answer: It is recommended that you do not upgrade your BIOS if you are not experiencing any problems with your system. Updated BIOS files are located on our website at http://www.supermicro.com/ResourceApps/BIOS_IPMI_Intel.html. Please check our BIOS warning message and the information on how to update your BIOS on our website. Select your motherboard model and download the BIOS file to your computer. Also, check the current BIOS revision to make sure that it is newer than your BIOS before downloading. Please refer to the following section for the instructions on how to update your BIOS under UEFI Shell.

Note: The SPI BIOS chip used on this motherboard cannot be removed. Send your motherboard back to our RMA Department at Supermicro for repair. For BIOS Recovery instructions, please refer to the AMI BIOS Recovery Instructions posted at http://www.supermicro.com/support/manuals/.

Question: How do I update my BIOS under UEFI Shell?

Note: We do not recommend that you update your BIOS if you are not experiencing a BIOS-related problem. If you need to update your BIOS, please follow the steps below to properly update your BIOS under UEFI Shell.

1. Download and save the BIOS update package to your computer.
2. Extract the files from the UEFI folder of the BIOS package to a USB stick.

Note: The USB stick doesn't have to be bootable; however, it has to be formatted with the FAT/FAT32 file system.

1. Insert the USB stick into a USB port, boot to the UEFI Built-In Shell, and enter the following commands to start the BIOS update:

Shell> fs0:

fs0:> cd UEFI

1. The FLASH.NSH script will compare the Flash Descriptor Table (FDT) code in the new BIOS with the existing one in the motherboard:

a. If a different FDT is found

• A new file, STARTUP.NSH, will be created, and the system will automatically reboot in 10 seconds without you pressing any key. BIOS will be updated after the system reboots.
• You can also press to force an immediate system reboot to shorten the process. During system reboot, press the key to invoke the boot menu and boot into the build-in UEFI Shell. Your BIOS will be updated automatically.

b. If the FDT is the same

- BIOS update will be immediately performed without a system reboot initiated.

Warning: Do not shut down or reset the system while updating the BIOS to prevent possible system boot failure!)

1. Perform an A/C power cycle after the message indicating the BIOS update has completed.
2. Go to the BIOS setup utility, and restore the BIOS settings.

3.4 Battery Removal and Installation

Battery Removal

To remove the onboard battery, follow the steps below:

1. Power off your system and unplug your power cable.
2. Using a tool such as a pen or a small screwdriver, push the battery lock outwards to unlock it. Once unlocked, the battery will pop out from the holder.
3. Remove the battery.

Proper Battery Disposal

Please handle used batteries carefully. Do not damage the battery in any way; a damaged battery may release hazardous materials into the environment. Do not discard a used battery in the garbage or a public landfill. Please comply with the regulations set up by your local hazardous waste management agency to dispose of your used battery properly.

Battery Installation

1. To install an onboard battery, follow the steps below:
2. Power off your system and unplug your power cable.
3. Locate the onboard battery as shown below.
4. Identify the battery's polarity. The positive (+) side should be facing up.
5. Insert the battery into the battery holder and push it down until you hear a click to ensure that the battery is securely locked.

Note: When replacing a battery, be sure to only replace it with the same type.

LITHIUM BATTERY

BATTERY HOLDER

OR

LITHIUM BATTERY

BATTERY HOLDER

3.5 Returning Merchandise for Service

A receipt or copy of your invoice marked with the date of purchase is required before any warranty service will be rendered. You can obtain service by calling your vendor for a Returned Merchandise Authorization (RMA) number. When you return to your motherboard to Supermicro, the RMA number should be prominently displayed on the outside of the shipping carton and mailed prepaid or hand-carried. Shipping and handling charges will be applied for all orders that must be mailed when service is complete.

For faster service, RMA authorizations may be requested online (http://www.supermicro.com/support/rma/).

This warranty only covers normal consumer use and does not cover damages incurred in shipping or from failure due to the alteration, misuse, abuse or improper maintenance of products.

During the warranty period, contact your distributor first for any product problems.

Chapter 4

UEFI BIOS

4.1 Introduction

This chapter describes the AMIBIOS™ setup utility for the X11DPU-Z(E)+ motherboard. The BIOS is stored on a chip and can be easily upgraded using a flash program.

Note: Due to periodic changes to the BIOS, some settings may have been added or deleted and might not yet be recorded in this manual. Please refer to the Manual Download area of our website for any changes to the BIOS that may not be reflected in this manual.

Starting the Setup Utility

To enter the BIOS setup utility, press the key while the system is booting up. (In most cases, the key is used to invoke the BIOS setup screen. There are a few cases when other keys are used, such as , , etc.) Each main BIOS menu option is described in this manual.

The Main BIOS screen has two mainframes. The left frame displays all the options that can be configured. "Grayed-out" options cannot be configured. The right frame displays the key legend. Above the key legend is an area reserved for a text message. When an option is selected in the left frame, it is highlighted in white. Often a text message will accompany it. (Note that BIOS has default text messages built in. We retain the option to include, omit, or change any of these text messages.) Settings printed in Bold are the default values.

A "▶" indicates a submenu. Highlighting such an item and pressing the key will open the list of settings within that submenu.

The BIOS setup utility uses a key-based navigation system called hot keys. Most of these hot keys (, , , , , , keys, etc.) can be used at any time during the setup navigation process.

4.2 Main Setup

When you first enter the AMI BIOS setup utility, you will see the Main setup screen. You can always return to the Main setup screen by selecting the Main tab on the top of the screen. The Main BIOS setup screen is shown below.

Rotio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc. Main Advanced Event Logs JPMI Security Boot Save & Exit System Date [Fri 05/03/2019] System Time [05:30:10] Supermicro X11DPU-2+ BIOS Version 3.1 Build Date 05/03/2019 CPLD Version 03.81.04 Memory Information Total Memory 65536 MB Set the Date. Use Tab to switch between Date elements. Default Ranges: Year: 1938-9899 Months: 1-12 Days: Dependent on month Range of Years may vary. +: Select Screen T4: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESC: Exit Version 2.20.1275. Copyright (C) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc.

System Date/System Time

Use this item to change the system date and time. Highlight System Date or System Time using the arrow keys. Enter new values using the keyboard. Press the key or the arrow keys to move between fields. The date must be entered in Day MM/DD/YYYY format. The time is entered in HH:MM:SS format.

Note: The time is in the 24-hour format. For example, 5:30 P.M. appears as 17:30:00. The date's default value is the BIOS build date after the RTC (Real Time Clock) reset.

Supermicro X11DPU-Z+/X11DPU-ZE+

BIOS Version

This feature displays the version of the BIOS ROM used in the system.

Build Date

This feature displays the date when the version of the BIOS ROM used in the system was built.

CPLD Version

This feature displays the version of the CPLD (Complex-Programmable Logical Device) used in the system.

Memory Information

Total Memory

This feature displays the total size of memory available in the system.

Memory Speed

This feature displays the default speed of the memory modules installed in the system.

4.3 Advanced Setup Configurations

Use the arrow keys to select the Advanced submenu and press to access the submenu items:

Aptio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc. Main Advanced Event Logs JPMI Security Boot Save & Exit ▶ Boot Feature ▶ CPU Configuration ▶ chipset Configuration ▶ Server ME Information ▶ BCH SATA Configuration ▶ BCH sSATA Configuration ▶ PCIe/PCI/PoP Configuration ▶ Super IO Configuration ▶ Serial Port Console Redirection ▶ ACPI Settings ▶ Trusted Computing ▶ HTTP BOOT Configuration ▶ TLS Authenticate Configuration ▶ ISOBT Configuration ▶ Driver Health Boot Feature Configuration Page +:- Select Screen 14: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESC: Exit Version 2.20.1275. Copyright (C) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc.

Warning: Take Caution when changing the Advanced settings. An incorrect value, an improper DRAM frequency, or a wrong BIOS timing setting may cause the system to malfunction. When this occurs, restore the setting to the manufacturer default setting.

▶Boot Configuration

Quiet Boot

Use this feature to select the screen between displaying POST messages or the OEM logo at bootup. Select Disabled to display the POST messages. Select Enabled to display the OEM logo instead of the normal POST messages. The options are Enabled and Disabled.

Note: POST message is always displayed regardless of the item setting.

Option ROM Messages

Use this feature to set the display mode for the Option ROM. Select Keep Current to use the current AddOn ROM display settings. Select Force BIOS to use the Option ROM display mode set by the system BIOS. The options are Force BIOS and Keep Current.

Bootup NumLock State

Use this feature to set the Power-on state for the Numlock key. The options are Off and On.

Wait For 'F1' If Error

Select Enabled to force the system to wait until the key is pressed if an error occurs. The options are Disabled and Enabled.

Interrupt 19 Capture

Interrupt 19 is the software interrupt that handles the boot disk function. When this feature is set to Immediate, the ROM BIOS of the host adaptors will "capture" Interrupt 19 at bootup immediately and allow the drives that are attached to tshese host adaptors to function as bootable disks. If this item is set to Postponed, the ROM BIOS of the host adaptors will not capture Interrupt 19 immediately to allow the drives attached to these adaptors to function as bootable devices at bootup. The options are Immediate and Postponed.

Re-try Boot

When EFI (Extensible Firmware Interface) Boot is selected, the system BIOS will automatically reboot the system from an EFI boot device after an initial boot failure. Select Legacy Boot to allow the BIOS to automatically reboot the system from a Legacy boot device after an initial boot failure. The options are Disabled, Legacy Boot, and EFI Boot.

Install Windows 7 USB Support

Select Enabled to install the Windows 7 USB utility to support legacy USB devices for Windows 7 systems. The options are Enabled and Disabled.

Port 61h Bit-4 Emulation

Select Enabled for I/O Port 61h-Bit 4 emulation support to enhance system performance. The options are Enabled and Disabled.

Power Configuration

Watch Dog Function

Select Enabled to allow the Watch Dog timer to reboot the system when it is inactive for more than 5 minutes. The options are Enabled and Disabled.

Restore on AC Power Loss

Use this feature to set the power state after a power outage. Select Power Off for the system power to remain off after a power loss. Select Power On for the system power to be turned on after a power loss. Select Last State to allow the system to resume its last power state before a power loss. The options are Stay Off, Power On, and Last State.

Power Button Function

This feature controls how the system shuts down when the power button is pressed. Select 4 Seconds Override for the user to power off the system after pressing and holding the power

button for 4 seconds or longer. Select Instant Off to instantly power off the system as soon as the user presses the power button. The options are 4 Seconds Override and Instant Off.

Throttle on Power Fail

This feature allows for the decrease of system power by throttling CPU frequency when one power supply has failed. The options are Enabled and Disabled.

▶CPU Configuration

Warning: Setting the wrong values in the following sections may cause the system to malfunction.

▶Processor Configuration

The following CPU information will be displayed:

• Processor BSP Revision
• Processor Socket
• Processor ID
• Processor Frequency
• Processor Max Ratio
• Processor Min Ratio
• Microcode Revision
• L1 Cache RAM
• L2 Cache RAM
• L3 Cache RAM
• Processor 0 Version
• Processor 1 Version

Hyper-Threading (ALL)

Select Enable to use Intel Hyper-Threading Technology to enhance CPU performance. The options are Enable and Disable.

Core Enabled

Use this feature to enable or disable CPU cores in the processor specified by the user. Use the <+> key and the <-> key on the keyboard to set the desired number of CPU cores you want to enable in a processor. Please note that the maximum of 24 CPU cores is currently available in each CPU package. The default setting is 0.

Monitor/Mwait

Monitor and Mwait are two instructions in SSE3 (Streaming SIMD Extension 3). They improve the synchronization between multiple threads. Mwait is an instruction which allows package C states to enter specific values. The options are Enable, Disable, and Auto.

Execute Disable Bit (Available if supported by the OS & the CPU)

Select Enable for Execute Disable Bit support which will allow the processor to designate areas in the system memory where an application code can execute and where it cannot, thus preventing a worm or a virus from flooding illegal codes to overwhelm the processor, damaging the system during a virus attack. The options are Enable and Disable. (Refer to Intel and Microsoft websites for more information.)

Intel Virtualization Technology (Available when two processors are installed on the motherboard)

Select Enable to use Intel Virtualization Technology which will allow multiple workloads to share the same set of common resources. On shared virtualized hardware, various workloads (or tasks) can co-exist, sharing the same resources, while functioning in full independence from each other, and migrating freely across multi-level infrastructures and scale as needed. The settings are Enable and Disable.

PPIN Control

Select Unlock/Enable to use the Protected-Processor Inventory Number (PPIN) in the system. The options are Unlock/Enable and Unlock/Disable.

Hardware Prefetcher (Available when supported by the CPU)

Hardware prefetcher prefetches the data from memory into cache (second level L2) to reduce latency with memory reads and improve application performance. Memory-intensive applications with high bus utilization could see a performance degradation if hardware prefetching is enabled. The options are Disable and Enable.

Adjacent Cache Prefetch (Available when supported by the CPU)

Select Enable for the CPU to prefetch both cache lines for 128 bytes as comprised. Select Disable for the CPU to prefetch both cache lines for 64 bytes. The options are Disable and Enable.

Note: Please power off and reboot the system for the changes you've made to take effect. Please refer to Intel's website for detailed information.

DCU Streamer Prefetcher (Available when supported by the CPU)

If this feature is set to Enable, the DCU (Data Cache Unit) streamer prefetcher will prefetch data streams from the cache memory to the DCU (Data Cache Unit) to speed up data accessing and processing to enhance CPU performance. The options are Disable and Enable.

DCU IP Prefetcher

This feature allows the system to use the sequential load history, which is based on the instruction pointer of previous loads, to determine whether the system will prefetch additional lines. The options are Enable and Disable.

LLC Prefetch

If this feature is set to Enable, LLC (hardware cache) prefetching on all threads will be supported. The options are Disable and Enable.

Extended APIC (Extended Advanced Programmable Interrupt Controller)

Based on the Intel Hyper-Threading technology, each logical processor (thread) is assigned 256 APIC IDs (APIDs) in 8-bit bandwidth. When this feature is set to Enable, the APIC ID will be expanded from 8 bits to 16 bits to provide 512 APIDs to each thread to enhance CPU performance. The options are Disable and Enable.

AES-NI

Select Enable to use the Intel Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) New Instructions (NI) to ensure data security. The options are Enable and Disable.

▶Advanced Power Management Configuration

Power Technology

Select Energy Efficient to support power-saving mode. Select Custom to customize system power settings. Select Disabled to disable power-saving settings. The options are Disable, Energy Efficient, and Custom.

Power Performance Tuning (Available when "Power Technology" is set to Custom) Select BIOS to allow the system BIOS to configure the Power-Performance Tuning Bias setting. The options are BIOS Controls EPB and OS Controls EPB.

ENERGY\_PERF\_BIAS\_CFG Mode (ENERGY PERFORMANCE BIAS CONFIGURATION Mode) (Available when "Power Performance Tuning" is set to BIOS Controls EPB)

Use this feature to set the processor power use policy to achieve the desired operation settings for your machine by prioritizing system performance or energy savings. Select Maximum Performance to maximize system performance (to its highest potential); however, this may result in maximum power consumption as energy is needed to fuel the processor frequency. The higher the performance is, the higher the power consumption will be. Select Max Power Efficient to maximize power saving; however, system performance may be substantially impacted because limited power use decreases the processor frequency. The options are Extreme Performance, Maximum Performance, Performance, Balanced Performance, Balanced Power, and Power.

▶CPU P State Control (Available when "Power Technology" is set to Custom)

SpeedStep (PStates)

EIST (Enhanced Intel SpeedStep Technology) allows the system to automatically adjust processor voltage and core frequency in an effort to reduce power consumption and heat dissipation. Please refer to Intel's website for detailed information. The options are Disable and Enable.

EIST PSD Function (Available when SpeedStep is set to Enable)

Use this item to configure the processor's P-State coordination settings. During a P-State, the voltage and frequency of the processor will be reduced when it is in operation. This makes the processor more energy efficient, resulting in further energy gains. The options are HW_ALL, SW_ALL, and SW_ANY.

Turbo Mode (Available when SpeedStep is set to Enable)

It raises the clock frequency of the processor to a manufacturer defined turbo speed beyond the stock frequency when CPU is under load. The predefined turbo speed can be found on the CPU data sheet. Turbo mode uses more power when enabled. The options are Disable and Enable.

▶Hardware PM (Power Management) State Control Available when "Power Technology" is set to Custom)

Hardware P-States

If this feature is set to Disable, hardware will choose a P-state setting for the system based on an OS request. If this feature is set to Native Mode, hardware will choose a P-state setting based on OS guidance. If this feature is set to Native Mode with No Legacy Support, hardware will choose a P-state setting independently without OS guidance. The options are Disable, Native Mode, Out of Band Mode, and Native Mode with No Legacy Support.

▶CPU C State Control

Autonomous Core C-State

Select Enable to support Autonomous Core C-State control which will allow the processor core to control its C-State setting automatically and independently. The options are Disable and Enable.

CPU C6 Report (Available when Autonomous Core C-State is set to Disable)

Select Enable to allow the BIOS to report the CPU C6 state (ACPI C3) to the operating system. During the CPU C6 state, the power to all caches is turned off. The options are Auto, Enable, and Disable.

Enhanced Halt State (C1E) (Available when Autonomous Core C-State is set to Disable)

Select Enable to enable "Enhanced Halt State" support, which will significantly reduce the CPU's power consumption by minimizing CPU's clock cycles and reduce voltage during a "Halt State." The options are Disable and Enable.

▶Package C State Control (Available when "Power Technology" is set to Custom)

Package C State

Package C state is the idle power-saving feature applied to the entire system, all cores and circuits included.

This option is used to optimize or reduce CPU package power consumption in idle mode. For example, if C2 state is chosen, all cores cannot be in a deeper state than C2, they can only be C0, C1, C2. The options are C0/C1 state, C2 state, C6 (non-Retention) state, C6 (Retention) state, No Limit, and Auto.

▶CPU T State Control Available when "Power Technology" is set to Custom)

Software Controlled T-States

If this feature is set to Enable, CPU throttling settings will be supported by the software of the system. The options are Enable and Disable.

▶Chipset Configuration

Warning: Setting the wrong values in the following items may cause the system to malfunction.

▶North Bridge

This feature allows the user to configure the settings for the Intel North Bridge.

▶UPI (Ultra Path Interconnect) Configuration

This section displays the following UPI General Configuration information:

• Number of CPU
• Number of Active UPI Link
• Current UPI Link Speed

• Current UPI Link Frequency
• UPI Global MMIO Low Base/Limit
• UPI Global MMIO High Base/Limit
• UPI PCI-E Configuration Base/Size

Degrade Precedence

Use this feature to select the degrading precedence option for Ultra Path Interconnect (UPI) connections. Select Topology Precedent to degrade UPI features if system options are in conflict. Select Feature Precedent to degrade UPI topology if system options are in conflict. The options are Topology Precedence and Feature Precedence.

Link L0p Enable

Select Enable for the system BIOS to enable Link L0p support which will allow the CPU to reduce the UPI links from full width to half width in the event when the CPU's workload is low in an attempt to save power. This feature is available for the system that uses Intel processors with UPI technology support. The options are Disable, Enable, and Auto.

Note: You can change the performance settings for non-standard applications by using this parameter. It is recommended that the default settings be used for standard applications.

Link L1 Enable

Select Enable for the BIOS to activate Link L1 support which will power down the UPI links to save power when the system is idle. This feature is available for the system that uses Intel processors with UPI technology support. The options are Disable, Enable, and Auto.

Note: Link L1 is an excellent feature for an idle system. L1 is used during Package C-States when its latency is hidden by other components during a wakeup.

IO Directory Cache (IODC)

Select Enable for the IODC (I/O Directory Cache) to generate snoops instead of generating memory lockups for remote IIO (InvIToM) and/or WCiLF (Cores). Select Auto for the IODC to generate snoops (instead of memory lockups) for WCiLF (Cores). The options are Disable, Auto, Enable for Remote InvItoM Hybrid Push, InvItoM AllocFlow, Enable for Remote InvItoM Hybrid AllocNonAlloc, and Enable for Remote InvItoM and Remote WViLF.

SNC

Select Enable to use "Sub NUMA Clustering" (SNC), which supports full SNC (2-cluster) interleave and 1-way IMC interleave. Select Auto for 1-cluster or 2-cluster support depending

on the status of IMC (Integrated Memory Controller) Interleaving. The options are Disable, Enable, and Auto.

XPT Prefetch

Select Enable for XPT (Extended Prediction Table) Prefetch support which will allow an LLC request to be duplicated and sent to an appropriate memory controller based on the recent LLC history to reduce latency. The options are Enable, and Disable.

KTI Prefetch

If this feature is set to Enable, the KTI prefetcher will preload the L1 cache with data deemed relevant to allow the memory read to start earlier on a DDR bus in an effort to reduce latency. The options are Enable and Disable.

Local/Remote Threshold

This feature allows the user to set the threshold for the Interrupt Request (IRQ) signal, which handles hardware interruptions. The options are Disable, Auto, Low, Medium, and High.

Stale AtoS (A to S)

The in-memory directory has three states: I, A, and S states. The I (-invalid) state indicates that the data is clean and does not exist in the cache of any other sockets. The A (-snoop All) state indicates that the data may exist in another socket in an exclusive or modified state. The S state (-Shared) indicates that the data is clean and may be shared in the caches across one or more sockets. When the system is performing "read" on the memory and if the directory line is in A state, we must snoop all other sockets because another socket may have the line in a modified state. If this is the case, a "snoop" will return the modified data. However, it may be the case that a line "reads" in an A state, and all the snoops come back with a "miss". This can happen if another socket reads the line earlier and then has silently dropped it from its cache without modifying it. If the "Stale AtoS" feature is enabled, a line will transition to the S state when the line in the A state returns only snoop misses. That way, subsequent reads to the line will encounter it in the S state and will not have to snoop, saving the latency and snoop bandwidth. Stale "AtoS" may be beneficial in a workload where there are many cross-socket reads. The options are Disable, Enable, and Auto.

LLC Dead Line Alloc

Select Enable to opportunistically fill the deadlines in the LLC. The options are Enable, Disable, and Auto.

Isoc Mode

Select Enable to enable Isochronous support to meet QoS (Quality of Service) requirements. This feature is especially important for Virtualization Technology. The options are Disable, Enable, and Auto.

▶Memory Configuration

Enforce POR (Plan of Record)

Select POR to enforce POR restrictions for DDR4 memory frequency and voltage programming. The options are POR and Disable.

PPR Type

Post Package Repair (PPR) is a new feature available for DDR4 Technology. PPR provides additional spare capacity within a DDR4 DRAM module that is used to replace faulty cell areas detected during system boot. PPR offers two types of memory repairs. Soft Post Package Repair (sPPR) provides a quick, temporary fix on a raw element in a bank group of a DDR4 DRAM device, while hard Post Package Repair (hPPR) will take a longer time to provide a permanent repair on a raw element. The options are Auto, Hard PPR, Soft PPR, and PPR Disabled.

Memory Frequency

Use this feature to set the maximum memory frequency for onboard memory modules. The options are Auto, 1866, 2000, 2133, 2400, 2666, and 2933. Note: Support for 2933 MHz memory is dependent on the CPU SKU.

Data Scrambling for DDR4

Select Enable to enable data scrambling for DDR4 memory to enhance system performance and security. Select Auto for the default setting of the Memory Reference Code (MRC) to set configure data scrambling for DDR4 setting. The options are Auto, Disable, and Enable.

tCCD\_L Relaxation

If this feature is set to Enable, SPD (Serial Presence Detect) will override tCCD_L ("Column to Column Delay-Long", or "Command to Command Delay-Long" on the column side.) If this feature is set to Disable, tCCD_L will be enforced based on the memory frequency. The options are Auto and Disable.

tRWSR (Read to Write turnaround time for Same Rank) Relaxation

Select Enable to use the same tRWSR DDR timing setting among all memory channels, and in which case, the worst-case value among all channels will be used. Select Disable to use different values for the tRWSR DDR timing settings for different channels as trained. The options are Auto, Disable, and Enable.

Enable ADR

Select Enable for ADR (Async DIMM Self-Refresh) support to enhance memory performance. The options are Disable and Enable.

Data Scrambling for NVDIMM

Select Enable to enable data scrambling support for onboard NVDIMM memory to improve system performance and security. The options are Auto, Disable, and Enable.

Erase-Arm NVDIMMs

If this feature is set to Enable, the function that arms the NVDIMMs for safe operations in the event of a power loss will be removed. The options are Enable and Disable.

Restore NVDIMMs

Select Enable to restore the functionality and the features of NVDIMMs. The options are Enable and Disable.

Interleave NVDIMMs

If this item is set to Enable, all onboard NVDIMM modules will be configured together as a group for the interleave mode. If this item is set to Disable, individual NVDIMM modules will be configured separately for the interleave mode. The options are Enable and Disable.

Reset Trigger ADR (Async DIMM Self-Refresh)

Upon system power loss, an ADR sequence will be triggered to allow ADR to flush the write-protected data buffers in the memory controller and place the DRAM memory in self-refresh mode. When this process is complete, the NVDIMM will then take control of the DRAM memory and transfer the contents to the onboard Flash memory. After the transfer is complete, the NVDIMM goes into a zero power state. The data transferred will be retained for the duration specified by the flash memory. The options are Enable and Disable.

S5 Trigger ADR

Select Enabled to support S5-Triggered ADR to enhance system performance and data integrity. The options are Disabled and Enabled.

2X Refresh

Select Enable for memory 2X refresh support to enhance memory performance. The options are Disable, Enable and Auto.

Page Policy

Use this feature to set the page policy for onboard memory support. The options are Closed, Adaptive, and Auto.

IMC Interleaving

Use this feature to configure interleaving settings for the IMC (Integrated Memory Controller), which will improve memory performance. The options are 1-way Interleave, 2-way Interleave, and Auto.

▶Memory Topology

This item displays the information of onboard memory modules as detected by the BIOS.

• P1DIMMA1/DIMMA2/DIMMB1/DIMMC1/DIMMD1/DIMMD2/DIMME1/DIMMF1
• P2DIMMA1/DIMMA2/DIMMB1/DIMMC1/DIMMD1/DIMMD2/DIMME1/DIMMF1

▶Memory RAS (Reliability\_Availability\_Serviceability) Configuration

Use this submenu to configure the following Memory RAS settings.

Static Virtual Lockstep Mode

Select Enable to support Static Virtual Lockstep mode to enhance memory performance. The options are Enable and Disable.

Mirror Mode

Use this feature to configure the mirror mode settings for all 1LM/2LM memory modules installed in the system which will create a duplicate copy of data stored in the memory to increase memory security, but it will reduce the memory capacity into half. The options are Disable, Mirror Mode 1LM, and Mirror Mode 2LM.

Memory Rank Sparing

Select Enable to support memory-rank sparing to optimize memory performance. The options are Enable and Disable.

Note: This item will not be available when memory mirror mode is set to Mirror Mode 1LM or an AEP device is plugged in.

Correctable Error Threshold

Use this item to enter the threshold value for correctable memory errors. The default setting is 512.

SDDC Plus One

SDDC (Single Device Data Correction) Plus One checks and corrects single-bit or multiple-bit (4-bit max.) memory faults that affect an entire single x4 DRAM device. The options are Disable and Enable. (Note: Enable is used as the default setting for this feature when it is supported by the motherboard.)

Intel Run Sure

Select Enable to use Intel Run Sure Technology which will enhance critical data protection and increase system uptime and resiliency. The options are Enable and Disable.

ADDDC (Adaptive Double Device Data Correction) Sparing (Available when Intel Run Sure is set to Enable)

Select Enable for Adaptive Double Device Data Correction (ADDDC) support, which will not only provide memory error checking and correction but will also prevent the system from issuing a performance penalty before a device fails. Please note that virtual lockstep mode will only start to work for ADDDC after a faulty DRAM module is spared. The options are Enable and Disable.

Patrol Scrub

Patrol Scrubbing is a process that allows the CPU to correct correctable memory errors detected in a memory module and send the corrections to the requestor (the original source). When this feature is set to Enable, the IO hub will read and write back one cache line every 16K cycles if there is no delay caused by internal processing. By using this method, roughly 64 GB of memory behind the IO hub will be scrubbed every day. The options are Enable and Disable.

Patrol Scrub Interval

Use this item to specify the number of hours (between 0 to 24) required for the system to complete a full patrol scrubbing. Enter 0 for patrol scrubbing to be performed automatically. The default setting is 24.

Note: This item is hidden when Patrol Scrub item is set to Disable.

▶IIO Configuration

EV DFX (Device Function On-Hide) Features

When this feature is set to Enable, the EV_DFX Lock Bits that are located in a processor will always remain clear during electric tuning. The options are Disable and Enable.

▶CPU1 Configuration/CPU2 Configuration

IOU0 (IIO PCIe Br1)

Use this feature to configure the PCI-E Bifurcation setting for a PCI-E port specified by the user. The options are x4x4x4x4, x4x4x8, x8x4x4, x8x8, x16, and Auto.

IOU1 (IIO PCIe Br2)

Use this feature to configure the PCI-E Bifurcation setting for a PCI-E port specified by the user. The options are x4x4x4x4, x4x4x8, x8x4x4, x8x8, x16, and Auto.

IOU2 (IIO PCIe Br3)

Use this feature to configure the PCI-E Bifurcation setting for a PCI-E port specified by the user. The options are x4x4x4x4, x4x4x8, x8x4x4, x8x8, x16, and Auto.

MCP0 (IIO PCIe Br4)

Use this feature to configure the PCI-E Bifurcation setting for a PCI-E port specified by the user. The options are x16 and Auto.

MCP1 (IIO PCIe Br5)

Use this feature to configure the PCI-E Bifurcation setting for a PCI-E port specified by the user. The options are x16 and Auto.

▶P1\_NVMe0/P1\_NVMe1

Link Speed

Use this feature to configure the link speed of a PCI-E port specified by the user. The options are Auto, Gen 1 (Generation 1) (2.5 GT/s), Gen 2 (Generation 2) (5 GT/s), and Gen 3 (Generation 3) (8 GT/s)

The following information will be displayed:

• PCI-E Port Link Status
- PCI-E Port Link Max
• PCI-E Port Link Speed

PCI-E Port Max (Maximum) Payload Size (Available for CPU 1 Configuration only)

Select Auto for the system BIOS to automatically set the maximum payload value for a PCI-E device specified by the user for system performance enhancement. The options are Auto, 128B, and 256B.

▶AOC-2UR68-i2XT Slot 1/AOC-2UR68-i2XT Slot 2/AOC-2UR68-i2XT Slot 3 (Available for CPU 1 Configuration Only)

Link Speed

Use this feature to configure the link speed of a PCI-E port specified by the user. The options are Auto, Gen 1 (Generation 1) (2.5 GT/s), Gen 2 (Generation 2) (5 GT/s), and Gen 3 (Generation 3) (8 GT/s)

The following information will be displayed:

• PCI-E Port Link Status
• PCI-E Port Link Max
• PCI-E Port Link Speed

PCI-E Port Max (Maximum) Payload Size (Available for CPU 1 Configuration only)

Select Auto for the system BIOS to automatically set the maximum payload value for a PCI-E device specified by to user for system performance enhancement. The options are Auto, 128B, and 256B.

▶IOAT Configuration

Disable TPH (TLP Processing Hint)

TPH is used for data-tagging with a destination ID and a few important attributes. It can send critical data to a particular cache without writing through to memory. Select No in this item for TLP Processing Hint support, which will allow a "TPL request" to provide "hints" to help optimize the processing of each transaction occurred in the target memory space. The options are Yes and No.

Prioritize TPH (TLP Processing Hint)

Select Yes to prioritize the TPL requests that will allow the "hints" to be sent to help facilitate and optimize the processing of certain transactions in the system memory. The options are Enable and Disable.

Relaxed Ordering

Select Enable to allow certain transactions to be processed and completed before other transactions that have already been enqueued. The options are Disable and Enable.

▶Intel VT for Directed I/O (VT-d)

Intel® VT for Directed I/O (VT-d)

Select Enable to use Intel Virtualization Technology support for Direct I/O VT-d by reporting the I/O device assignments to the VMM (Virtual Machine Monitor) through the DMAR ACPI tables. This feature offers fully-protected I/O resource sharing across Intel platforms, providing greater reliability, security, and availability in networking and data-sharing. The options are Enable and Disable.

ACS (Access Control Services) Control

Select Enable to program Access Control Services to Chipset PCI-E Root Port Bridges. Select Disable to program Access Control Services to all PCI-E Root Port Bridges. The options are Enable and Disable.

Interrupt Remapping

If this feature is set to Enable, I/O DMA transfer remapping and device-generated interrupts will be supported. The options are Enable and Disable.

PassThrough DMA

Select Enable for the Non-Isoch VT-d engine to pass through DMA (Direct Memory Access) to enhance system performance. The options are Enable and Disable.

ATS

Select Enable to enable ATS (Address Translation Services) support for the Non-Isoch VT-d engine to enhance system performance. The options are Enable and Disable.

Posted Interrupt

Select Enable to support VT_D Posted Interrupt which will allow external interrupts to be sent directly from a direct-assigned device to a client machine in non-root mode to improve virtualization efficiency by simplifying interrupt migration and lessening the need of physical interrupts. The options are Enable and Disable.

Coherency Support (Non-Isoch)

Select Enable for the Non-Isoch VT-d engine to pass through DMA (Direct Memory Access) to enhance system performance. The options are Enable and Disable.

Intel® VMD Technology

This section describes the configuration settings for the Intel Volume Management Device (VMD) Technology.

Note: After you've enabled VMD in the BIOS on a PCI-E slot of your choice, this PCI-E slot will be dedicated for VMD use only, and it will no longer support any PCI-E device. To re-activate this slot for PCI-E use, please disable VMD in the BIOS.

Intel® VMD for Volume Management Device on CPU1

Intel® VMD for Volume Management Device for PStack0/Intel® VMD for Volume Management Device for PStack1/Intel® VMD for Volume Management Device for PStack2

Select Enable to enable Intel Volume Management Device Technology support for the root port specified by the user. The options are Enable and Disable.

*If Intel® VMD for Volume Management Device for PStack0 is set to Enable, the following item will display.

Intel® VMD for Volume Management Device on CPU2

Intel® VMD for Volume Management Device for PStack0/Intel® VMD for Volume Management Device for PStack1/Intel® VMD for Volume Management Device for PStack2

Select Enable to enable Intel Volume Management Device Technology support for the root port specified by the user. The options are Enable and Disable.

*If Intel® VMD for Volume Management Device for PStack0 is set to Enable, the following item will display.

▶IIO-PCIE Express Global Options

PCI-E Completion Timeout (Global) Disable

Use this feature to select the PCI-E Completion Time-out settings. The options are Yes, No, and Per-Port.

▶ South Bridge

The following South Bridge information will display:

• USB Module Version
• USB Devices

Legacy USB Support

Select Enabled to support onboard legacy USB devices. Select Auto to disable legacy support if there are no legacy USB devices present. Select Disable to have all USB devices available for EFI applications only. The options are Enabled, Disabled, and Auto.

XHCI Hand-Off

This is a work-around solution for operating systems that do not support XHCI (Extensible Host Controller Interface) hand-off. The XHCI ownership change should be claimed by the XHCI driver. The options are Disabled and Enabled.

Port 60/64 Emulation

Select Enabled for I/O port 60h/64h emulation support, which in turn, will provide complete legacy USB keyboard support for the operating systems that do not support legacy USB devices. The options are Enabled and Disabled.

PCIe PLL SSC

Select Enabled for PCH PCI-E Spread Spectrum Clocking support, which will allow the BIOS to monitor and attempt to reduce the level of Electromagnetic Interference caused by the components whenever needed. The options are Enabled and Disabled.

▶Server ME (Management Engine) Configuration

This feature displays the following system ME configuration settings.

• Oper. (Operational) Firmware Version
• Backup Firmware Version
• Recovery Firmware Version
• ME Firmware Status #1/ME Firmware Status #2

- Current State

- Error Code

PTT Support (Available when TPM Configuration is set to Disable.)

Select Enable to support Intel® Platform Trust Technology (PTT) to enhance system security and data integrity. Intel PTT technology integrates the Host software stack, the system BIOS, Manageability Engine (ME) features, and the PCH to run on Intel's TCG (Trusted Computing Group) in conjunction with the TPM (Trusted Platform Module) firmware installed in your system to ensure data security and integrity. The options are Disable and Enable.

Suppress PTT Commands (Available when PTT Support is set to Enable.)

Select Enable to bypass TPM2 commands and submit the system to the PTT (Platform Trust Technology) Firmware.

▶(PCH) SATA Configuration

When this submenu is selected, the AMI BIOS automatically detects the presence of the SATA devices that are supported by the Intel PCH chip and displays the following items:

SATA Controller

This item enables or disables the onboard SATA controller supported by the Intel PCH chip. The options are Enable and Disable.

Configure SATA as (Available when SATA Controller is set to Enable)

Select AHCI to configure a SATA drive specified by the user as an AHCI drive. Select RAID to configure a SATA drive specified by the user as a RAID drive. The options are AHCI and RAID. (Note: This item is hidden when the SATA Controller item is set to Disabled.)

SATA HDD Unlock (Available when SATA Controller is set to Enable)

Select Enable to unlock SATA HDD password in the OS. The options are Enable and Disable.

SATA RSTe Boot Info (Available when Configure SATA as is set to RAID)

This feature allows the user to enable settings that provides full int13h support for SATA controller attached devices. CSM Storage OPRM Policy should be set to Legacy to make this selection effective. The options are Enable and Disable.

Aggressive Link Power Management

When this feature is set to Enable, the SATA AHCI controller manages the power use of the SATA link. The controller will put the link in a low power mode during an extended period of I/O inactivity and will return the link to an active state when I/O activity resumes. The options are Enable and Disable.

SATA RAID Option ROM/UEFI Driver (Available when Configure SATA as is set to RAID)

Select EFI to load the EFI driver for system boot. Select Legacy to load a legacy driver for system boot. The options are Disable, EFI, and Legacy.

SATA Port 0 - SATA Port 7

Hot Plug

Select Enable to support Hot-plugging for the device installed on a selected SATA port which will allow the user to replace the device installed in the slot without shutting down the system. The options are Enable and Disable.

Spin Up Device

When this feature is set to Enable, the SATA device installed on the SATA port specified by the user will start a COMRESET initialization when an edge is detected from 0 to 1. The options are Enable and Disable.

SATA Device Type

Use this feature to specify if the device installed on the SATA port specified by the user should be connected to a Solid State Drive or a Hard Disk Drive. The options are Hard Disk Drive and Solid State Drive.

▶(PCH) sSATA Configuration

When this submenu is selected, the AMI BIOS automatically detects the presence of the sSATA devices that are supported by the sSATA controller and displays the following items:

sSATA Controller

This item enables or disables the onboard sSATA controller supported by the Intel PCH. The options are Enable and Disable.

Configure sSATA as (Available when sSATA Controller is set to Enable)

Select AHCI to configure an sSATA drive specified by the user as an AHCI drive. Select RAID to configure an sSATA drive specified by the user as a RAID drive. The options are AHCI and RAID. (Note: This feature is hidden when the sSATA Controller item is set to Disabled.)

SATA HDD Unlock (Available when sSATA Controller is set to Enable)

Select Enable to unlock sSATA HDD password in the OS. The options are Enable and Disable.

SATA RSTe Boot Info (Available when Configure SATA as is set to RAID)

This feature allows the user to enable settings that provides full int13h support for SATA controller attached devices. CSM Storage OPRM Policy should be set to Legacy to make this selection effective. The options are Enable and Disable.

Aggressive Link Power Management

When this feature is set to Enable, the sSATA AHCI controller manages the power use of the sSATA link. The controller will put the link in a low power mode during an extended period of I/O inactivity, and will return the link to an active state when I/O activity resumes. The options are Disable and Enable.

sSATA RAID Option ROM/UEFI Driver (Available when Configure sSATA as is set to RAID)

Select EFI to load the EFI driver for system boot. Select Legacy to load a legacy driver for system boot. The options are Disable, EFI, and Legacy.

sSATA Port 0 - sSATA Port 5

Hot Plug

Select Enable to support Hot-plugging for the device installed on an sSATA port specified by the user which will allow the user to replace the device installed in the slot without shutting down the system. The options are Enable and Disabled.

Spin Up Device

This setting allows the SATA device installed on the SATA port specified by the user to start a COMRESET initialization when an edge is detected from 0 to 1. The options are Enable and Disable.

sSATA Device Type

Use this feature to specify if the device installed on the sSATA port specified by the user should be connected to a Solid State Drive or a Hard Disk Drive. The options are Hard Disk Drive and Solid State Drive.

▶PCIe/PCI/PnP Configuration

The following PCI information will be displayed:

• PCI Bus Driver Version
• PCI Devices Common Settings

Above 4G Decoding (Available if the system supports 64-bit PCI decoding)

Select Enabled to decode a PCI device that supports 64-bit in the space above 4G Address. The options are Enabled and Disabled.

SR-IOV Support (Available if the system supports Single-Root Virtualization)

Select Enabled for Single-Root IO Virtualization support. The options are Enabled and Disabled.

MMIOHBase

Use this feature to select the base memory size according to memory-address mapping for the IO hub. The options are 56T, 40T, 24T, 16T, 4T, 2T, and 1T.

MMIO High Granularity Size

Use this feature to select the high memory size according to memory-address mapping for the IO hub. The options are 1G, 4G, 16G, 64G, 256G, and 1024G.

Maximum Read Request

Select Auto for the system BIOS to automatically set the maximum size for a read request for a PCI-E device to enhance system performance. The options are Auto, 128 Bytes, 256 Bytes, 512 Bytes, 1024 Bytes, 2048 Bytes, and 4096 Bytes.

MMCFG Base

This feature determines how the lowest MMCFG (Memory-Mapped Configuration) base is assigned to onboard PCI devices. The options are 1G, 1.5G, 1.75G. 2G, 2.25G, and 3G.

NVMe Firmware Source

This feature determines which type of NVMe firmware should be used in your system. The options are Vendor Defined Firmware and AMI Native Support.

VGA Priority

Use this feature to select the graphics device to be used as the primary video display for system boot. The options are Auto, Onboard, and Offboard.

PCI Devices Option ROM Settings

AOC-2UR68-i2XT Slot 1 PCI-E x8 OPROM/AOC-2UR68-i2XT Slot 2 PCI-E x16 OPROM/AOC-2UR68-i2XT Slot 3 PCI-E x8 OPROM

Select EFI to allow the user to boot the computer using an EFI (Extensible Firmware Interface) device installed on the PCI-E slot specified by the user. Select Legacy to allow the user to boot the computer using a legacy device installed on the PCI-E slot specified by the user. The options are Disabled, Legacy, and EFI. (Note: Riser card names may differ in each system.)

Bus Master Enable

If this setting is set to Enabled, the PCI Bus Driver will enable the Bus Master Attribute for DMA transactions. If this setting is set to Disabled, the PCI Bus Driver will disable the Bus Master Attribute for Pre-Boot DMA protection. The options are Disabled and Enabled.

Onboard LAN Device

Select Enable to use onboard LAN devices. The options are Disabled and Enabled.

Onboard LAN1 Option ROM

Use this feature to select the type of device installed in LAN Port1, which will be used for system boot. The options are Disabled, PXE, iSCSI, FCoE, and EFI.

Onboard LAN2 Option ROM

Use this feature to select the type of device installed in LAN Port2, which will be used for system boot. The options are PXE and Disabled.

Onboard NVME1/NVME2/NVME3/NVME4 OPROM

Select EFI to allow the user to boot the computer using an EFI (Extensible Firmware Interface) device installed on the NVME connector specified by the user. Select Legacy to allow the user to boot the computer using a legacy device installed on the NVME connector specified by the user. The options are Disabled, Legacy, and EFI.

Onboard Video OPROM (Option ROM)

Use this feature to select the Onboard Video Option ROM type. The options are Disabled, Legacy, and UEFI.

▶ Network Stack Configuration

Network Stack

Select Enabled to enable PXE (Preboot Execution Environment) or UEFI (Unified Extensible Firmware Interface) for network stack support. The options are Enabled and Disabled.

*If "Network Stack" is set to Enabled, the following items will display:

Ipv4 PXE Support

Select Enabled to enable lpv4 PXE boot support. If this feature is disabled, it will not create the lpv4 PXE boot option. The options are Disabled and Enabled.

Ipv4 HTTP Support

Select Enabled to enable lpv4 HTTP boot support. If this feature is disabled, it will not create the lpv4 HTTP boot option. The options are Enabled and Disabled.

Ipv6 PXE Support

Select Enabled to enable lpv6 PXE boot support. If this feature is disabled, it will not create the lpv6 PXE boot option. The options are Disabled and Enabled.

Ipv6 HTTP Support

Select Enabled to enable lpv6 HTTP boot support. If this feature is disabled, it will not create the lpv6 HTTP boot option. The options are Enabled and Disabled.

PXE Boot Wait Time

Use this feature to select the wait time to press the key to abort the PXE boot. The default is 0.

Media Detect Time

Use this feature to select the wait time in seconds for the BIOS ROM to detect the LAN media (Internet connection or LAN port). The default is 1.

▶ Super IO Configuration

Super IO Chip AST2500

▶ Serial Port 1 Configuration

Serial Port

Select Enabled to enable Serial Port 1. The options are Enabled and Disabled.

Device Settings (Available when the item above "Serial Port (1)" is set to Enabled)

This item displays the base I/O port address and the Interrupt Request address of a serial port specified by the user.

Change Settings

This feature specifies the base I/O port address and the Interrupt Request address of Serial Port 1. Select Auto for the BIOS to automatically assign the base I/O and IRQ address to a serial port specified.

The options for Serial Port 1 are Auto, (IO=3F8h; IRQ=4), (IO=2F8h; IRQ=4); (IO=3F8h; IRQ=4), and (IO=2F8h; IRQ=4).

▶ Serial Port 2 Configuration

Serial Port

Select Enabled to enable Serial Port 2. The options are Enabled and Disabled.

Device Settings (Available when the item above "Serial Port (2)" is set to Enabled)

This feature displays the base I/O port address and the Interrupt Request address of a serial port specified by the user.

Change Settings

This feature specifies the base I/O port address and the Interrupt Request address of Serial Port 2. Select Auto for the BIOS to automatically assign the base I/O and IRQ address to a serial port specified.

The options for Serial Port 2 are Auto, (IO=3F8h; IRQ=3), (IO=2F8h; IRQ=3); (IO=3F8h; IRQ=3), and (IO=2F8h; IRQ=3).

Serial Port 2 Attribute

Select SOL to use COM Port 2 as a Serial_Over_LAN (SOL) port for console redirection. The options are COM and SOL.

▶Serial Port Console Redirection

COM 1 Console Redirection

Select Enabled to enable COM Port 1 for Console Redirection, which will allow a client machine to be connected to a host machine at a remote site for networking. The options are Enabled and Disabled.

*If the item above set to Enabled, the following items will become available for configuration:

COM 1

▶ Console Redirection Settings (for COM 1)

Terminal Type

Use this feature to select the target terminal emulation type for Console Redirection. Select VT100 to use the ASCII Character set. Select VT100+ to add color and function key support. Select ANSI to use the Extended ASCII Character Set. Select VT-UTF8 to use UTF8 encoding to map Unicode characters into one or more bytes. The options are ANSI, VT100, VT100+, and VT-UTF8.

Bits Per second

Use this feature to set the transmission speed for a serial port used in Console Redirection. Make sure that the same speed is used in the host computer and the client computer. Lower transmission speed may be required for long and busy lines. The options are 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, and 115200 (bits per second).

Data Bits

Use this feature to set the data transmission size for Console Redirection. The options are 7 (Bits) and 8 (Bits).

Parity

A parity bit can be sent along with regular data bits to detect data transmission errors. Select Even if the parity bit is set to 0, and the number of 1's in data bits is even. Select Odd if the parity bit is set to 0, and the number of 1's in data bits is odd. Select None if you do not want to send a parity bit with your data bits in transmission. Select Mark to add a mark as a parity bit to be sent along with the data bits. Select Space to add a Space as a parity bit to be sent with your data bits. The options are None, Even, Odd, Mark, and Space.

Stop Bits

A stop bit indicates the end of a serial data packet. Select 1 Stop Bit for standard serial data communication. Select 2 Stop Bits if slower devices are used. The options are 1 and 2.

Flow Control

Use this feature to set the flow control for Console Redirection to prevent data loss caused by a buffer overflow. Send a "Stop" signal to stop sending data when the receiving buffer is full. Send a "Start" signal to start sending data when the receiving buffer is empty. The options are None and Hardware RTS/CTS.

VT-UTF8 Combo Key Support

Select Enabled to enable VT-UTF8 Combination Key support for ANSI/VT100 terminals. The options are Enabled and Disabled.

Recorder Mode

Select Enabled to capture the data displayed on a terminal and send it as text messages to a remote server. The options are Disabled and Enabled.

Resolution 100x31

Select Enabled for extended-terminal resolution support. The options are Disabled and Enabled.

Legacy OS Redirection Resolution

Use this feature to select the number of rows and columns used in Console Redirection for Legacy OS support. The options are 80x24 and 80x25.

Putty KeyPad

This feature selects Function Keys and KeyPad settings for Putty, which is a terminal emulator designed for the Windows OS. The options are VT100, LINUX, XTERMR6, SCO, ESCN, and VT400.

Redirection After BIOS Post

Use this feature to enable or disable Legacy Console Redirection after BIOS POST. When the option-Bootloader is selected, Legacy Console Redirection is disabled before booting the OS. When the option-Always Enable is selected, Legacy Console Redirection remains enabled upon OS bootup. The options are Always Enable and Bootloader.

SOL (Serial-Over-LAN)/COM2

Console Redirection (for SOL/COM2)

Select Enabled to use the SOL port for Console Redirection. The options are Enabled and Disabled.

*If the item above set to Enabled, the following items will become available for user's configuration:

▶ Console Redirection Settings (for SOL/COM2)

Use this feature to specify how the host computer will exchange data with the client computer, which is the remote computer used by the user.

Terminal Type

Use this feature to select the target terminal emulation type for Console Redirection. Select VT100 to use the ASCII Character set. Select VT100+ to add color and function key support. Select ANSI to use the Extended ASCII Character Set. Select VT-UTF8 to use UTF8 encoding to map Unicode characters into one or more bytes. The options are ANSI, VT100, VT100+, and VT-UTF8.

Bits Per second

Use this feature to set the transmission speed for a serial port used in Console Redirection. Make sure that the same speed is used in the host computer and the client computer. Lower transmission speed may be required for long and busy lines. The options are 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600 and 115200 (bits per second).

Data Bits

Use this feature to set the data transmission size for Console Redirection. The options are 7 (Bits) and 8 (Bits).

Parity

A parity bit can be sent along with regular data bits to detect data transmission errors. Select Even if the parity bit is set to 0, and the number of 1's in data bits is even. Select Odd if the parity bit is set to 0, and the number of 1's in data bits is odd. Select None if you do not want to send a parity bit with your data bits in transmission. Select Mark to add a mark as a parity bit to be sent along with the data bits. Select Space to add a Space as a parity bit to be sent with your data bits. The options are None, Even, Odd, Mark, and Space.

Stop Bits

A stop bit indicates the end of a serial data packet. Select 1 Stop Bit for standard serial data communication. Select 2 Stop Bits if slower devices are used. The options are 1 and 2.

Flow Control

Use this feature to set the flow control for Console Redirection to prevent data loss caused by a buffer overflow. Send a "Stop" signal to stop sending data when the receiving buffer is full. Send a "Start" signal to start data-sending when the receiving buffer is empty. The options are None and Hardware RTS/CTS.

VT-UTF8 Combo Key Support

Select Enabled to enable VT-UTF8 Combination Key support for ANSI/VT100 terminals. The options are Enabled and Disabled.

Recorder Mode

Select Enabled to capture the data displayed on a terminal and send it as text messages to a remote server. The options are Disabled and Enabled.

Resolution 100x31

Select Enabled for extended-terminal resolution support. The options are Disabled and Enabled.

Legacy OS Redirection Resolution

Use this feature to select the number of rows and columns used in Console Redirection for Legacy OS support. The options are 80x24 and 80x25.

Putty KeyPad

This feature selects Function Keys and KeyPad settings for Putty, which is a terminal emulator designed for the Windows OS. The options are VT100, LINUX, XTERMR6, SCO, ESCN, and VT400.

Redirection After BIOS Post

Use this feature to enable or disable Legacy Console Redirection after BIOS POST. When the option-Bootloader is selected, Legacy Console Redirection is disabled before booting the OS. When the option-Always Enable is selected, Legacy Console Redirection remains enabled upon OS bootup. The options are Always Enable and Bootloader.

▶Legacy Console Redirection Settings

Legacy Console Redirection Settings

Use this feature to select the COM port to display redirection of Legacy OS and Legacy OPROM messages. The options are COM1 and COM2/SOL.

Serial Port for Out-of-Band Management/Windows Emergency Management Services (EMS)

The feature allows the user to configure Console Redirection settings to support Out-of-Band Serial Port management.

Console Redirection (for EMS)

Select Enabled to use a COM port specified by the user for EMS Console Redirection. The options are Enabled and Disabled.

*If the item above set to Enabled, the following items will become available for user's configuration:

▶Console Redirection Settings (for EMS)

Out-of-Band Management Port

This feature selects a serial port in a client server to be used by the Windows Emergency Management Services (EMS) to communicate with a remote host server. The options are COM1 (Console Redirection) and COM2/SOL (Console Redirection).

Terminal Type

Use this feature to select the target terminal emulation type for Console Redirection. Select VT100 to use the ASCII character set. Select VT100+ to add color and function key support. Select ANSI to use the extended ASCII character set. Select VT-UTF8 to use UTF8 encoding to map Unicode characters into one or more bytes. The options are ANSI, VT100, VT100+, and VT-UTF8.

Bits Per Second

This feature sets the transmission speed for a serial port used in Console Redirection. Make sure that the same speed is used in both host computer and the client computer. Lower transmission speed may be required for long and busy lines. The options are 9600, 19200, 57600, and 115200 (bits per second).

Flow Control

Use this feature to set the flow control for Console Redirection to prevent data loss caused by a buffer overflow. Send a "Stop" signal to stop data-sending when the receiving buffer is full. Send a "Start" signal to start data-sending when the receiving buffer is empty. The options are None, Hardware RTS/CTS, and Software Xon/Xoff.

The setting for each these features is displayed:

Data Bits, Parity, Stop Bits

▶ ACPI Settings

Use this feature to configure Advanced Configuration and Power Interface (ACPI) power management settings for your system.

NUMA Support (Available when the OS supports this feature)

Select Enabled to enable Non-Uniform Memory Access support to enhance system performance. The options are Enabled and Disabled.

WHEA Support

Select Enabled to support the Windows Hardware Error Architecture (WHEA) platform and provide a common infrastructure for the system to handle hardware errors within the Windows OS environment to reduce system crashes and to enhance system recovery and health monitoring. The options are Enabled and Disabled.

High Precision Timer

Select Enabled to activate the High Precision Event Timer (HPET) that produces periodic interrupts at a much higher frequency than a Real-time Clock (RTC) does in synchronizing multimedia streams, providing smooth playback and reducing the dependency on other timestamp calculation devices, such as an x86 RDTSC Instruction embedded in the CPU. The High Performance Event Timer is used to replace the 8254 Programmable Interval Timer. The options are Enabled and Disabled.

▶Trusted Computing (Available when a TPM device is installed and detected by the BIOS)

When a TPM (Trusted-Platform Module) device is detected in your machine, the following information will be displayed.

• TPM2.0 Device Found
• Firmware Version
• Vendor

Aptio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc. Advanced Configuration Security Device Support [Enable] NO Security Device Found Enables or Disables BIOS support for security device. O.S. will not show Security Device, TOG EF1 protocol and INTIA Interface will not be available. +F: Select Screen T#: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Oct. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESC: Exit Version 2.20.1274. Copyright (C) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc.

Security Device Support

If this feature and the TPM jumper (JPT1) on the motherboard are both enabled, the onboard security (TPM) device will be enabled in the BIOS to enhance data integrity and system security. Please note that the OS will not show the security device. Neither TCG EFI protocol nor INT1A interaction will be made available for use. If you have made changes on the setting on this item, be sure to reboot the system for the change to take effect. The options are Disable and Enable. If this option is set to Enable, the following screen and items will display:

• Active PCR Banks
• Available PCR Banks

SHA-1 PCR Bank

Select Enabled to enable SHA-1 PCR Bank support to enhance system security and data integrity. The options are Enabled and Disabled.

SHA256 PCR Bank

Select Enabled to enable SHA256 PCR Bank support to enhance system security and data integrity. The options are Enabled and Disabled.

Pending Operation

Use this feature to schedule a TPM-related operation to be performed by a security (TPM) device at the next system boot to enhance system data integrity. Your system will reboot to carry out a pending TPM operation. The options are None and TPM Clear.

Note: Your system will reboot to carry out a pending TPM operation.

Platform Hierarchy (for TPM Version 2.0 and above)

Select Enabled for TPM Platform Hierarchy support which will allow the manufacturer to utilize the cryptographic algorithm to define a constant key or a fixed set of keys to be used for initial system boot. These early boot codes are shipped with the platform and are included in the list of "public keys". During system boot, the platform firmware uses the trusted public keys to verify a digital signature in an attempt to manage and control the security of the platform firmware used in a host system via a TPM device. The options are Enabled and Disabled.

Storage Hierarchy

Select Enabled for TPM Storage Hierarchy support that is intended to be used for non-privacy-sensitive operations by the platform owner such as an IT professional or the end-user. Storage Hierarchy has an owner policy and an authorization value, both of which can be set and are held constant (-rarely changed) through reboots. This hierarchy can be cleared or changed independently of the other hierarchies. The options are Enabled and Disabled.

Endorsement Hierarchy

Select Enabled for Endorsement Hierarchy support, which contains separate controls to address the user's privacy concerns because the primary keys in this hierarchy are certified by the TPM or a manufacturer to be constrained to an authentic TPM device that is attached to an authentic platform. A primary key can be encrypted, and a certificate can be created using TPM2_ActivateCredential. It allows the user to independently enable "flag, policy, and authorization value" without involving other hierarchies. A user with privacy concerns can disable the endorsement hierarchy while still using the storage hierarchy for TPM applications and permitting the platform software to use the TPM. The options are Enabled and Disabled.

PH (Platform Hierarchy) Randomization (for TPM Version 2.0 and above)

Select Enabled for Platform Hierarchy Randomization support, which is used only during the platform developmental stage. This feature cannot be enabled in the production platforms. The options are Disabled and Enabled.

TXT Support

Select Enabled to enable Intel Trusted Execution Technology (TXT) support to enhance system security and data integrity. The options are Disabled and Enabled.

Note 1: If the option for this item (TXT Support) is set to Enabled, be sure to disable EV DFX (Device Function On-Hide) support for the system to work properly. (EV DFX is under "IIO Configuration" in the "Chipset/North Bridge" submenu).

Note 2: For more information on TPM, please refer to the TPM manual at http://www.supermicro.com/manuals/other.

▶TLS Authenticate Configuration

When this submenu is selected, the following items will be displayed:

▶Server CA Configuration

This feature allows the user to configure the client certificate that is to be used by the server.

▶Enroll Certification

This feature allows the user to enroll the certificate in the system.

▶Enroll Cert (Certification) Using File

This feature allows the user to enroll the security certificate in the system by using a file.

Cert (Certification) GUID (Global Unique Identifier)

This feature displays the GUID for this system.

▶Commit Changes and Exit

Select this feature to keep the changes you have made and exit from the system.

▶Discard Changes and Exit

Select this feature to discard the changes you have made and exit from the system.

▶Delete Certification

If this feature is set to Enable, the certificate enrolled in the system will be deleted. The options are Enable and Disable.

▶iSCSI Configuration

When this submenu is selected, the user may configure the iSCSI parameters.

▶iSCSI Initiator Name

Use this feature to give the worldwide unique name of the iSCSI Initiator. Only IQN format is accepted. The range is from 4 to 223.

▶Driver Health

This feature provides the health status for the drivers/controllers.

▶RAM Disk Configuration

This feature allows the user to configure the settings for the RAM disks installed in the system. When you select this submenu and press , the following items will display:

- Disk Memory Type: This feature specifies the type of memory that is available for you to create a RAM disk. The options are Boot Service Data and Reserved.

▶ Create Raw

This feature allows the user to create a raw RAM disk from all available memory modules in the system. When you select this submenu and press , the following items will display:

• Size (Hex): Use this feature to set the size of the raw RAM disk. The default setting is 1.
• Create & Exit: Select this feature when you want to exit from this submenu after you've created a raw RAM disk.
• Discard & Exit: Select this feature when you want to abandon the changes you've made and to exit from the submenu.

▶ Create from File

This feature allows the user to create a RAM disk from a file specified by the user. Select this submenu and press , the following items will display:

• Create RAM Disk List: Use this feature to create a RAM disk list.
• Remove Selected RAM Disk(s): Use this feature to delete the RAM disk(s) specified by the user.

Intel® Optane® DC Persistent Memory Configuration

When you select this submenu and press , the following screen will display:

• Version: This feature displays the version of DCPMM used in the system.
• Select an action below
• Detected DIMMs: This feature displays the number of DCPMM memory modules detected by the BOS.
• All DIMMs are healthy (The health status of the DCPMM is displayed.)

Antio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc. Intel(R) Optane(TM) DC Persistent Memory Configuration Version: 1.0.0.3393 Select an action below. Detected DIMMs: All DIMMs are healthy. ► DIMMs ► Regions ► Namespaces ► Total capacity ► Diagnostics ► Preferences Detected DIMMs: ++: Select Screen T↓: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESC: Exit Version 2.20.1274. Copyright (C) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc.

DIMMs

This submenu allows the user to view and configure the settings of the DCPMM memory modules installed in the system. Select this submenu and press , the following items will display:

• Select a specific DIMM that you want to view.
  • DIMMs on Socket 0x0000:
  • DIMMs on Socket 0x0001:

▶ DIMM ID

This submenu allows the user to view and to perform an action on a DCPMM module specified by the user. When this submenu is selected, the following items will display:

- DIMM UID: This feature displays the unique ID of the DCPMM module.

• DIMM Handle: This feature displays the unique handle that the CPU assigns to the DCPMM module.
• DIMM Physical ID: This feature displays the physical ID of the DCPMM module.
• Manageability State: This feature indicates the manageability state of the DCPMM module.
  • Health State: This feature indicates the health state of the DCPMM module.
• Health State Reason: This feature indicates the reason that effectuates the health state of the DCPMM module.
• Capacity: This feature indicates the capacity of the DCPMM module.
• Firmware Version: This feature indicates the firmware version of the DCPMM module.
• Firmware API Version: This feature indicates the firmware API version of the DCPMM module.
• Lock State: This feature indicates the lock state of the DCPMM module.
• Staged Firmware Version: This feature indicates the staged firmware version of the DCPMM module.
• Firmware Update Status: This feature indicates the firmware update status of the DCPMM module.
• Manufacturer: This feature indicates the manufacturer of the DCPMM module.

Show More Details

Select Enabled to view more detailed information on the DCPMM module. The options are Disabled and Enabled.

*If this option is set to Enabled, the following items will display:

• Serial Number
• Part Number
• Socket
  • Memory Controller ID
• Vendor ID
• Device ID
• System Vendor ID
• Subsystem Vendor ID

• Subsystem Device ID

• Device Locator

• Subsystem Revision ID
  • Interface Format Code
  • Manufacturing Information Valid
  • Manufacturing Date
  • Manufacturing Location
• Memory Type
  • Memory Bank Label
  • Data Width Label [b]
• Total Width [b]
• Speed [MHz]
• Channel ID
• Channel Position
• Revision ID
• Form Factor
• Manufacturer ID
  • Controller Revision ID
• IS New
• Memory Capacity
• APP Direct Capacity
  • Unconfigured Capacity
• Inaccessible Capacity
• Reserved Capacity
  • Peak Power Budget [mW]

• Avg (Average) Power Budget [mW]
• Max Average Power Budget [mW]
• Package Sparing Capable
• Package Sparing Enabled
• Package Spares Available
- Configuration Status
- SKU Violation
- ARS Status
• Overwrite DIMM Status
- Last Shutdown Time
- First Fast Refresh
- Viral Policy Enable
- Viral State
- Latched Last Shutdown Status
- Unlatched Last Shutdown Status
• Security Capabilities
- Modes Supported
- Boot Status
- AIT DRAM Enabled
- Error Injection Enabled
• Media Temperature Injection Enabled
- Software Triggers Enabled
- Software Triggers Enabled Details
• Poison Error Injections Counter
- Poison Error Clear Counter

• Media Temperature Injections Counter
- Software Triggers Counter
• Master Passphrase Enabled

▶Monitor Health

Select this submenu to view the health status and thresholds of the DCPMM module specified by the user.

• Sensor Type: This feature displays the type of health items that are being monitored.
• Value: This feature displays the value of the monitor sensor mentioned above.
• Non-critical Thresholds: This feature displays the normal threshold value for the DCPMM module to maintain normal operations.
• Critical Lower Threshold: This feature displays the lowest threshold value for the DCPMM module to maintain normal operations.
• Critical Upper Threshold: This feature displays a higher threshold value for the DCPMM module to maintain normal operations.
• Fatal Threshold: This feature indicates the highest value allowed for the DCPMM module to remain functional. Beyond this value, the DCPMM selected will become non-operational.
  • State: This feature indicates the health state of the DCPMM module.
• Alarm Enabled State: This feature indicates the status of the non-critical threshold alarm for the DCPMM module specified by the user.
• Modify Non-critical Thresholds: Use this feature to modify non-critical thresholds.
• Controller Temperature: This feature displays the controller temperature in Celsius.
  • Media Temperature: This feature displays the media temperature in Celsius.
  • Percentage Remaining

▶Apply Changes

Use this feature to apply changes that you've made on the DCPMM modules to the system.

▶Back to Main Menu

Select this feature and press to go back to the Intel® Optane® DC Persistent Memory Configuration menu.

▶Update Firmware

Use this feature to select the firmware image to be loaded on the DCPMM module. Once it is loaded to the system, please reboot the system and select the update for the firmware to take effect. The following items will display:

• Current Firmware Version: This feature displays the current firmware version.
• Selected Firmware Version: This feature allows the user to select a new firmware version to use.
• File: This feature allows the user to specify the file path in the root directory that contains the new firmware for firmware updates.
• Staged Firmware Version: This feature indicates the staged firmware version of the DCPMM module specified by the user.

▶Update

Select this feature to update the firmware settings.

▶Back to Main Menu

Select this feature and press to go back to the Intel® Optane® DC Persistent Memory Configuration menu.

▶Configure Security

Use this feature to configure the security settings for all onboard DCPMM modules.

State

Select Enabled to configure the security settings for the DCPMM modules installed in the system. The options are Disabled and Enabled.

• Enable Security: Use this feature to enable security settings for the onboard DCPMM modules.
• Secure Erase: Use this feature to erase all the persistent data saved in the DCPMM modules.
• Freeze Lock: Use this feature to enable the security lock for the onboard DCPMM modules.

▶Back to Main Menu

- Select this feature and press to go back to the Intel® Optane® DC Persistent Memory Configuration menu.

▶Configure Data Policy

Use this feature to configure the data policy settings for all onboard DCPMM modules.

First Fast Fresh State

Select Enabled to display the First Fast Fresh state for onboard DCPMM modules.

▶Enable First Fast Fresh State

Select Enabled to support the first fast fresh state of DCPMM data policy.

▶Disable First Fast Fresh State

Select Disable to disable the first fast fresh state of DCPMM data policy.

▶Back to Main Menu

Select this feature and press to go back to the Intel® Optane® DC Persistent Memory Configuration menu.

▶Regions

Current Configuration

▶Region ID

When this submenu is selected, the following items will display:

• Region ID: This feature displays the Region ID of the DCPMM module.
• DIMM ID: This feature displays the DIMM ID of the DCPMM module.
• ISet ID: This feature displays the ISet ID of the DCPMM module.
• Persistent Memory Type: This feature indicates the persistent memory type of the DCPMM module.
• Capacity: This feature indicates the capacity of the DCPMM module.
• Free Capacity: This feature indicates the capacity of the DCPMM module that is available for use.
  • Health: This feature indicates the health state of the DCPMM module.
• Socket ID: This feature displays the Socket ID of the DCPMM module.

Persistent Memory Type

Capacity

Free Capacity

▶Create Goal Configuration

When this submenu is selected, the following items will display:

• Create Goal Configuration for: Use this feature to select the target to create goal configuration for the DCPMM modules. The options are Platform and Socket.
• Reserved [%]: Use this feature to reserve a percentage of the DCPMM capacity for a particular purpose and keep this portion of memory space from being mapped into the physical address of the system for system use.
• Memory Mode [%]: Use this feature to reserve a percentage of the DCPMM capacity for special use in a specific Memory Mode. Please note that this value can be automatically set by the system.

Persistent Memory Type

This feature allows the user to specify the type of DCPMM memory capacity to be created.

The options are App Direct and App Direct Not Interleave.

Namespace Label Version

Use this feature to view and modify the namespace label version to initialize when creating goals. The options are 1.2 and 1.1.

▶Back to Regions Menu

Select this feature and press to go back to the Regions submenu.

▶Back to Main Menu

Select this feature and press to go back to the Intel® Optane® DC Persistent Memory Configuration menu.

▶Namespaces

This subsection allows the user to select a namespace to view the following information on the selected namespace

Namespace ID/Name/Heath Status

▶0x00000201

Select this feature and press , the following items will display:

• UUID
  • ID
• Name
• Region
• Health
• Mode
• Block Size
• Units: Use this feature to change the namespace capacity (in the unit of B, MB, MiB, GB, GiB, TB, and TiB.)
• Capacity
• Label Version

▶Save: After configuring the settings for the namespace above, click on to save changes.

▶Delete After configuring the settings for the namespace above, click on to delete the changes you've made on the namespace. Please note that all data contained in the namespace will be deleted as well when you press .
▶Back to Namespaces
▶Back to Main Menu

▶Create Namespace

Use this submenu to create a namespace. The following information will display:

Name

Region ID

This feature displays the region ID of the DCPMM module. The options are 0x0001 and 0x0002.

Mode

Use this item to set the Namespace mode. The options are None and Sector.

Capacity Input

Select Remaining to use the maximum memory capacity currently available as system memory capacity. Select Manual to enter the system memory capacity manually. The options are Remaining and Manual.

Units

Use this feature to select the type of unit to use when inputting namespace capacity in the system.

The options are B, MB, MiB, GB, GiB, TB, and TiB.

- Capacity: This feature displays the namespace capacity.

▶Back to Namespace

Select this feature and press to go back to the Namespaces submenu.

▶Back to Main Menu

Select this feature and press to go back to the Intel® Optane® DC Persistent Memory Configuration menu.

▶Total Capacity

This feature allows the user to set the total DCPMM resource capacity allocated across all segments in the host server.

• Raw Capacity: This feature specifies the raw capacity of the DCPMM module.
• App. Direct Capacity: This feature specifies the App. direct capacity of the DCPMM module.
• Memory Capacity: This feature specifies the memory capacity of the DCPMM module.
• Unconfigured Capacity: This feature specifies the capacity of the DCPMM module that has not been configured.
• Inaccessible Capacity: This feature specifies the capacity of the DCPMM memory that is not accessible to the user.
• Reserved Capacity: This feature specifies the capacity of the DCPMM memory that is reserved for a particular use.

▶Back to Main Menu

Select this feature and press to go back to the Intel® Optane® DC Persistent Memory Configuration menu.

▶ Diagnostics

Perform Diagnostic Tests on DIMMs

When you select this submenu and press , the following items will display:

Choose Diagnostics Type:

Quick Diagnostics

Select Enabled for the quick diagnostics test to be performed on the DCPMM module installed in the system when needed. The options are Enabled and Disabled.

DIMM ID

Select Enabled for the quick diagnostics test to be performed on the DCPMM module. The options are Enabled and Disabled. (Note: More DIMM IDs will appear If more DCPMM modules are installed on the motherboard.)

Config (Configure) Diagnostics

Select Enabled for the platform configuration diagnostics test to be performed on the DCPMM module. The options are Enabled and Disabled.

FW (Firmware) Diagnostics

Select Enabled for the firmware diagnostics test to be performed on the DCPMM module. The options are Enabled and Disabled.

Security Diagnostics

Select Enabled for the security diagnostics test to be performed on the DCPMM module. The options are Enabled and Disabled.

▶ Execute Tests

Select this feature and press to execute the selected diagnostic tests.

▶Back to Main Menu

Select this feature and press to go back to the Intel® Optane® DC Persistent Memory Configuration menu.

▶Preferences

View and/or modify user preferences

Default DIMM ID

This feature allows the user to view and to modify the default DIMM ID as displayed on the screen. The options are Handle and UID.

Capacity Units

This feature allows the user to view and to set the default capacity unit of the selected DCPMM to be displayed on the screen. The options are Auto, Auto_10, B, MB, MiB, GB, GiB, TB, and TiB.

App Direct Settings

This feature displays the Application Direct Settings. The default setting is 4KB_4KB (Recommended).

App Direct Granularity

This feature allows the user to view and modify the minimum App Direct Granularity for each DIMM installed on the motherboard. The default setting is Recommended and 1.

▶Back to Main Menu

Use this feature to go back to the Intel® Optane® DC Persistent Memory Configuration menu.

4.4 Event Logs

Use this feature to configure Event Log settings.

Note: After you've made a change on a setting below, please be sure to reboot the system for the change to take effect.

Auto Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc. Main Advanced Event Logs IPMI Security Boot Save & Exit Change SHBIOS Event Log Settings View SHBIOS Event Log Press to change the SHBIOS Event Log configuration. +: Select Screen T4: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESC: Exit Version 2.20.1275. Copyright (C) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc.

▶Change SMBIOS Event Log Settings

Enabling/Disabling Options

SMBIOS Event Log

Select Enabled to enable SMBIOS (System Management BIOS) Event Logging during system boot. The options are Enabled and Disabled.

Erasing Settings

Erase Event Log

Select "No" to keep the event log without erasing it upon the next system bootup. Select "Yes, Next Reset" to erase the event log upon the next system reboot. The options are "No", "Yes, Next Reset", and "Yes, Every Reset".

When Log is Full

Select Erase Immediately to immediately erase all errors in the SMBIOS event log when the event log is full. Select Do Nothing for the system to do nothing when the SMBIOS event log is full. The options are Do Nothing and Erase Immediately.

SMBIOS Event Log Standard Settings

Log System Boot Event

Select Enabled to log system boot events. The options are Enabled and Disabled.

MECI (Multiple Event Count Increment)

Enter the increment value for the multiple event counter. Enter a number between 1 to 255. The default setting is 1.

METW (Multiple Event Count Time Window)

This feature is used to determine how long (in minutes) should the multiple event counter wait before generating a new event log. Enter a number between 0 to 99. The default setting is 60.

▶View System Event Log

This feature allows the user to view the event in the system event log. Select this item and press to view the status of an event in the log. The following categories are displayed: Date/Time/Error Code/Severity

4.5 IPMI

Use this feature to configure the Intelligent Platform Management Interface (IPMI) settings.

Aptio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc. Main Advanced Event Loss IPMI Security Boot Save & Exit BMC Firmware Revision 1.70.00 IPMI STATUS Working ► System Event Log ► BMC Network Configuration Press to change the SEL event log configuration. +: Select Screen ↑↓: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESC: Exit Version 2.50.1275. Copyright (C) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc.

When you select this submenu and press the key, the following information will display:

• BMC Firmware Revision: This feature indicates the BMC firmware revision used in your system.
• Status of IPMI: This feature indicates the status of the IPMI installed in your system.

▶System Event Log

Enabling/Disabling Options

SEL Components

Select Enabled to enable all system event logging upon system boot. The options are Enabled and Disabled.

Erasing Settings

Erase SEL

Select "Yes, On next reset" to erase all system event logs upon the next system boot. Select "Yes, On every reset" to erase all system event logs upon each system reboot. Select "No" to keep all system event logs after each system reboot. The options are "No", "Yes, On next reset", and "Yes, On every reset".

When SEL is Full

This feature allows the user to determine what the BIOS should do when the system event log is full. Select Erase Immediately to erase all events in the log when the system event log is full. The options are Do Nothing and Erase Immediately.

▶BMC Network Configuration

The following items will be displayed:

• Update IPMI LAN Configuration: Select Yes for the BIOS to implement all IP/MAC address changes upon the next system boot. The options are No and Yes. If this option is set to Yes, the following items will display:
• IPMI LAN Selection: This feature displays the IPMI LAN setting. The default setting is Failover.
• IPMI Network Link Status: This feature displays the IPMI Network Link status. The default setting is Dedicated LAN.
• Station IP Address: This feature displays the Station IP address for this computer. This should be in decimal and in the dotted quad form (i.e., 192.168.10.253).
• Subnet Mask: This feature displays the sub-network that this computer belongs to. The value of each three-digit number separated by dots should not exceed 255.
• Station MAC Address: This feature displays the Station MAC address for this computer. Mac addresses are 6 two-digit hexadecimal numbers.
• Gateway IP Address: This feature displays the Gateway IP address for this computer. This should be in decimal and in dotted quad form (i.e., 192.168.10.253).
• VLAN: This feature displays the status of VLAN support. The default setting is Disabled.
• IPv6 Address Status: This feature displays the IPv6 address status. The default setting is Enabled.
• IPv6 Support: The default status is Enabled.
• Station IPv6 Address: This feature displays the station IPv6 address.
• Prefix Length: This item displays the prefix length.
• IPv6 Router IP Address: This feature displays the IPv6 router IP address.

Update IPMI LAN Configuration

Select Yes for the BIOS to implement all IP/MAC address changes upon the next system boot. The options are No and Yes. If this option is set to Yes, the following items will display:

IPMI LAN Selection (Available when Update IPMI LAN Configuration is set to Yes)

Use this feature to select the type of the IPMI LAN. The options are Dedicated, Shared, and Failover.

VLAN

Select Enabled to enable IPMI VLAN function support. The default setting is Disabled.

Configuration Address Source (Available for Configure IPv4 Support and Configure IPv6 Support)

Use this feature to select the IP address source for this computer. If Static is selected, you will need to know the IP address of this computer and enter it to the system manually in the field. If DHCP is selected, AMI BIOS will search for a DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) server attached to the network and request the next available IP address for this computer. The options are DHCP and Static.

IPv6 Support: Select Enabled for IPv6 support. The options are Enabled, and Disabled. If this option is set to Enabled, the following item will display:

Configuration Address Source: Use this feature to select the IP address source for this computer. If Static is selected, you will need to know the IP address of this computer and enter it to the system manually in the field. If DHCP is selected, AMI BIOS will search for a DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) server attached to the network and request the next available IP address for this computer. The options are DHCP and Static

4.6 Security Settings

This menu allows the user to configure the following security settings for the system.

Aptio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc. Main Advanced Event Logs IP&I Security Boot Save & Exit Administrator Password Not Installed User Password Not Installed Password Description If the Administrator's / User's password is set, then this only limits access to Setup and is asked for when entering Setup. Please set Administrator's password first in order to set User's password, if clear Administrator's password, the User's password will be cleared as well. The password length must be in the following range: Minimum length 3 Maximum length 20 Administrator Password Password Check [Setup] ▶ Secure Boot Set Administrator Password +: Select Screen T4: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESC: Exit Version 2.20.1275. Copyright (C) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc.

Administrator Password

Use this feature to set the administrator password which is required to enter the BIOS setup utility. The length of the password should be from 3 characters to 20 characters long.

Password Check

Select Setup for the system to check for a password at Setup. Select Always for the system to check for a password at system boot and upon entering the BIOS Setup utility. The options are Setup and Always.

▶Secure Boot

When you select this submenu and press the key, the following items will display:

- System Mode

Secure Boot

Select Enabled to use Secure Boot settings. The options are Enabled and Disabled.

Secure Boot Mode

Use this feature to select the desired secure boot mode for the system. The options are Standard and Custom.

CMS Support

If this feature is set to Enabled, legacy devices will be supported by the system. The options are Enabled and Disabled.

Vendor Keys

Factory Key Provision

Select Yes to install manufacturer default keys for system security use. The options are Enabled and Disabled.

Select Yes to restore manufacturer default keys used to ensure system security. The options are Yes and No.

▶Reset to Setup Mode

Select Yes to reset the system to the Setup Mode. The options are Yes and No.

Select Yes to restore all manufacturer default keys for system security use. The options are Yes and No.

▶Reset to Setup Mode

This feature resets the system to Setup Mode.

▶Export Secure Boot Variables

This feature is used to copy the NVRAM content of Secure Boot variables to a storage device.

▶Enroll EFI Image

Select this feature and press to specify an EFI (Extensible Firmware Interface) image for the system to use when it operates in the Secure Boot mode.

Device Guard Ready

▶Remove 'UEFI CA' from DB

Select Yes to remove UEFI CA from the database. The options are Yes and No.

Select Yes to restore database variables to the manufacturer default settings. The options are Yes and No.

Secure Boot Variable/Size/Keys/Key Source

▶Platform Key (PK)

This feature allows the user to enter and configure a set of values to be used as platform firmware keys for the system. The sizes, keys numbers, and key sources of the platform keys will be indicated as well. Select Update to update the platform key.

▶Key Exchange Keys

This feature allows the user to enter and configure a set of values to be used as Key-Exchange-Keys for the system. The sizes, keys numbers, and key sources of the Key-Exchange-Keys will be indicated as well. Select Update to update your "Key Exchange Keys". Select Append to append your "Key Exchange Keys".

▶Authorized Signatures

This feature allows the user to enter and configure a set of values to be used as Authorized Signatures for the system. These values also indicate the sizes, keys numbers, and the sources of the authorized signatures. Select Update to update your "Authorized Signatures". Select Append to append your "Authorized Signatures". The settings are Details, Export, Update, Append, and Delete.

▶Forbidden Signatures

This feature allows the user to enter and configure a set of values to be used as Forbidden Signatures for the system. These values also indicate sizes, keys numbers, and key sources of the forbidden signatures. Select Update to update your "Forbidden Signatures". Select

Append to append your "Forbidden Signatures". The settings are Details, Export, Update, Append, and Delete.

▶Authorized TimeStamps

This feature allows the user to set and save the timestamps for the authorized signatures which will indicate the time when these signatures are entered into the system. Select Update to update your "Authorized TimeStamps". Select Append to append your "Authorized TimeStamps". The settings are Update and Append.

▶Os Recovery Signatures

This feature allows the user to set and save the authorized signatures used for OS recovery. Select Update to update your "OS Recovery Signatures". Select Append to append your "OS Recovery Signatures". The settings are Update and Append.

4.7 Boot Settings

Use this feature to configure Boot Settings:

Antio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American Negatrends, Inc. Main Advanced Event Logs IP&E Security Boot Save & Exit Boot Configuration Boot mode select [DUAL] LEGACY TO EFI support [Disabled] FIXED BOOT ORDER Priorities Boot Option #1 [Hard Disk] Boot Option #2 [CD/DVD] Boot Option #3 [USB Hard Disk] Boot Option #4 [USB CD/DVD] Boot Option #5 [USB Key] Boot Option #6 [USB Floppy] Boot Option #7 [USB Lan] Boot Option #8 [Network: IBA XE Slot] 1000 v2419 Boot Option #9 [UEFI Hard Disk] Boot Option #10 [UEFI CD/DVD] Boot Option #11 [UEFI USB Hard Disk] Boot Option #12 [UEFI USB CD/DVD] Boot Option #13 [UEFI USB Key] Boot Option #14 [UEFI USB Floppy] Boot Option #15 [UEFI USB Lan] Boot Option #16 [UEFI Network] Boot Option #17 [UEFI AP:UEFI: Built-in EFI Shell] Select boot mode LEGACY/UEFI #: Select Screen #: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESC: Exit Version 2.20.1275. Copyright (C) 2019 American Negatrends, Inc.

Boot Mode Select

Use this feature to select the type of devices from which the system will boot. The options are Legacy, UEFI (Unified Extensible Firmware Interface), and Dual.

Legacy to EFI Support

Select Enabled for the system to boot from an EFI OS when the Legacy OS fails. The options are Enabled and Disabled.

Fixed Boot Order Priorities

This feature prioritizes the order of a bootable device from which the system will boot. Press on each item sequentially to select devices.

When the item above - "Boot Mode Select" is set to Dual (default), the following items will be displayed for the user's configuration:

- Boot Option #1 - Boot Option #17

When the item above - "Boot Mode Select" is set to Legacy, the following items will be displayed for configuration:

• Boot Option #1 - Boot Option #8

When the item above - "Boot Mode Select" is set to UEFI, the following items will be displayed for configuration:

- Boot Option #1 - Boot Option #9

▶ Delete Boot Option

Use this feature to select a boot device to delete from the boot priority list.

Delete Boot Option

Use this feature to remove an EFI boot option from the boot priority list.

▶UEFI Application Boot Priorities

- UEFI Boot Order # - This feature sets the system boot order of detected devices. The options are UEFI: Built-in EFI Shell and Disabled.

4.8 Save & Exit

Select the Save & Exit menu from the BIOS setup screen to configure the settings below.

Aptio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc. Main Advanced Event Logs IPM1 Security Boot Save & Exit Save Options Discard Changes and Exit Save Changes and Reset Save Changes Discard Changes Default Options Restore Optimized Defaults Save as User Defaults Restore User Defaults Boot Override IBA XE Slot 1800 v2419 UEFI: Built-in EFI Shell Launch EFI Shell from filesystem device Restore the User Defaults to all the setup options. +: Select Screen T↓: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESC: Exit Version 2.20.1275. Copyright (C) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc.

Save Options

Discard Changes and Exit

Select this option to exit from the BIOS setup utility without making any permanent changes to the system configuration and reboot the computer.

Save Changes and Reset

When you have completed the system configuration changes, select this option to leave the BIOS setup utility and reboot the computer for the new system configuration parameters to become effective.

Save Changes

When you have completed the system configuration changes, select this option to save all changes made. This will not reset (reboot) the system.

Discard Changes

Select this option and press to discard all the changes you've made and return to the AMI BIOS setup utility.

Default Options

Restore Optimized Defaults

To set this feature, select Restore Defaults from the Exit menu and press to load manufacturer default settings which are intended for maximum system performance but not for maximum stability.

Save As User Defaults

To set this feature, select Save as User Defaults from the Exit menu and press . This enables the user to save all changes to the BIOS setup for future use.

To set this feature, select Restore User Defaults from the Exit menu and press . Use this feature to retrieve user-defined default settings that were saved previously.

Boot Override

This feature allows the user to override the Boot priorities sequence in the Boot menu, and immediately boot the system with a device specified by the user instead of the one specified in the boot list. This is a one-time override.

Boot Override

IBA GE Slot 3300 v1572

Use this feature to save the configurations for IBA GE Slot 3300 v1572.

UEFI: Built-in EFI Shell

Use this feature to save the configurations for UEFI: Built-in EFI Shell.

Launch EFI Shell from filesystem device

Use this feature to save the configurations for Launch EFI Shell from filesystem device.

Appendix A

BIOS Codes

A.1 BIOS Error POST (Beep) Codes

Note: For BIOS beep codes to work properly, please connect an optional external speaker to the speaker/buzzer header located at JD1. Please refer to Chapter 2 for more information on JD1.

During the POST (Power-On Self-Test) process, which is performed at boot up, system errors may be detected.

Non-fatal errors are those which, in most cases, allow the system to continue with the boot-up process. The error messages normally appear on the screen.

Fatal errors are those which will not allow the system to continue to boot up. If a fatal error occurs, you should consult with your system manufacturer for possible repairs.

The fatal errors are usually communicated through repeated patterns of audible beeps. Each pattern of audible beeps listed below corresponds to its respective error.

BIOS Beep (POST) Codes
Beep Code Error	Message Description
1 beep Refresh Circuits have been reset (Ready to power up)
5 short, 1 long Memory error No memory detected in system
5 long, 2 short Display memory read/write error Video adapter missing or with faulty memory
1 long continuous System OH System overheat condition

A.2 Additional BIOS POST Codes

The AMI BIOS supplies additional checkpoint codes, which are documented online at http://www.supermicro.com/support/manuals/ ("AMI BIOS POST Codes User's Guide").

When BIOS performs the Power On Self Test, it writes checkpoint codes to I/O port 0080h. If the computer cannot complete the boot process, a diagnostic card can be attached to the computer to read I/O port 0080h (Supermicro p/n AOC-LPC80-20).

For information on AMI updates, please refer to http://www.ami.com/products/.

Appendix B

Software Installation

B.1 Installing Software Programs

The Supermicro website that contains drivers and utilities for your system is located at http://www.supermicro.com/wftp. Some of these must be installed, such as the chipset driver.

After accessing the product drivers and utilities page, go into the CDR_Images directory and locate the ISO file for your motherboard. Download this file to create a DVD of the drivers and utilities it contains. (You may also use a utility to extract the ISO file if preferred.)

After creating a DVD with the ISO files, insert the disk into the DVD drive on your system and the display shown in Figure B-1 should appear.

Another option is to go to the Supermicro website at http://www.supermicro.com/products/. Find the product page for your motherboard here, where you may download individual drivers and utilities to your hard drive or a USB flash drive and install from our website at http://www.supermicro.com/support/manuals/.

SUPERMICRO X11DPU-Z+ Motherboard Drivers & Tools (Win7) SUPERMICRO Drivers & Tools Intel C620 Chipset X11DPU-Z+ SUPERMICRO Computer Inc. Intel Chipset INF filos Microsoft .Net Framework 4.5.2 (Optional) ASPEED Graphics Driver Intel Rapid Storage Technology Enterprise Intel USB 3.0 Drivers Intel PRO Network Connections Drivers SUPERMICRO SuperDoctor 5 Build driver diskettes and manuals Browse CD Auto Start Up Next Time For more information, please visit SUPERMICRO's web site.

Figure B-1. Driver/Tool Installation Display Screen

Click the icons showing a hand writing on the paper to view the readme files for each item. Click a computer icon to the right of an item to install an item (from top to the bottom) one at a time. After installing each item, you must reboot the system before proceeding with the next item on the list. The bottom icon with a DVD on it allows you to view the entire contents of the DVD.

When making a storage driver diskette by booting into a driver DVD, please set the SATA Configuration to "Compatible Mode" and configure SATA as IDE in the BIOS. After making the driver diskette, be sure to change the SATA settings back to your original settings.

B.2 SuperDoctor® 5

The Supermicro SuperDoctor 5 is a hardware monitoring program that functions in a command-line or web-based interface in Windows and Linux operating systems. The program monitors system health information such as CPU temperature, system voltages, system power consumption, fan speed, and provides alerts via email or Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP).

SuperDoctor 5 comes in local and remote management versions and can be used with Nagios to maximize your system monitoring needs. With SuperDoctor 5 Management Server (SSM Server), you can remotely control power on/off and reset chassis intrusion for multiple systems with SuperDoctor 5 or IPMI. SD5 Management Server monitors HTTP and SMTP services to optimize the efficiency of your operation.

Note: The default Username and Password for SuperDoctor 5 is ADMIN / ADMIN.

SuperDollar 5 Switch Info User: 123400000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 Motherboard: XSDTU-LHA* Fan Speed 1.84 2.64 3.76 4.98 5.24 6.56 7.88 9.24 11.54 13.76 15.98 18.24 21.56 24.88 27.16 31.44 34.76 38.12 42.34 45.66 49.98 53.24 56.56 59.88 63.16 66.44 69.76 73.12 76.34 79.66 83.98 87.24 91.56 94.88 98.16 101.44 104.76 108.12 111.34 114.56 117.88 121.16 124.34 127.66 131.98 135.24 139.56 143.88 147.16 151.34 154.56 158.98 162.24 165.56 169.88 173.16 176.34 179.56 183.98 187.24 191.56 194.88 198.12 201.34 204.56 207.88 211.16 214.34 217.56 221.98 225.24 228.56 232.98 236.24 239.56 243.88 247.16 251.34 254.56 257.88 261.16 264.34 267.56 271.98 275.24 279.56 283.98 287.24 291.56 294.88 298.12 301.34 304.56 307.88 311.16 314.34 317.56 321.98 325.24 328.56 332.98 336.24 339.56 343.88 347.16 351.34 354.56 357.88 361.16 364.34 367.56 371.98 375.24 379.56 383.98 387.24 391.56 394.88 398.12 401.34 404.56 407.88 411.16

Figure B-2. SuperDoctor 5 Interface Display Screen (Health Information)

Note: The SuperDoctor 5 program and user's manual can be downloaded from the Supermicro website at http://www.supermicro.com/products/nfo/sms_sd5.cfm.

B.3 Logging into the BMC (Baseboard Management Controller)

Supermicro ships standard products with a unique password for the BMC user. This password can be found on a label on the motherboard.

When logging in to the BMC for the first time, please use the unique password provided by Supermicro to log in. You can change the unique password to a user name and password of your choice for subsequent logins.

For more information regarding BMC passwords, please visit our website at http://www.supermicro.com/bmcpassword.

Appendix C

Standardized Warning Statements

The following statements are industry-standard warnings, provided to warn the user of situations where bodily injuries may occur. Should you have questions or experience difficulty, contact Supermicro's Technical Support department for assistance. Only certified technicians should attempt to install or configure components.

Read this section in its entirety before installing or configuring components.

These warnings may also be found on our website at http://www.supermicro.com/about/policies/safety_information.cfm.

Battery Handling

Warning! There is the danger of explosion if the battery is replaced incorrectly. Replace the battery only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer. Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturer's instructions

電池の取り扱い

Warning! Ultimate disposal of this product should be handled according to all national laws and regulations.

製品の廃棄

Warning: Do not upgrade the BIOS unless your system has a BIOS-related issue. Flashing the wrong BIOS can cause irreparable damage to the system. In no event shall Supermicro be liable for direct, indirect, special, incidental, or consequential damages arising from a BIOS update. If you need to update the BIOS, do not shut down or reset the system while the BIOS is updating to avoid possible boot failure.

D.1 Overview

The Unified Extensible Firmware Interface (UEFI) provides a software-based interface between the operating system and the platform firmware in the pre-boot environment. The UEFI specification supports an architecture-independent mechanism that will allow the UEFI OS loader stored in an external storage device to boot the system. The UEFI offers clean, hands-off management to a computer during system boot.

D.2 Recovering the UEFI BIOS Image

A UEFI BIOS flash chip consists of a recovery BIOS block and a main BIOS block (a main BIOS image). The recovery block contains critical BIOS codes, including memory detection and recovery codes for the user to flash a healthy BIOS image if the original main BIOS image is corrupted. When the system power is turned on, the recovery block codes execute first. Once this process is complete, the main BIOS code will continue with system initialization and the remaining POST (Power-On Self-Test) routines.

Note 1: Follow the BIOS recovery instructions in Section D.3 for BIOS recovery when the main BIOS block crashes.

Note 2: If the recovery instructions in Section D.3 for BIOS recovery fail, you may use the Supermicro Update Manager (SUM) Out-of-Band (OOB) (https://www.supermicro.com.tw/products/nfo/SMS_SUM.cfm) to reflash the BIOS.

Note 3: If the recovery block processes stated in Note 1 and Note 2 above fail, you will need to follow the procedures to make a Returned Merchandise Authorization (RMA) request. Refer to Section 3.5 for more information about the RMA request.

D.3 Recovering the Main BIOS Block with a USB Device

This feature allows the user to recover the main BIOS image using a USB-attached device without additional utilities used. A USB flash device such as a USB Flash Drive, or a USB CD/DVD ROM/RW device can be used for this purpose. However, a USB hard disk drive cannot be used for BIOS recovery at this time. The file system supported by the recovery block is FAT (including FAT12, FAT16, and FAT32) which is installed on a bootable or non-bootable USB-attached device.

To perform UEFI BIOS recovery using a USB-attached device, follow the instructions below.

1. Please use a different machine to download the BIOS package for your motherboard or your system from the product page available on our website at www.supermicro.com.
2. Extract the BIOS package to a USB device and rename the BIOS ROM file [BIOSname#.###] that is included in the BIOS package to SUPER.ROM for BIOS recovery use.
3. Copy the SUPER.ROM file into the Root "\" directory of the USB device.

Note: Before recovering the main BIOS image, confirm that the SUPER.ROM file you have is the same version or a close version meant for your motherboard.

1. Insert the USB device that contains the SUPER.ROM file into the system before you power on the system or when the following screen appears.

BMC IP:10.132.160.92 PEI--Could Not Find Recovery Image... 87

1. After locating the SUPER.ROM file, the system will enter the BIOS Recovery menu as shown below.

Option Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc. Main Advanced Event Loss IPM Recovery Security Back Save a Exit System booted from new image Partial update is not allowed Update Preservation [Unloaded] ▶ Processed with Flash update Set this option to preserve OneIOS +:- Select Screen II: Select Item Enter Select +/-: Change Opt. P1: General Help P2: Previous Values P3: Optimized Defaults P4: Save & Exit ESC: Exit Version 2.20.1276. Copyright (C) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc.

Note: At this point, you may decide if you want to start the BIOS recovery. If you decide to proceed with BIOS recovery, follow the procedures below.

1. When the screen as shown above displays, use the arrow keys to select the item "Proceed with flash update" and press the key. You will see the BIOS recovery progress as shown in the screen below.

Note: Do not interrupt the BIOS flashing process until it is complete.

Ratio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc. Recovery HAWARD System firmware is being updated. Keyboard is locked. DO NOT TURN THE POWER OFF 11 Once firmware update is completed press any key to reboot the system Flash Update updating main firmware -17% +: Select Screen T4: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save B Exit E3D: Exit Version 8.20.1876. Copyright (C) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc.

1. After the BIOS recovery process is complete, press any key to reboot the system.

Active Setup Utility - Copyright (CI) 2017 American Regatrends, Inc. Recovery MARENOST System firmware is being updated. Keyboard is locked. DO NOT TURN THE POWER OFF !!! Once firmware update is completed press any key to reboot the system Flash update Flash update completed. Press any key to reset the system #: Select Screen T4: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values- F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESC: Exit Version 2.19.1956. Copyright (C) 2017 American Regatrends, Inc.

Note: It is recommended that you update your BIOS after BIOS recovery. Please refer to Chapter 3 for BIOS update instructions.

1. Press during system boot to enter the BIOS Setup utility. From the top of the toolbar, select Boot to enter the submenu. From the submenu list, select Boot Option #1 as shown below. Then, set Boot Option #1 to [UEFI AP:UEFI: Built-in EFI Shell]. Press to save the settings and exit the BIOS Setup utility.

Boot Configuration Boot mode select LEGACY to EFI support FIXED BOOT ORDER Priorities Boot Option #1 Boot Option #2 Boot Option #3 Boot Option #4 Boot Option #5 Boot Option #6 Boot Option #7 Boot Option #8 Boot Option #9 Boot Option #10 Boot Option #11 Boot Option #12 Boot Option #13 Boot Option #14 Boot Option #15 Boot Option #16 Boot Option #17 Add New Boot Option [DOHL] [Disabled] [DEFI USB Hard Disk] [USB Hard Disk] [USB CD/DVD] [USB Key/SandDisk] [USB Floppy] [USB Lan] [Network: IBM GE SI...] [UEFI Hard Disk] [UEFI CD/DVD] [UEFI USB Hard Disk] [UEFI USB CD/DVD] [UEFI USB Key/UEFI...] [UEFI USB Floppy] [UEFI USB Lan] [UEFI Network] [Hard Disk] Sells the system boot order ++: Select Screen T4: Select Item Enteri Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESC: Exit Version 8.19.1266 Copyright (C) 2017 American Megarends, Inc.

1. When the UEFI Shell prompt appears, type fs# to change the device directory path. Go to the directory that contains the BIOS package you extracted earlier from Step 1. Enter flash.nsh BIOSname#.### at the prompt to start the BIOS update process.

UIFI Interactive Shell v2.1 ESK 11 UIFI v2.50 (American Regatrends, 0x00890XX) Mapping table F50: Kilo(0):H0D(0x0):BLK1: PcRoot(0x0)/Pc1(0x14,0x0)/USB(0x11,0x0):H01,HDR,0xG7901D2,0x806,0x1 CR3592) BLK0: Kilo(s): PcRoot(0x0)/Pc1(0x14,0x0)/USB(0x11,0x0) Press ESR to 1 seconds to skip startup.msh or any other key to continue. Shell F50 F50: VAFLOOS F50:VAFLOOS> cd SAPME2_0362012 F50:VAFLOOS:SAPME2_0362017\flash.msh X13P07.SX4

Note: Do not interrupt this process until the BIOS flashing is complete.

Done. [Access Oms Port Ex] Index 0x51: 0x18 Done. ********************************************************************** * Program BIOS and ME (including RDT) regions... ********************************************************************** AMI Firmware Update Utility v5.05.01.1317 Copyright ©2017 American Registrends Inc. All Rights Reserved. OPUD = 50692 Reading Flash ......... done - ME Data Size checking . ok - FFS checksums ......... Ok - Check BookLayout ......... Ok Erasing Boot Block ......... done Updating Boot Block ......... done Verifying Boot Block ......... done Zrading MainBlock ......... 0x00132009 (OK)

1. The screen above indicates that the BIOS update process has completed. Reboot the system when you see the screen below.

Verifying NCR Block ....... done - Update success for RSM - Update success for EE - - Successful Update Recovery Loader to (PRx!! - Successful Update MFSB!! - Successful Update FTR!! - Successful Update NFs, [081 and 19021] - Successful Update FLOD and UTOX!! - ME entire (new update success !!) wRVRNC : System must power-sft to have the changes take effect! Moving F501:AFUDDOS/SKJPME2_03162037/40x64,efi -> F501:AFUDDOS/SKJPME2_03162017/f df.sac - [cA] Moving F501:AFUDDOS/SKJPME2_03162037/aufemfix4,efi -> F501:AFUDDOS/SKJPME2_0316201 ?afuemfix.sac - [cA] ********************************************************************** * * Please ignore this 'shell cannot read from file - device error' * Warning message due to it does not impact flashing process. * ********************************************************************** putating * Delete successful. f501->

Appendix E

Configuring VROC RAID Settings

Intel® Virtual RAID on CPU (Intel® VROC) is a RAID (Redundant Array of Independent Disks) solution that integrates with Intel® Volume Management Device (Intel® VMD) for Non-Volatile Memory Express (NVMe) solid-state drives (SSDs). The E.1 section provides instructions on how to access the All Intel VMD Controller menu. The E.2 section provides instructions on how to configure RAID settings. The E.3 section describes the use of journaling drive for the RAID5 volume (parity-based RAID).

Note 1: Only use NVMe devices that have been validated by Supermicro. For the latest updates, please contact us or refer to our website at https://www.supermicro.com.

Note 2: Depending on the version of driver/utility/package, it may or may not have exactly the same as the BIOS settings/features shown in the appendix.

E.1 All Intel VMD Controllers Menu

The following section provides you with instructions on how to access the All Intel VMD Controllers menu which will allow you to enable a selected PCI slot for VMD support.

Enabling a PCI Slot for VMD Support in the BIOS Setup Utility

1. Press during system boot to enter the BIOS Setup utility.
2. Use the arrow key to select Advanced on top of the BIOS menu bar.
3. Use the down arrow key to select Chip Configuration and press .
4. Select North Bridge and press .

5. Use the down arrow key to select IIO Configuration and press .

6. When the following screen displays, use the down arrow key to select Intel® VMD Technology and press to enter the Intel® VMD Technology submenu.

Aptio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc. IIO Configuration Press to bring up the Intel® VMD for Volume Management Device Configuration menu. IIO-PCIE Express Global Options PCIe Hot Plug [Disable] PCI-E Completion Timeout (Global) [No] Disable +: Select Screen ↑1: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESC: Exit Version 2.20.1276, Copyright (C) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc.

1. When the Intel® VMD Technology submenu appears, it will display all the PCI slots that can be configured for VMD support on the screen.
2. From the available PCI slots displayed on the screen, select a PCI slot you want to use for a VMD device by highlighting it.
3. Select the option [Enable] and press to enable the selected slot for VMD support.
4. Repeat Step 8 \~ Step 9 to select and enable all the PCI slots of your choice for VMD support.
5. After enabling all PCI slots for VMD support on the BIOS Setup utility, install the VMD devices (such as add-on cards) on the slots that you've configured for VMD support on the motherboard. For the changes to take effect,
6. Press to save the settings and exit the BIOS Setup utility. Press during system boot to enter the BIOS Setup utility.

Note: After you've enabled VMD in the BIOS on a PCI-E slot of your choice, this PCI-E slot will be dedicated to VMD use only, and it will no longer support any PCI-E device. To re-activate this slot for PCI-E use, please disable VMD in the BIOS.

1. Navigate to the Advanced tab.

Ratio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc. Main Advanced Event Logs IPMI Security Boot Save & Exit ▶ Boot Feature ▶ CPU Configuration ▶ Chipset Configuration ▶ Server NE Information ▶ PCH SATA Configuration ▶ PCH scATA Configuration ▶ PCIe/PCI/PnP Configuration ▶ Super ID Configuration ▶ Serial Fort Console Redirection ▶ ACFI Settings ▶ Trusted Computing ▶ HTTP BOOT Configuration ▶ TLS Authenticate Configuration ▶ I Digital Configuration ▶ Intel3D Virtual RAID on CPU ▶ Driver Health This format allows the user to manage Intel3D Virtual RAID on CPU +: Select Screen F1: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F2: General Help F3: Previous Values F4: Defaulted Defaults F5: Save a Exit ESC: Exit! Version 2.20.1274. Copyright (C) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc.

1. Use the arrow keys to select Intel(R) Virtual RAID on CPU and press to access the menu items. The following screen will appear showing that the feature "All Intel VMD Controllers" has become available.

Intel(R) VMOC with AMD Technology 8.0.0.1034 Upgrade key: Intel-SSD-only No RFID volumes on the system Intel VMOC Managed Controllers! All Intel VMO Controllers Select to set more information about the Intel VMO Controllers +: Select Screen T1: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: SAVE & Exit ESC: Exit Version 2.20.1274, Copyright (C) 2019 American Regatrends, Inc.

Note 1: The license and header (on the motherboard) for Intel® VROC hardware key are required. Also, be sure the version of Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) VROC utility is 5 or above (look for Intel(R) VROC with VMD Technology x.x.x.xxxx shown on the screen).

Note 2: Intel® VROC Premium hardware key is used in the appendix to demonstrate RAID settings.

1. Use the arrow keys to select All Intel VMD Controllers and press to access the menu items. The following screen will appear. It allows the user to create RAID volumes and configure settings of NVMe devices as detected by the system.

All Intel VMD Controllers CREATE RAID volume Non-RPID PHYSIC91 Disk? INTIL SSPE2MEO1ZT4 SN:DM07J7406B0LP0MGN, 1117.815B Port 3:0, Slot 4, CPU, VMD, BDF 03:00.0 INTIL SSPE2MEO1ZT4 SN:FM06242006FIPDNEN, 1117.815B Port 3:0, Slot 37, CPU, VMD, BDF 04:00.0 INTIL SSPE2MEO1ZT4 SN:FM06241006ZIP3MGN, 1117.815B Port 2:0, Slot 4, CPU, VMD, BDF 03:00.0 INTIL SSPE2MEO1ZT4 SN:FM06242006RIP2MGN, 1117.815B Port 2:0, Slot 37, CPU, VMD, BDF 04:00.0 This page allows you to create a RAID volume +: Select Screen T4: Select Items Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit ECD: Exit version 3.20.1874. Copyright (C) 2017 American MegaTrends, Inc.

Note: A single Intel® VMD supported processor supplies 48 PCIe lanes and contains three Intel® VMD controllers (domains). Refer to the following illustration for more information.

graph TD
    A["Processor"] -->|UPI| B["Processor"]
    A --> C["NVMe Device"]
    A --> D["NVMe Device"]
    B --> E["NVMe Device"]
    B --> F["NVMe Device"]
    C <--> G["Intel® VMD x16 PCIe"]
    D <--> H["Intel® VMD x16 PCIe"]
    E <--> I["NVMe Device"]
    F <--> J["NVMe Device"]
    G <--> K["Intel® VMD x16 PCIe"]
    H <--> L["Intel® VMD x16 PCIe"]
    I <--> M["NVMe Device"]
    J <--> N["NVMe Device"]
    K <--> O["NVMe Device"]
    L <--> P["NVMe Device"]
    M <--> Q["NVMe Device"]
    N <--> R["NVMe Device"]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style D fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style E fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style F fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style G fill:#fcc,stroke:#333
    style H fill:#fcc,stroke:#333
    style I fill:#cff,stroke:#333
    style J fill:#cff,stroke:#333
    style K fill:#ffc,stroke:#333
    style L fill:#ffc,stroke:#333
    style M fill:#ffc,stroke:#333
    style N fill:#ffc,stroke:#333

* Data RAID will be allowed to cross VMDs and processors. * Boot RAID will NOT be

able to cross VMDs.

E.2 Configuring RAID Settings

Follow the instructions stated in the E.1 section to access the All Intel VMD Controllers menu items, the following screen will appear. Please carefully follow the instructions listed in this section to configure RAID settings for your devices as desired.

All Intel VMD Controllers ► Create RAID Volume Non-RMID Physical DLK5: ► INTEL SSPE2ME01274 SN:FM00717400EDLP36N, 1117.818B Port 3:0, Slot 4, CPU0, VMD, BIF 03:00.0 ► INTEL SSPE2ME01274 SN:FM006243000FIP36N, 1117.818B Port 3:0, Slot 97, CPU0, VMD, BIF 04:00.0 ► INTEL SSPE2ME01274 SN:FM00624100LZIP36N, 1117.818B Port 2:0, Slot 4, CPU1, VMD, BIF 03:00.0 ► INTEL SSPE2ME01274 SN:FM006243000KIP36N, 1117.818B Port 2:0, Slot 97, CPU1, VMD, BIF 04:00.0 This page allows you to create a RAID volume +: Select Screen T4: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults Far: Save O Exit ESC: Exit Version 2.20.1274. Copyright (C) 2019 American MegaTrends, Inc.

To Create a RAID Volume

Use the arrow keys to select Create RAID Volume from the screen above and press to create a RAID Volume. The Create RAID Volume submenu, which allows you to configure the settings of the RAID volume you've created, will appear as shown below.

Ratio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc. Advanced Create RAID Volume NAME: RAID Levels: Enable RAID spanned over VMD Controllers: Select Disks: INTEL SSDPEZMEO1274 SN:CMV01174008IP26HN, 1117.81GB Port 3:0 CPU0 VMD2 INTEL SSDPEZMEO1274 SN:PM085N200IFIP26HN, 1117.81GB Port 3:0 CPU0 VMD2 INTEL SSDPEZMEO1274 SN:PM085N400LZIP26HN, 1117.81GB Port 2:0 CPU0 VMD1 INTEL SSDPEZMEO1274 SN:PM085N200IFIP26HN, 1117.81GB Port 2:0 CPU0 VMD1 Strip Size: Capacity (GB): Create Volume Volume [REDA(Striped)] I I I I I I I I [129KB] 0.00 Enter a unique volume name that does not contain space at the beginning or backslash and is in b. characters or less. +: Select Screen T4: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimal Defaults F4: Save & Exit ECDT Exit

To Enter a Name for the RAID Volume

From the Create RAID Volume submenu as shown on the previous screen, use the arrow keys to select Name and press , and the following screen will display.

Auto Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American Newsrends, Inc. PROVANCED Create RAID Volume NAME: RAID Level: Volume Enable RAID scanned over VMD [Risid(Stripe)] Controllers: Select Disk1 INTEL SSDPE2MEO1274 SND:AMD7134000IP25N0H, 1117.01GB Port S10 CPU0 VMD INTEL SSDPE2MEO1274 SND:AMD8242000IP25N0H, 1117.01GB Port S10 CPU0 VMD INTEL SSDPE2MEO1274 SND:AMD8242000IP25N0H, 1117.01GB Port S10 CPU0 VMD INTEL SSDPE2MEO1274 SND:AMD82420O0IP25N0H, 1117.01GB Port S10 CPU0 VMD Strip Size: [129x8] Capacity (SB): 0.66 Create Volume Enter a unique volume name that does not contain space at the beginning or backslash and is in characters or less. +: Select Screen I: Select Item enter: Select +/- Change Opt. F1: Several Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit GSDs Exit Version 2.25.1274. Copyright (C) 2019 American Newsrends, Inc.

When the screen above displays, enter a unique name for the RAID volume.

To Set the RAID Level for the RAID Volume

From the Create RAID Volume submenu, select RAID Level and press . The following screen will display.

Antio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American Regatrends, Inc. Advanced Create RAID Volume Name: RAID Level: Enable RAID soartes over VMD Controllers: Select Disk: INTEL SSDPE2ME01274 SH:CMWD134000IP240N, 1117.81GB Port 310 CPU0 VMD2 INTEL SSDPE2ME01274 SH:PAHDS24000IP240N, 1117.81GB Port 310 CPU0 VMD2 INTEL SSDPE2ME01274 SH:PAHDS24000IP240N, 1117.81GB Port 2:0 CPU0 VMD1 INTEL SSDPE2ME01274 SH:PAHDS24000IP240N, 1117.81GB Port 2:0 CPU0 VMD1 Strip Size: Capacity (SB): Create Volume Volume9 (RADD(Stripe)) I 1 RAID Level: RAIDO(Stripe) RAID(Mirror) RAIDS(Parity) RAID(RAID=1) I 1 I(3KB) 0.00 Select RAID Level +: Select Screen T4: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Default Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESC: Exit

Use the arrow keys to select the desired RAID level for the RAID volume that you've created. The options are RAID0(Stripe), RAID1(Mirror), RAID5(Parity), and RAID10(RAID0+1).

Note 1: The RAID level(s) displayed is(are) based on the number of NVMe devices connected to the system.

Note 2: For RAID0/RAID1/RAID5/RAID10, the minimum number of NVMe devices required is two/two/three/four respectively.

Note 3: Use Intel® VROC Standard hardware key to support RAID 0/1/10. Use Intel® VROC Premium hardware key (or Intel SSD Only hardware key) to support RAID 0/1/5/10.

Enabling RAID Spanned over VMD Controllers

From the Create RAID Volume submenu, use the arrow keys to select Enter RAID spanned over VMD Controllers and press . The following screen will display.

Ratio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American MegaTrends, Inc. Advanced Create RAID Volume Name: Volume9 RAID Level: [RAIDotStriper] Enable RAID spanned over VMD Controllers: Select Disks: INTEL SSDPE2ME01274 [ ] SN:SMD7140080IP2HON, 1117.81GB Port 310 CPU6 VMD INTEL SSDPE2ME01274 SN:PHD654200CFIP2HON K 310 CPU6 VMD INTEL SSDPE2ME01274 SN:PHD654300LFIP2HON, 1117.81GB Port 310 CPU6 VMD INTEL SSDPE2ME01274 [ ] SN:PHD654200ORIP2HON, 1117.81GB Port 310 CPU6 VMD Strip Size: [1/24KB] Capacity (SD): 0.00 Create Volume Enable RAID spanned over VMD Controllers: +: Select Screen TI: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESO: Exit Version 2.20.1874. Copyright (C) 2019 American MegaTrends, Inc.

Enter desired setting for your RAID volume in the pop-up menu. The options are (not selected) and X (selected). Please set this feature to X if the RAID level you selected earlier from Step 3 will cross VMD domains.

Note: For a bootable RAID volume, do not cross VMD domains.

To Select Disks for the RAID Volumes

From the Create RAID Volume submenu, use the arrow keys to highlight Select Disk: and press . The following screen will display.

Ratio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American Negatrends, Inc. Advanced Name: RAID Level: Enable RAID scanned over VMD Controllers: Select Disk: INTIL SSDPE2MEO1274 SN:CMV071740065IP2WGN, 1117.8108 Port 310 CPU0 VMD INTIL SSDPE2MEO1274 SN:PMI INTIL SSDPE2MEO1274 SN:CMV071740065IP2WGN, 1117.8108 Port S10 CPU0 VMD2 310 CPU INTIL SN:PMI 210 CPU INTIL SSDPE2MEO1274 SN:CMV071740065IP2WGN, 1117.8108 Port 210 CPU0 VMD1 Strip Size: Capacity (GB): Select at least two disks X - to Select Disk +: Select Screen T4: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESC: Exit Version 2.20.2274. Copyright (C) 2019 American Negatrends, Inc.

The options are (not selected) and X (selected). Set the features one by one to X to select the desired RAID disks for your RAID volumes.

To Set Strip Size for the RAID Volume

From the Create RAID Volume submenu, use the arrow keys to select Strip Size: and press . The following screen will display.

Auto Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc. Advanced Name: RAID Layer1 Enable RAID spanned over VMD Controllers: Select Disks: INTEL SSDPE2ME01274 SN:CMDDT17A00EIP0CHN, 1117.8108 Port 310 CPU0 VMD INTEL SSDPE2ME01274 SN:PHDGS4A00CFIP0CHN, 1117.8108 Port 310 CPU0 VMD INTEL SSDPE2ME01274 SN:PHDGS4A00CFIP0CHN, 1117.8108 Port 310 CPU0 VMD INTEL SSDPE2ME01274 SN:PHDGS4A00CFIP0CHN,1117.8108 Port 310 CPU0 VMD Strip Size: 4KB 8KB 16KB 32KB 64KB 120KB Strip Size: Capacity [SB]: 0.00 Create Volume Select at least two disks Strip size help +: Select Screen T1: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESDr Exit Version 2.20.1274. Copyright (C) 2013 American Megatrends, Inc.

From the pop-up menu, as shown above, select the desired RAID strip size for your RAID volume and press . The options are 4KB, 8KB, 16KB, 32KB, 64KB, and 128KB.

Note: For RAID5, the options are 4KB, 8KB, 16KB, 32KB, 64KB, and 128KB. For RAID10, the options are 4KB, 8KB, 16KB, 32KB, and 64KB.

To Set the Capacity (GB) for the RAID Volume

From the Create RAID Volume submenu, use the arrow keys to select Capacity (GB): and press . The following screen will display.

Auto Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American MegaTrends, Inc. ADVANCED Name: Volume0 RAM Levels: [RAMD(striped)] Enable RAM scanned over VMD Controller: Select disks: INTEL: SSDPE2MEO1274 SIN:DMOT174008IP25GN, 1117.8108 Port 310 CPU: VMD2 INTEL: SSDPE2MEO1274 SIN:FM062400HP IP25GN, 1117.8108 Port 310 CPU: VMD2 INTEL: SSDPE2MEO1274 SIN:FM062400LP IP25GN, 1117.8108 Port E-IO CPU: VMD1 INTEL: SSDPE2MEO1274 SIN:FM062400RP IP25GN, 1117.8108 Port E-IO CPU: VMD1 Strip Size: [free] Capacity (GB): 0.00 Create Volume Select at least two disks Capacity in GB ++ Select Screen TI: Select Item enter: Select +/- Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save A Exit ESC: Exit Version 3.20.1274, Copyright (KC) 2013 American MegaTrends, Inc.

Enter the desired RAID capacity (in GB) in the pop-up menu to set the capacity for your RAID volume.

To Create Volumes

To finalize your RAID volume configuration, select Create Volume from the Create RAID Volume submenu as shown on the screen below.

Notio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc. Advanced Name: RisD Levels Enable RISD spyned over VMD Controllers: Select Signal: INTL. SSPECNE01274 SN:CMD217400B01P2HN, 3117.81GB Port 310 CPU6 VMD INTL. SSPECNE01274 SN:MHDC54200CFIP2HN, 3117.81GB Port 310 CPU6 VMD INTL. SSPECNE01274 SN:MHDC54100LZIP2HN, 3117.81GB Port 210 CPU6 VMD INTL. SSPECNE01274 SN:MHDC54200ORIP2HN, 3117.81GB Port 210 CPU6 VMD Strike Size: Capacity (GB): Create Volume Volume: (RAIDOSnStrips) [ ] DQ IVI [ ] [ ] [12KB] 2173.00 Create a volume with the settings specified above +:- Select Screen T4: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESC: Exit Version 2.20.1274. Copyright (C) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc.

After selecting Create Volume, press . The following screen will appear and display RAID volumes as shown below.

All Intel VMD Controllers ► Create RAID Volume RAID Volumes: ► Volume0, RAID0/STILO7, 2133.83GB, Normal Non-RAID Physical Blocks: ► INTEL SSDPE2MDS12T4 SN:FM0624100LZIPZHEN, 1117.81GB Port 2:0, Slot 4, CPU1, VMO1, BOP 03:00.0 ► INTEL SSDPE2MDS12T4 SN:FM0624200RIPZHEN, 1117.81GB Port 2:0, Slot 37, CPU1, VMO1, BOP 04:00.0 This page allows you to create a RAID volume +: Select Screen T4: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESC: Exit Version 2.20.1874. Copyright (C) 2019 American Negatrends, Inc.

To Display RAID Volumes

For detailed RAID volume information, use the arrow keys to select the desired RAID volume as shown below.

All Intel VIO Controllers ► Create RAID Volume RAID Volumes ► Volume0, RAID(Strip), 2128.83GB, Normal Non-RAID Physical Disks: ► INTEL SSPEZMEO12T4 SN:FM06241006.21F2HGN, 1117.83GB Port 2:0, Slot 4, CPU1, VM01, EBF 03:00.0 ► INTEL SSPEZMEO12T4 SN:FM06240008R1P3HGN, 1117.83GB Port 2:0, Slot 3T, CPU1, VM01, EBF 04:00.0 Select to see more Information about the RAID VOLUME +: Select Screen 14: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit EUG: Exit Version 2.20.1274. Copyright (C) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc.

To Display RAID VOLUME Information

When the screen above appears, press . The RAID VOLUME INFO menu will appear and display the detailed information about the RAID volume you've selected as shown below.

Audio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American Meastrends, Inc. Advanced RAID VOLUME INFO VOLUME ACTIONS Delete Name: Volume0 RAID Level: RATIO(Stripe) Strip Size: 12000 Size: 2123.83GB Status: Normal Bootable: Yes Block Size: 512 RAID Header Disk: INTEL SODPE2ME01274 SN:CM0717400601PONON, 1117.81GB Port 3x0, Slot 4, CPU0, VMOS, SDF 03:00.0 INTEL SODPE2ME01274 SN:FHDAS4200F2PONON, 1117.81GB Port 3x0, Slot 37, CPU0, VMOS, SDF 04:00.0 +: Select Screen 1#: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESO: Exit

To Delete a RAID Volume

On the RAID VOLUME INFO menu, use the arrow keys to select Delete and press to delete the RAID volume you have selected.

Antio Setup Utility - Copyright TC2 2019 American Megatrends, Inc. Advanced RAID VOLUME INFO VOLUME ACTIONS Delete Name: Volume0 RAID Level: RAID(Stripe) Strip Size: 120GB Size: 2185.00GB Status: Normal Portable: Yes Block Size: 512 RAID Member Discs: INTEL SSDPE2MEO12T4 SN-CMO7174008DIP2MGN, 1117.01GB Port S10, Slot 4, CPU0, VM2, RSP 03100.0 INTEL SSDPE2MEO12T4 SN-PH0664200AFJP2MGN, 1117.01GB Port S10, Slot 37, CPU0, VM2, RSP 04100.0 +: Select Screen F1: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Frevious Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESC: Exit

The following screen will appear to confirm if you want to delete the RAID Volume. Select Yes to delete the RAID Volume. The options are Yes and No.

Ratio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American MegaTrends, Inc. Advanced Delete Delete the RAID volume? ALL DATA ON VOLUME WILL BE LIST! Yes No Ordering a volume will reset the disk to non-RAID. +: Select Screen T4: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save E Exit F5: Exit Version 2.30.1876. Copyright (C) 2019 American MegaTrends, Inc.

To Reset the RAID Volume to non-RAID

On the RAID VOLUME INFO submenu shown on the bottom screen of page 167, select the desired NVMe device from the list of RAID Member Disks and press as shown below.

RAID VOLUME INFO Volume Actions ► Delete Name: Volume0 RAID Level: RATIO (Stripe) Strip Size: 129KB Size: S123.80GB Status: Normal Bootable: Yes Block size: 512 RAID Member Disks: ► INTEL SSDPE2MER1274 SN:CAN07174X6DIP3CMN, 1117.8108 Port: 310, Slot 4, CPU0, WNS, BOP 03:00.0 ► INTEL SSDPE2MER1274 SN:PH0624300F1PCHN, 1117.8108 Port: 310, Slot 37, CPU0, WNS, BOP 04:00.0 +: Select Screen T1: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save a Exit ECD: Exit

Select Reset to Non-RAID from the screen below and press to remove RAID data from the selected NVMe device.

Auto Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc. Advanced INTEL SODPEDMED12T4 SN:CVMD717406B01P0NDN, 1117.013B Disk Actions: Reset to non-RESET Turn Locate LED On Controllers: Model Numbers: Serial Number: Size: Status: Block Size: Boot Port Number: Boot Port Offsets: Slot Number: Socket Number: VDD Controller Number: PCI BusDevice.Function: volume Management: Device Controller: INTEL SODPEDMED12T4 CVMD717406B01P0NDN 1117.013B PAID Member 512 3 0 4 0 2 03:00,0 Remove RAID data from the risk +: Select Screen T1: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults Full Save & Exit ESD: Exit Version 2.20.1874. Copyright (C) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc.

When the following screen appears, select Yes to confirm that you want to set the selected NVMe device to non-RAID. The options are Yes and No.

Ratio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc. Advanced Reset to non-RAID Remove RAID structure on disk? Yes No Receives RAID data from the disk +: Select Screen T4: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESC: Exit Version 5.20.1876. Copyright (C) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc.

To Turn on the Disk Locator LED

Follow the instructions stated in the E.1 section to access the All Intel VMD Controllers menu. When the following screen displays, select a non-RAID physical disk to turn on the disk locator LED to locate a selected device.

All Intel VMD Controllers Create RAID Volume VIAID Volumes: Volume9, R(Do(Strike), 2023,8GB, Normal) Non-MSOLED PAGLIC Litter1 INTEL SSD/CSWES1974 SE-FH06A1001.CSPINEX, 1117.0108 Port Z10, Slot 4, CPU, WD1, BOP 04100.0 INTEL SSD/CSWES1974 SE-FH06A1001.CSPINEX, 1117.0108 Port Z10, Slot 37, CPU, WD1, BOP 04100.0 Select to see non information about the disk +: Select Screen TI: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: Several Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESC: Ex)!

You can also select a RAID member disk to locate the selected device.

RAID VOLUME INFO Volume Actions Delete Name: Volume0 RAID Levels: RAID(Stripe) Strip Size: 125KB Size: 2123.83GB Status: Normal Bootable: Yes Block Size: $12 RAID Member Blocks INTEL: SCSF/CMR174 SN-FH0754000SP/MEN, 1117.0100 Port: 360, 81st 4, CPU0, WHO, BOP 03100.0 INTEL: SSPEXN01274 SN-FH0624000FIP/HON, 1117.0100 Port: 360, 81st 37, CPU0, WHO, BOP 04100.0 ++: Select Screen TI: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESGT Exit

When the following screen appears, use the arrow keys to select Turn Locate LED On. Press to turn on the locator LED to show the location of the selected device.

Create RAID Volume INTEL SSPE2ME01274 3N:FM0624100LZIPDHGM, 1117.0108 Disk Actions ► Mark as Open ► Make as Journals Drive ► Turn Locate LED On Controller: Volume Management Device Controller Model Number: INTEL SSPE2ME01274 Serial Number: FM0624100LZIPDHGM Size: 1117.0108 Status: Non-RAID Block Size: 512 Root Port Number: 2 Root Port Offset: 0 Slot Number: 4 Socket Number: 1 VND Controller Number: 1 PCI BusDeviceFunctions: 08500.0 ▲ Create a volume with the Sends locate led command to a drive +: Select Screen T1: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESC: Exit version 2.20.1274, Copyright © 2019 American Regatronics, Inc.

To Mark a RAID Volume as Spare

Follow the instructions stated in the E.1 section to access the All Intel VMD Controllers menu. When the following screen appears, select the desired NVMe device from the list of Non-RAID Physical Disks.

Aio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc. Advanced All Intel VMD Controllers ► Create RAID Volume: RAID volumes: ► Volume:0, RAID(Stripe), E123.85GE, Normal Non-RAID Physical Disk: ► INTEL SDFP2M0G1274 ONIPWD624100JEPONCL, 1117.8100 Port 210, 810T 77, OPUI, VMOI, BGF 04100,0 ► INTEL SDFP2M0G1274 ONIPWD624300RIPONCL, 1117.8100 Port 210, 810T 77, OPUI, VMOI, BGF 04100,0 Select to set more information about the disk +: Select Screen T1: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESC: Exit Version 3.20.1274. Copyright (C) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc.

After the NVMe device is selected, press and the following screen will appear. Select Mark as Spare and press to mark the selected device as a spare device.

Ratio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American Hestrends, Inc. Advanced INTEL SSDPE2M6312T4 SN:PH0624100LZIF2HON, 1117.81GB Disk Actions: ► Make as Stamp ► Make as Journaling Drive ► Turn Locate LED On Controller: Model Number: Serial Number: SIZE: Status: Block Size: Boot Port Number: Boot Port Offsets: Slot Number: Socket Number: VMD Controller Number: PCI Bus/Device/Function: Volume Management Device Controller INTEL SSDPE2M6012T4 PH0624100LZIF2HON 1117.81GB Non-RAID 512 2 0 4 1 1 03:00.0 Mark disk as Spare +: Select Screen F4: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESC: Exit Version 2.30.1874. Copyright (C) 2019 American Hestrends, Inc.

When the following screen appears, select Yes to confirm that you want the selected device to be used as a spare device. The options are Yes and No.

Ratio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc. Advanced Hark as Spare Are you sure you want to mark the disk as Spare? Marking disk as Spare will remove all data on the disk. ► yes ► No Mark disk as Spare +: Select Screen F1: Select Item Enter: Select +/-1 Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save a Exit ESC: Exit Version 8.20.1876. Copyright (C) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc.

Note: A spare disk is used for automatic RAID volume rebuilds when the status of failed, missing, or at risk is detected on the array disk. For a RAID0 volume, only the at risk status will trigger automatic RAID volume rebuilds.

To Mark a RAID Volume as a Journaling Drive

Refer to the instructions stated in the E.1 section to access the All Intel VMD Controllers menu. When the following screen appears, select the desired NVMe device from the list of Non-RAID Physical Disks for use as a journaling drive.

All Intel VMD Controllers RAID Volumes: ► Volumes, RAIDS(Parity), 2133.04GB, Normal ► Volumes, RAIDS(Parity), 196.18GB, Normal Non-RAID Physical Docks: ► INTL SPCY2NDISTE 50+PUMR450001CHD, 1127.822 F4: 210, 8bit - 97, 8bit, VMD, 50 - 14.00.0 Select to see more Information about the disk +: Select Screen T4: Select Item Enter: Select +/-1 Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Drive & Exit ESC: EXIT Version 3.20.1874. Copyright (C) 2013 American Regatrends, Inc.

After selecting the NVMe device, press and the following screen will appear. Select Mark as Journaling Drive and press .

Intel SGP2E2ME012T4 SX:FM0654200R1P2MGN, 1117.819B Disk Actions: ► Make as Drive ► Make as Journaling Drive ► Make Lasso LED On Controllers: Model Number: Serial Number: Size: Status: Block Size: Root Part Number: Root Part Offset: Slot Number: Socket Number: VND Controller Number: PCI Bus/Device Function: Volume Management Device Controller INTEL SGP2E2ME012T4 FM0654200R1P2MGN 1117.819B Non-MAID 510 2 0 37 1 1 04:00.0 Mark disk as Journaling Drive +=: Select Screen TI: Select Item Enter: Select +--: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Dutilized Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESC: Exit Version 2.20.1374. Copyright (C) 2017 American Newsrends, Inc.

When the following screen appears, select Yes to confirm that the selected device is to be used as a journaling drive. The options are Yes and No.

Auto Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American Newsrends, Inc. Advanced Mark as Journaling Drive Are you sure you want to mark the disk as Journaling Drive? Marking disk as Journaling Drive will Remove all data on the disk. ▶ Yes ▶ No Mark disk as Journaling Drive ++: Select Screen TI: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESOG: Exit Version 5.20.1876. Copyright (C) 2019 American Newsrends, Inc.

Note: RAID Write Hole (RWH) is a condition associated with a power/drive-failure/crash while writing to a RAID5 volume. The use of journaling drive that contains partial parity logging (PPL) can reduce the potential data loss. Refer to the following illustration for the use of journaling drive.

graph TD
    A["Journaling Drive (PPL)"] --> B["Disk1 (Data)"]
    A --> C["Disk2 (Data)"]
    A --> D["Disk3 (Data)"]
    A --> E["Disk4 (Parity)"]
    B --> F["(read) old data XOR operation (write) new data"]
    C --> G["(read) old parity XOR operation (write) new parity"]
    D --> H["(read) old parity XOR operation (write) new parity"]
    I["Store PPL to the journaling drive"] --> A
    J["Partial parity logging (PPL) = old data XOR old parity\nNew parity = new data XOR PPL"] --> A

E.3 Use of Journaling Drive

The following section describes the use of a journaling drive for the RAID5 volume, which is a parity-based RAID.

Step 1. Refer to the instructions stated in the E.1 section to access All Intel VMD Controllers menu items. When the following screen appears, use the arrow keys to select the desired RAID5 volume.

Ratio Setup Utility - Copyright ICJ 2019 American Megatrends, Inc. Advanced All Intel VMD Controllers VMD VOLUME: • VOLUME, RUIDS(Parity), 2123.0458, Normal • VOLUME, RMS(DNA)(P1), V76.1858, Normal Non-RAID Physical Disk: • INTEL, BIOS(FEEM)1274, ON:PHO62NDOORIPUSHN, 1117.B138 Port 2:0; Slot 37; OPUL, VMD, SDF 04:00.0 Select to see more information about the RAID VOLUME +: Select Screen II: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESC: Exit Version 2.30.1274. Copyright (C) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc.

Press and the following screen will appear.

Auto Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American Regatrends, Inc. advanced RAID VOLUME INFO Volume Actions Delete Name: Volume0 RAID Level: RAID5(Parity) Strip Size: 64KB Size: 2125.84GB Status: Normal Bootable: Yes Block Size: 51B NRF Policy: [Disable] RAID Member Disk: INTEL SSPE2ME01274 SN:CWM07174008DIP3HGN, 1117.813B Port 010, 91ot 4, CPU, VND, BDF 03:00.0 INTEL SSPE2ME01274 SN:FIND6243000FIP3HGN, 1117.813B Port 010, 81ot 37, CPU, VND, BDF 04:00.0 INTEL SSPE2ME01274 SN:FIND62410NLZIF2HGN, 1117.813B Port 2:0, 81ot 4, CPU, VND, BDF 03:00.0 RAID Write Hole policy +1: Select Screen T1: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESC: Exit Version 2.20.1874. Copyright (C) 2019 American Regatrends, Inc.

Step 2. Use the arrow keys to select RWH Policy. RWH is a scenario related to a power/drive-failure/crash.

RWH Policy

Press and the following screen will appear. If any device has been set as a journaling drive (see pages 173 and 170), the options are Distributed PPL, Journaling Drive, and Disable.

Ratio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American Negatrends, Inc. Advanced RAID VOLUME INFO Volume Actions Delete Name: Volume0 RAID Level: RAIDS(Parity) Strip Size: 64KB Size: 2183.84GB Status: Normal Bectable: Block Slides: SMH Policy: MMS Pulsifier: SMH Policy: Distributed FPL Journaling Drive Disable RAID Member Disk: INTEL SSDPEZMED1274 SN:CM07174008DF5E Port 310, Slot 4, CPU0, VMD, SDF 03:00.0 INTEL SSDPEZMED1274 SN:FM062N00AFCHGN, 1117.83SB Port 310, Slot 3T, CPU0, VMD, SDF 04:00.0 INTEL SSDPEZMED1274 SN:FM062L00LZFCHGN, 1117.83SB Port 210, Slot 4, CPU1, VMD, SDF 03:00.0 RAID Write Hole policy +: Select Screen T1: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Apt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESO: Exit Version 2.20.1274. Copyright (C) 2019 American Negatrends, Inc.

If no device has been set as a journaling drive, the options are Distributed PPL and Disable.

Ratio Setup Utility - Copyright (CI) 2019 American MegaTrends, Inc. Advanced RAID VOLUME INFO Volume Actions Delete Name: RAID Level: Strip Size: Size: Status: Bootable: Block B/S RMM Policy: RAID Member Disks: INTEL SSPEEEMES1274 SN:CAN07174008DPZEN, 1117.8108 Port 3:0, Slot 4, CPU0, VAD2, BDF 03:00.0 INTEL SSPEEEMES1274 SN:PM0624100CLIPZEN, 1117.8108 Port 3:0, Slot 37, CPU0, VAD2, BDF 04:00.0 INTEL SSPEEEMES1274 SN:FM0624100CLIPZEN, 1117.8108 Port 2:0, Slot 4, CPU1, VAD1, BDF 03:00.0 Volume9 RAID(Parity) 64KB 2125.840B Normal RMM Policy: Distributed FPL Disable +:- Select Screen TI: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESC: Exit Version 2.20.1274. Copyright (CI) 2019 American MegaTrends, Inc.

Note 1: Partial parity logging (PPL) can be defined as the result of XOR calculation of old data and old parity. PPL is a feature available for RAID5 volumes. While a power/drive-failure/crash occurs, PPL information helps rebuild the RAID volume and reduces the potential data loss.

Note 2: For the RWH condition, the Intel® RSTe 5.X or above RWH closure algorithm provides the option of use of an additional NVMe device for RAID volume rebuilds (Journaling Drive RWH closure mode). Without the use of an additional NVMe device, PPL distributed RWH closure mode can be utilized to close the RWH by using the parity drive for example.

Step 3. Set the feature, RWH Policy, to Journaling Drive.

Ratio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc. Advanced RAID VOLUME INFO Volume Actions Delete Name: RAID Level: Strip Size: Sizes: Status: Bootable: Block Slides RMM Polio: RAID Member Disks: INTEL SEDPEEMES1274 SN:CAVDT1740080523 Port: 3x0, Slot 4, CPU0, VMD2, BDF 03:00.0 INTEL SEDPEEMES1274 SN:FH06242000FIP2HGN, 1117.81GB Port: 3x0, Slot 3T, CPU0, VMD2, BDF 04:00.0 INTEL SEDPEEMES1274 SN:FH0624100LIZIP2HGN, 1117.81GB Port: 2x0, Slot 4, CPU0, VMD1, BDF 03:00.0 RAID Policy: Distributed FPL Journaling Drive Disable +/- Select Screen TI: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESC: Exit Version 2.20.1274. Copyright (C) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc.

Press and the RWH JD feature will become available as shown below.

Aptio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc. Advanced RAID VOLUME INFO Volume Actions ► Delete Name: VOLUME9 RAID Level: MAX(Parity) Strip Size: 64KB Size: $125.84D8 Status: Normal Bootablet: Yes Block Size: $12 REV FOUNT: (Reinforcing Cable) RAM JD: INTEL SODPE2ME01274 SIN:PHM062420001F2HGN, 1117.81GB Port 210 CPOL: VMDJ] ► Change RAM Settings RAID Member DISS: INTEL SODPE2ME01274 SNICAM072700801F3HGN, 1117.81GB Port 3:0, $101 4, CPOL, VMD2, BDF 03:00,0 INTEL SODPE2ME01274 SNIPHD062420001F2HGN, 1117.81GB Port 3:0, Slot 3T, CPOL, VMD2, BDF 04:00,0 INTEL SODPE2ME01274 SNIPHD0624100L2F3HGN, 1117.81GB ► Select Screen TI: Select Item Enter Select +/-1 Charge Opt. P1: General Hold P2: Previous Values P3: Optimized Defaults P4: Save a Exit ESO: Exit

RWH JD

Use the arrow keys to select RWH JD. Press and the following screen will appear. The feature displays the information of journaling drive(s).

Auto Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American Netatrends, Inc. Advanced RAID VOLUME INFO VOLUME ACTIONS Delete Name: RAID Level: Strip Size: Size: Status: Bootstrap: Block Size: RAM POUL RAM POUL PAR 3D: Volume0 RAID5(Parity) 64KB 2107.84GB Normel Yes Port 3D: INTEL SSDPE2ME012T4 SN:FM0624200CIP2HGN, 1117.815B Port 210 CPU VMD1 , 1117.815B Port 210 CPU VMD1 Change RAM settings RAM Member Disks: INTEL SSDPE2ME012T4 SN:FM071740080LP2HGN, 1117.815B Port 3D: Slot 4, CPU, VMD2, RDF 04:00.0 INTEL SSDPE2ME012T4 SN:FM0624200CIP2HGN, 1117.815B Port 3D: Slot 9T, CPU, VMD2, RDF 04:00.0 INTEL SSDPE2ME012T4 SN:FM0624100CZIP3HGN, 1117.815B +:- Select Screen T1: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESC: Exit Version 2.20.1274. Copyright (C) 2019 American Netatrends, Inc.

Step 4. Use the arrow keys and press to select the desired journaling drive from the option list of RWH JD.

Step 5. For the changes to take effect, use the arrow keys to select Change RWH settings and press .

RAID VOLUME INFO VOLUME ACTIONS ► Delete Name: RAID Level: Strip Size: Size: Status: Bootable: Block Size: RAM Policy: RAM ID: ► Changes RMs settings RAID Member Disks: ► INTL SSPE2M01274 SN:CU0717400001F2NGN, 1117.8168 Port 3:0, Slot 4, CPU0, VMO2, BDF 03:00.0 ► INTL SSPE2M01274 SN:PHD624200F1NGN, 1117.8168 Port 3:0, Slot 37, CPU0, VMO2, BDF 04:00.0 ► INTL SSPE2M01274 SN:PHD624200L1F3NGN, 1117.8168 Volume: RAID(Pacity) 64KB 2125.84GB Normal Yes 512 [Journaling Drive] [INTEL SSPE2M01274 SN:PHD624200R1F2NGN, 1117.8168 Port 240 CPU1 MD1] +: Select Screen T1: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESC4 Exit Version 2.20.1274 Copyright (C) 2013 American Hegatrends, Inc.

Your computer will return to the main screen of All Intel VMD Controllers as shown below.

All Intel VMD Controllers RAID Volumes: Volume0, RAIDS(Parity), 213.8CM, Normal Volume1, RAIDS(Parity), 106.1BGB, Normal Non-RAID Physical Disks: INTEL: RSPEZMEO1274 SN:PHC624200GIF5HGN, 1117.8168 Port 2:0, 8Jot DT, OPUI, VMDI, BDF 04:00.0 Select to see here Information about the RAID VOLUME +/-: Select Screen T#: Select Icon Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESC: Exit Version 2.20.1274 Copyright (C) 2013 American Megatrends, Inc.

Appendix F

Secure Boot Settings

Secure boot is a feature of UEFI (Unified Extensible Firmware Interface) that ensures boot loaders are digitally signed and validated. The F.1, F.2, and F.3 sections provide instructions on how to enable the secure boot features. The F.4 section states Key Management settings.

F.1 Boot mode select Feature

Press during system boot to enter the BIOS Setup utility. Navigate to the Boot tab. Use the arrow keys to select Boot mode select and press . The options are LEGACY, UEFI, and DUAL. Set Boot mode select to UEFI. For the changes to take effect, press to save the settings and exit the BIOS Setup utility.

Aio Setup Utility - Copyright ICI 2017 American Megatrends, Inc. Main Advanced Event Loss IPM Security Boot Save & Exit Boot Configuration Boot mode select LEGACY to EFI Support [Default] [Disabled] FIXED BOOT ORDER Priorities Boot Option #1 [Hard Disk] Boot Option #2 [CD/DVD] Boot Option #3 [USB Hard Disk] Boot Option #4 [USB Ch/DVI] Boot Option #5 [Multi-Size] Boot Option #6 [Multi-Size] Boot Option #7 [Multi-Size] Boot Option #8 [Multi-Size] Boot Option #9 [Multi-Size] Boot Option #10 [Multi-Size] Boot Option #11 [Multi-Size] Boot Option #12 [Multi-Size] Boot Option #13 [Multi-Size] Boot Option #14 [Multi-Size] Boot Option #15 [Multi-Size] Boot Option #16 [Multi-Size] Boot Option #17 [Multi-Size] Boot mode select LEGACY UEFI DUAL ▶ Delete Boot Option Select boot mode LEGACY/DEFI +/-: Select Screen T1: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save N Exit ESC: Exit Version 2.19.1208. Copyright (C) 2017 American Megatrends, Inc.

F.2 Secure Boot/ Secure Boot Mode/ CSM Support Features

Press during system boot to enter the BIOS Setup utility. Navigate to the Security tab as shown below.

Aptio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2017 American Negatrends, Inc. Main Advanced Event logs IPNL Security Boot Save & Exit Administrator Password Not Installed User Password Not Installed Password Description If the Administrator's / User's password is set, then this only limit access to Setup and is asked for when entering Setup. Please set Administrator's password first in order to set user's password, if clear Administrator's password, the User's password will be cleared as well. The password length must be: in the following range: Minimum length 3 Maximum length 20 Administrator Password Password Check [Setup] Secure Boot Customizable Secure Boot settings +; Select Screen F4: Select Item Enter Select +/-1 Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit EIC: Exit Version 2.19.1268 Copyright © 2017 American Negatrends, Inc.

Use the arrow keys to select Secure Boot and press to access the menu items. The following screen will appear.

Auto Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2017 American Newsrends, Inc. Security System Mode User Secure Boot Not Active Vendor Keys Not Active Secure Boot [Disabled] Secure Boot Mode [Custom] COM Support [Enabled] Key Management Secure Boot activated when Platform Key(FC) is enrolled, System mode is user/Deployed, and CSM function is disabled +F: Select Screen F4: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESC: Exit Version 2.19.1208. Copyright (C) 2017 American Newsrends, Inc.

Secure Boot

This feature is available when the platform key (PK) is pre-registered where the platform operates in the User mode and compatibility support module (CSM) support is disabled in the BIOS Setup utility. Select Enabled for secure boot flow control. The options are Disabled and Enabled.

Secure Boot Mode

Use this feature to set the secure boot mode. The options are Standard and Custom. Select Standard to load the manufacturer's default secure variables. Select Custom to change the image execution policy and to manage secure boot keys.

CSM Support

Select Enabled to support the legacy CSM, which provides compatibility support for traditional legacy BIOS for system boot. The options are Disabled and Enabled.

F.3 Secure Boot Settings

To have secure boot support, be sure to follow the steps below (Step 1 \~ Step 4).

Step 1. Set Secure Boot Mode to Standard. Press Yes to install factory default keys as needed.

Auto Setup UTILITY - Copyright ICI 2017 American Megatrends, Inc. Security System Mode User Secure Boot Not Active Vendor Keys Not Active Secure Boot Disasified Secure Boot Mode Standard CAN Support Disasified Key Management Secure Boot mode selector: Standard-Duston. In Custom mode Secure Boot Variables can be configured without authentication +/-: Select Screen T#: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Defaulted Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESC: Exit Version 2.19.1866. Copyright ICI 2017 American Megatrends, Inc.

Auto Setup utility - Copyright (C) 2017 American Megatrends, Inc. Security User Not Active Not Active [displaced] [Custom] [Enabled] Secure Boot mode selector: Standard/Custom, In Custom Mode Secure Boot Variables can be configured without authentication Secure Boot Secure Boot Mode CSM Support Key Management Install factory defaults - Press "Yes" to install factory default keys Yes No +: Select Screen T4: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit EKC: Exit Version 2.15.1208, Copyright (C) 2017 American Megatrends, Inc.

Note: The Key Management menu will become unavailable when Secure Boot Mode is set to Standard.

Step 2. For the changes to take effect, press to save the settings and exit the BIOS Setup utility.

Ato Setup Utility - Copyright IC? 2017 American Megatrends, Inc. Security System Hode User Secure Boot Not Active Vendor Keys Not Active Secure Boot Disabled Secure Boot Mode Standard Di CSM Support Enabled Key Management Save & Exit Setup Save configuration and exit? Yes No Secure Boot mode selector: Standard-Duston, In Custom mode Secure Boot Variables can be configured without authentication ++: Select screen TI: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Defaulted Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESC: Exit Version 2.19.1368. Copyright (C) 2017 American Megatrends, Inc.

Step 3. Press during system boot to enter the BIOS Setup utility. Navigate to the Security tab and enter the Secure Boot menu. Set CSM Support to Disabled.

Automatic Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc. SECURITY System Mode User Vendor Keys Active Secure Boot Not Active Secure Boot [Disabled] Secure Boot Mode [Standard ID] CSM Support [Enabled] Key Management CSM Support Disabled Enabled Enable/Disable SSH Support. +: Select Screen T4: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESC: Exit Version 3.20.1874. Copyright (C) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc.

For the changes to take effect, press to save the settings and exit the BIOS Setup utility.

Step 4. Press during system boot to enter the BIOS Setup utility. Navigate to the Security tab and enter the Secure Boot menu. Set Secure Boot to Enabled.

Auto Setup Utility - Copyright TCP 2019 American Netsatrends, Inc. Security System Mode User Vendor Keys Active Secure Boot Not Active Secure Boot Disabled Secure Boot Node [Standard] OSK Support [Disabled] Key Management Secure Boot Disabled Enabled Secure Boot Feature is Active if Secure Boot is Enabled. Platform Key (PK) is enrolled and the System is in User mode. The mode change requires platform reset +: Select Screen TI: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: Several Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save A Exit ESC: Exit Version 2.20.1874. Copyright (C) 2019 American Netsatrends, Inc.

For the changes to take effect, press to save the settings and exit the BIOS Setup utility. Press during system boot to enter the BIOS Setup utility. Navigate to the Security tab and enter the Secure Boot menu. The following screen will appear.

Ratio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc. Security System Mode User Vendor Keys Active Secure Boot Active Secure Boot Enrolled Secure Boot Mode [Standard] OK Support [Unabled] Key Management Secure Boot Feature is Active if Secure Boot is Enabled, Platform Cry(PK) is enrolled and the System is In User mode. The mode change requires platform reset +: Select Screen 14: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. P1: General Help P2: Previous Values P3: Optimized Defaults P4: Save & Exit EOP: Exit

Note: Once Secure Boot is enabled, CSM Support will become disabled and the legacy environment is no longer valid. The authorized UEFI support such as UEFI OS, AOC UEFI FW, and UEFI PXE server is allowed.

F.4 Key Management Settings

The Key Management menu as shown below, which is available when Secure Boot Mode is set to Custom, allows the secure boot keys to be installed via the external device and be involved in the secure boot process.

Atoio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American News trends, Inc. Security Vendor Keys Valid Provision Factory Defaults Disasised ► Restore Factory Keys ► Reset To Setup Mode ► Export Secure Boot Variables ► Enroll Efi Image Device Guard Ready ► Removes 'UEFI DR' from DB ► Restore DB defaults Secure Boot Variable | Size | Keys | Key Source ► Platform Key(Hx) | 3468 | 1 Factory ► Key Exchange Keys | 1560 | 1 Factory ► Authorized Signatures | 4264 | 3 Factory ► Forbidden Signatures | 3724 | 77 Factory ► Authorized Timestamp | 1563 | 1 Factory ► DoRecovery Signatures | 1466 | 1 Factory Install Factory default Secure Boot keys after the platform reset and while the System is in Setup mode +: Select Screen #: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit END: Exit version 8.20.1876. Copyright (C) 2019 American News trends, Inc.

Provision Factory Defaults

This feature is to provision the default secure boot keys set by the manufacturer when the system is in the Setup mode. The options are Disabled and Enabled.

Aotio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American Hesatrends, Inc. Security Vendor Keys Valid Provision Factory Defaults Disabled Restore Factory Keys Reset To Setup Mode Export Security Boot variables Enroll Efi Image Device Guard Ready Remove 'UEFI CM' from DB Restore DB defaults Secure Boot variable | Size Platform Key(No) | 1466 Key Exchange Keys | 1560 Authorized Signatures | 4269 Forbidden Signatures | 3224 Authorized Timestamps | 1563 GoRecovery Signatures | 1466 Provision Factory Defaults Disabled Enabled +/-: Select Screen T1: Select Items Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESO: Exit

Select and press Yes to restore factory default secure boot keys and key variables. Also, it will reset the system to the User mode. The options are Yes and No.

Notio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc. Security Vendor Keys Valid Force System to User Mode. Installation factory default Secure Boot key databases Provision Factory Defaults D:\snj\esJ Restore Factory Keys Reset To Setup Mode Export Secure Boot variables Enroll Eff. Image Device Guard Ready Remove 'LEFI DA' from (A) Restore DB defaults Secure Boot Variable | 612 Platform Key(PK) | 148 Key Exchange Keys | 156 Authorized Signatures | 426 Forbidden Signatures | 3724 Authorized Timetamos | 15051 | 1 Factory DeRecovery Signatures | 14661 | 1 Factory Install factory defaults - Press 'Yes' to proceed 'No' to cancel Yes No +/- Select Screen TI: Select Item Enter: Select +/- Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESC: Exit Version 2.20.1874, Copyright (C) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc.

▶Reset To Setup Mode (available when the System Mode is in User mode)

Select and press Yes to clear all secure boot variables and reset the system to the Setup mode. The options are Yes and No.

Ratio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American Netatrends, Inc. Security Vendor Keys Valid Provision Factory Defaults [Disabled] Restore factory keys Reset To Setup Mode Export Secure Boot variables Enroll Efi Image Device Guard Ready Remove 'UEFI OK' from OE Restore DO defaults Secure Boot variable | S12 Platform Key(K) 148 Key Exchange Keys | 156 Authorization Signatures | 426 Forbidden Signatures | 372 Authorized TimeStamps | 1561 OsRecovery Signatures | 1465 | 1 Factory Reset To Setup Mode Deleting all variables will reset the System to Setup Mode Do you want to proceed? Yes No Select Screen T1: Select Item Enter: Select --: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save B Exit ESC: Exit Version 2.20.1274. Copyright (C) 2019 American Netatrends, Inc.

▶Export Secure Boot variables

Use this feature to export NVRAM content of secure boot variables to files in a root folder on a file system device.

Natio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc. Security Vendor Keys Valid Provision Factory Defaults (D:\mbo\es) Restore Factory Keys Reset To Setup Mode Export Secure Boot variables Enroll Ftl Image Device Guard Ready Remove 'UEFI DR' from DQ Restore DB defaults Secure Boot Variable | Size | Platform Key(PV) | 1466 Key Exchange Keys | 15601 Authorized Signatures[ 4269] Forbidden Signatures[ 3724] Authorized Timetants[ 15651] DelRecovery Signatures[ 1466] File System No Valid File System Available OK +: Select Screen T1: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Defaulted Defaults F4: Save A Exit ESO: Exit Version 2.20.1874, Copyright (C) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc.

▶Enroll Efi Image

This feature is to enroll SHA256 hash of the binary into the Authorized Signature Database (DB) and to allow the image to run in the secure boot mode.

Ratio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc. Securities Vendor Keys Valid Provision Factory Defaults [Disabled] Restore factory keys Reset To Setup Mode Export Secure Boot variables Enroll Efi Images Device Guard Ready Remove 'UEFI DA' from DB Restore ID defaults Secure Boot Variable | Size | Platform Key(Ps) 14661 Key Exchange Keys 15601 Authorized Signatures[14661] Forbinden Signatures[3764] Authorized Timestamps[15651] GoRecovery Timestamps[14661] File System No Valid File System Available Ok Allow the Image to run in Secure Boot mode. Enroll SHNCS Hash certificate of a PE Image Into Authorized Signature Database (db) +: Select Screen T4: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt... F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit E80: Exit Version 2.20.1874. Copyright (C) 2013 American Megatrends, Inc.

▶Remove 'UEFI CA' from DB (available when the system is not in Device Guard Ready)

Select and press Yes to remove Microsoft UEFI CA certificate from the DB. The options are Yes and No.

Auto Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American Megafriends, Inc. Security Vendor Keys Valid Device Guard ready system must not list 'Microsoft' UEFI CA' Certificate in Authorized Signature database (db) Provision Factory Defaults ID:disabled Restore Factory Keys Reset To Setup Mode Export Secure Boot variables Enroll Efi Dange Device Guard Ready Remove 'UEFI CA' from DB Restore DB defaults Secure Boot variable | SLS Platform Key(Hx) | 140 Key Exchange Keys | 150 Authorized Signatures | 426 Forbidden Signatures | 3724 Authorized Timestamps | 15651 | 1 Factory OsRecovery Signatures | 14661 | 1 Factory Remove 'UEFI CA' from DB Press 'Yes' to proceed 'No' to cancel Yes No +/- Select Screen T1: Select Item Enter: Select +/- Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESC: Exit Version 2.20.1874. Copyright (C) 2019 American Megafriends, Inc.

Select and press Yes to restore the DB variables to factory defaults. The options are Yes and No.

Auto Setup Utility - Copyright TO 2019 American Netsatrends, Inc. Security Vendor Keys Valid Provision Factory Defaults IDissuied Restore Factory Keys Reset To Setup Mode Export Secure Boot variables Enroll Eff These Device Guard Ready Remove 'UEFI On' from DB Restore DB defaults Secure Boot variable | SLa Platform Keys(%) | 145 Key Exchange Keys | 106 Authorized Signatures[ 466] Forbidden Signatures[ 3724] Authorized TimeStampol | 15631 | Factory OsRecovery Signatures[ 1466] | Factory Restore DB defaults Press 'Yes' to proceed 'No' to cancel Yes No ++: Select Screen T4: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESC: Exit Version 2.20.1874, Copyright © 2019 American Netsatrends, Inc.

*Refer to the following settings for keys and signatures related to secure boot.

▶ Platform Key (PK)

The Platform Key (PK), which is pre-installed in firmware during manufacturing, provides full control of the secure boot key hierarchy. The options are Details, Export, Update, and Delete. Select Details to display detailed information about PK. Select Export to save the current PKs to a FAT formatted USB flash drive. Select Update to load the factory defaults or load PKs from a file on the external device. Select Delete to clear the current PKs and reset the system to the Setup mode. See the following for more information on each option.

Aptio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc. Security Vendor Keys Valid Provision Factory Defaults ID:is Sudan Restore factory keys Reset To Setup Mode Export Secure Boot Variables Enroll EFI Image Device Guard Ready Remove 'UEFI DA' from DB Restore DB defaults Secure Boot variable | Size | No Platform Key(FX) 1465 Key Exchange Keys 15601 Authorized Signatures[ 4263 ] Forbidden Signatures[ 3764 ] Authorized TimeStamp[ 3565 ] DelRecovery Signatures[ 1465 ] Platform Key(FC) Details Export Update Delete Platform Key(FC) EVI Export Update Delete Platform Key(FC) EVI Export Update Delete Platform Key(FC) EVI Export Update Delete Platform Key(FC) EVI Export Update Delete Platform Key(FC) EVI Export Update Delete Platform Key(FC) EVI Export Update Delete Platform Key(FC) EVI Export Update Delete Platform Key(FC) EVI export Update Delete Platform Key(FC) EVI Export Update Delete Platform Key(FC) EVI Export Update Delete Platform Key(FC) EVI Export Update Delete Platform Key(FC) EVI Export Update Delete Platform Key(FC) EVI Export Update Delete Platform Key(FC) EVI Export Update Delete Platform Key(FC) EVI Export Ease Import: Select +:- Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Defaulted Defaults F4: Save B Exit ESC: Exit

Details: Use the arrow keys to select Details and press . It displays detailed information about PK as shown below.

Atrio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American Hegatrends, Inc. Security Vendor Keys valid Provision Factory Defaults ID(splied) Restore Factory Keys Reset To Setup mode Export Secure Boot variables Enroll Effi Image Device Guard Remove 'UEFI' Restore to do Secure Boot v 11 X.508 | 11 1423 28DC4851... || Security Violation Platform Key Key Exchange Keys | 1560 | 1 Factory Authorized Signatures | 4003 | 3 Factory Forbidden Signatures | 3724 | 71 Factory Authorized Time stamp | 1565 | 1 Factory DeRecovery Signatures | 1467 | 1 Factory Platform Key (FK) List: Sig.TypeCount | Size: Owner Build | Certificates Legend Main.Mixed Enroll Factory Defaults or load certificates from a *List 1.Public key certificate: a)EFLSIGNATURE_LIST b)EF1_CERT_XS09 (DEK) c)EF1_CERT_BSAD040 (bin) d)EF1_CERT_SHWYXX and DEF1 Image(ShWESG) Platform Key (FK) +: Select Screen TI: Select Item Enter: Select +/-1 Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESC: Exit

Export: Use the arrow keys to select Export. It is to save the current PKs to a FAT formatted USB flash drive.

Atrio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc. Security Vendor Keys Valid Provision Factory Defaults ID(sagued) ► Restore Factory Keys ► Reset To Setup Mode ► Export Security Boot variables ► Enroll Eff Damage Device Guard Ready ► Remove 'UEFI OK' from DB ► Restore DB defaults Secure Boot variable | Size | Ke ► Platform Key(K) ► Key Exchange Keys | 1560 ► Authorized Signatures | 4283 ► Forbidden Signatures | 3224 ► Authorized Timestamps | 1565 ► ORecovery Signatures | 1465 Platform Key(PC) Details Export Update Delete Platform Key(PC) Details Export Update Delete Enroll Factory Defaults or load certificates from a file: 1.Public key Certificates: AEFLSTONATURE_LIST b) EFL_CERT_XS09 (DER) c) EFL_CERT_BSS09A (bin) d) EFL_CERT_SHAWX 2.Authenticated UEFI Variable: 3.EFF PE/DOFF Omega(SHA25%) Key Source: Factory:External,Mixed +: Select Screen T1: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save R Exit ESC: EXIT version 3.20.1876. Copyright (C) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc.

Press and the following screen will appear.

Antio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc. Security Vendor Keys Valid Provision Factory Defaults Disapplied Restore Factory Keys Reset TO Setup Mode Export Secure Boot variables Enroll Eli Image Device Guard Ready Remove 'UEFI ON' Restore OE default Secure Boot Variable Platform Key(s) Key Exchange Keys | 1560 | 1 Factory Authorized Signatures | 4263 | 3 Factory Perbidden Signatures | 3724 | 71 Factory Authorized TimeStamps | 1565 | 1 Factory OSRecovery Signatures | 1465 | 1 Factory Select a Fills system Appl(a)24100, 01\FC11410\USE(14.0)\E(Fart1, Sig 7) Enroll Factory Defaults or load certificates from a file: Public key Certificate: a)EFLCEINATURE_LIST d)EFL_CERT_XSVM (DER) c)EFL_CERT_BSAO(N8 (Din) d)EFL_CERT_SHAWAY 2 Authenticated USEI COFF Image(DNA256) External_Mixed +: Select Screen T1: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESC: Exit Version 2.20.1276. Copyright (C) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc.

Note: Refer to the right panel of the screen for the file formats accepted.

Update: Use the arrow keys to select Update. It is to load the factory defaults or load PKs from a file on the external device.

Ratio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American Newsrends, Inc. Security Vendor Keys Valid Provision Factory Defaults ID(Enabled) Restore Factory Keys Reset To Setup Mode Export Secure Boot Variables Enroll Efi Image Device Build Monday Remove 'UEFI OK' from DB Restore DB defaults Secure Boot Variable | Size Ka Platform Key(PCI) 14651 Key Exchange Keys | 15601 Authorized Signatures[1] 43691 Forbidden Signatures[1] 37241 Authorized Timestamps[1] 15651 GoRecovery Signatures[1] 14651 Platform Key(PCI) Details Export Update Delete 3! Factory 7?! Factory 1! Factory 1! Factory Enroll Factory Defaults or load certificates from a file: IPublic Key Certificate: uEFI-SONATURE_LIST vEFI_CERT_XS09 (DERA) c)UEFI_CERT_BS4040 (Upin) v)EFI_CERT_SNWKX 2. Authenticated UEFI Variable: 3.EFI PE/COFF Image(SNA256) KEY Source: Factory,External,Mixed +: Select Screen T#: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F#: General Help F#: Previous Values F#: Optimized Defaults F#: Save & Exit ESGA: Exit Version 2.20.1274. Copyright (C) 2019 American Newsrends, Inc.

Press and the following screen will appear.

Autio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc. Security Vendor Keys Valid Provision Factory Defaults (Dissubled) Restore Factory Keys Reset To Setup Mode Export Secure Boot variables Enroll Eff Image Device Guard Ready Remove 'UEFI OE' from DB Restore DB defaults Secure Boot variable | 54 Fistural Key(s) Key Exchange Keys Authorized Signatures Fortidden Signatures Authorized TimeStamps | 1568 OsRecovery Signatures | 1469 Update Press 'Yes' to load factory default 'PK' OR 'NO' to load IT from a file on external media Yes No 11 Factory Enroll Factory Defaults on load certificates from a file: I.Public key Certificates: a:REFI:SIGNATURE_LIST b:REFI:CERT_DWORD (DEM) c:REFI:CERT_PE&O&O (band d:REFI:CERT_SHIKOX) Authenticated UEFI Rule: FI PE/COFF IMAGE(SHA255) Sources: tory,External,Mixed Select Screen Enter: Select Item +/-= Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit EXIT: Exit

To load the factory defaults, navigate to Yes and press . The following screen will appear.

Antio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American Megastrends, Inc. Security Vendor Keys Valid Provision Factory Defaults D:\sbd\eds Restore Factory Keys Reset To Setup Mode Export Secure Boot variables Enroll Efi Image Device Guard Ready Remove 'UEFI ON' from DB Restore DB defaults Secure Boot variable | Size | keys | Key Aviation Key(Ex) 1560 | 1 Fact Key Exchange Keys | 1560 | 1 Fact Authorized Signatures1 4263 | 3 Fact Forbidden Signatures1 3724 | 791 Fact Authorized Timestamps1 3505 | 1 Factory GoRecovery Signatures1 1461 | 1 Factory Update Success Ok Enroll Factory Defaults or load certificates from a file: 1. Public Key Certificate: aDFI.SIGNATURE_LIST bDFI.CERT_USO8 (DER) cDFI.CERT_BSAC048 (BIN) dDFI.CERT_SHAWX 2. Authenticated UEPI Variable: 3. EPI HT/CFFF (Image(SHACK)) Key Source: Factory,External,Mixed ++: Select Screen T4: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Move & Exit ESC: Exit Version 2.30.1874. Copyright (C) 2019 American Megastrends, Inc.

To load PKs from a file on the external device, navigate to No and press .

Audio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American Newsrends, Inc. Security Vendor Keys Modified Provision Factory Defaults D:\100\167 Restore Factory Keys Reset To Setup Mode Export Secure Boot variables Enroll Efi Dags Device Guard Ready Remove 'UEFI ON' from No Restore OR defaults Secure Boot variable | 51 Fisfora Key(No) Key Exchange Keys Authorized Signatures Forbidden Signatures Authorized TimeStamps | 356 ORecovery Signatures | 3466 | Update Press 'Yes' to load factory default 'PK' or 'No' to load it from a file on external media Yes No Enroll Factory Defaults or load certificates from a file: 1. Public key certificate: a)EFL.SIGNATURE_LIST b)EFL.CERT.VSBY (DBP) c)EFL.CERT.BSAC048 (bin) d)EFL.CERT.SHAVX Authenticated UEFI able: FE PE/COFF Dags(DWCSG) Sourder tary.External.Hlived Select Screen 1: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESC: Exit

When the following screen appears, select the USB flash drive that contains the desired file.

AutoIO Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American NewsTrends, Inc. security Vendor Keys Provision Factory Defaults Restore Factory Keys Reset To Setup Mode Export Secure Boot variations Dewell Efi Image Device Guard Ready Remove 'UEFI OK' from DB Restore DB defaults Secure Boot variable | SIZE | C# Platform Key(F) Key Exchange Keys | 15601 Authorized Signatures | 45631 Forbidden Signatures | 37241 Authorized Timestamps | 15631 DoRecovery Signatures | 14661 Select File (ChargedSetup) (dOS) KET2 DH mmp (Scl-lot) MILIN2 Lisllmax LiveOS Update Insgpox_lsp PK KEY db dbr dbt dbx BOUTEX.LGS NVRSE_SNPAL.txt AutoIcon.jpg Enroll Factory Defaults or load certificates from a file: Public Key Certificates: aDEFI SIGNATURE LIST bDEFI CERT_XS09 (DER) cDEFI CERT_BEADNO (WIN) dDEFI CERT_SHAWX 2 Authenticated UEFI Variable: B.EFI PE/OFF IMAGE(DWAZS) Key Source: Factory,External,Mixed +: Select Screen TI: Select Items Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESC: Exit Version 2.20.1274. Copyright (C) 2019 American NewsTrends, Inc.

Ratio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American Negatrends, Inc. security Vendor Keys Provision Factory Defaults ► Restore Factory Keys ► Reset To Setup Mode ► Export Secure Boot variables ► Earnell Efi Image Device Guard Ready ► Remove 'UEFI OR' from DB ► Restore DB defaults Secure Boot variable | Size | Keys ► Factors Key(%) | 1468 | ► Key Exchange Keys | 1560 | ► Authorized Signatures[ ] 4203 | ► Forbidden Signatures[ ] 3241 | ► Authorized TimeStamp[ ] 1565 | ► DoRecovery Signatures[ ] 1466 | Import File Format Public Key Certificates MUTHEPOTicated Variable Enroll Factory Defaults or Load certificates from a + - 1. Public Key Certificates: aOFFI SIGNATURE_LIST bEFT CERT_XSOP (DB) c)EFT CERT_BAS04B (bind) dEFT CERT_SHOW? 2. Authenticated UEFI Variable: 3. EFI PE/COFF Image(SNA256) Key Source: Factory.External_Mixed +: Select Screen T1: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit GSD: Exit version 2.26.182% Copyright (C) 2019 American Negatrends, Inc.

Mio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc. Security Vendor Keys Modified Provision Factory Defaults Disabled Restore Factory Keys Reset To Setup Mode Export Secure Boot variables Enroll Efi Image Device Guard Ready Remove 'DEFI OR' from E Restore DO defaults Secure Boot variable | 8 Platform Key(s) Key Exchange Keys | 1 Authorized Signatures | 4 Forbidden Signatures | 3/4 Authorized Timetamost | 1651 1 Factory GetRecovery Signatures | 1461 1 Factory Update Confirm update of "PK" with content from the file PK Yes No Enroll Factory Defaults on load certificates from a +file I.Public Key Certificates: DEFLSIGNATURE_LIST DEFL CERT_XSOS (PER) DEFL CERT_BRASNRA (IND) DEFL CERT_SHARKX Authenticated UEFI able EPL PE/COPF IMAGE(DNA256) SOURCE: Bony.External.Hixed +: Select Screen TI: Select Item enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. PI: General Help PE: Previous Values PA: Optimized Defaults PA: Save & Exit ESCI: EXIT Version 5.20.1874; Copyright (C) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc.

Press and the following screen will appear.

Netto Setup utility - Copyright IC7 2019 American Meastrends, Inc. Security Vendor Keys Provision Factory Defaults ■ Restore Factory Keys ■ Reset To Setup Mode ■ Export Secure Boot variables ■ Enroll Effi Image Device Guard Ready ■ Remove 'UEFI DA' from DB ■ Restore ID defaults Secure Boot variable | Size | Keys | Key Platform Key(s) ■ Key Exchange Keys | 1560 | 1 Fact ■ Authorized Signatures | 4263 | 3 Fact ■ Forbidden Signatures | 8741 | 77 Fact ■ Authorized Timetrapods | 1565 | 1 Fact ■ Oshecvery Signatures | 1465 | 1 Fact Modified ID (selected) Update Success OK Enroll Factory Defaults or load certificates from a file: I.Public key Certificate: a) EFL SIGNATURE_LIST b) EFL CERT_XS09 (DER) c) EFL CERT_RBAC049 (bin) d) EFL CERT_SHAWX 2. Authenticated UFI's Variable: 3. Effi PE/COFF Image(DNA25): Key Source: Factory, External,Mixed +: Select Screen T4: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: Several Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit! ESC: Exit Version 2.20.1876. Copyright (C) 2013 American Megastands, Inc.

Delete: Use the arrow keys to select Delete and press to clear the current PKs and reset the system to the Setup mode.

Ratio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc. Security Vendor Keys Modified Provision Factory Defaults [0/10/10/10] Restore Factory Keys Reset To Setup Mode Export Secure Boot variables Enroll Effi Image Device Guard Ready Remove 'UEFI OK' from OD Restore ID defaults Secure Boot variable | Size | No Platform Key(No) Key Exchange Keys | 15601 Authorized Signatures | 42693 Forbidden Signatures | 37241 Authorized Timestamps | 15651 OsRecovery Signatures | 14667 Platform Key(No) Details Export Update Delete Platform Key(No) Details Export Update Delete Eiff.1 Factory Defaults or load certificates from a file: Public key certificates: a) EFF.LSIGNATURE_LIST b) EFFI_CERT_XS09 (DER) c) EFFI_CERT_BREAD040 (BIN) d) EFFI_CERT_SHAWXX 2: Authenticated UEFI Variable: 3_EFF PC/COFF IMAGE(SHAESG) KEY SOURCE: Factory:External,Mixed +: Select Screen TI: Select Item Enter: Select +/-1 Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESC: Exit Version 2.20.1274. Copyright (E) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc.

Ratio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc. Security Vendor Keys Modified Provision Factory Defaults ID=DISABLED Restore Factory Keys Reset To Setup Mode Export Secure Boot variables Enroll Efi Image Device Guard Ready Remove 'EEFI CM' from D Restore OD defaults Secure Boot variable | S Platform KeyPhi Key Exchange Keys | S Authorized Signatures | S Forbloden Signatures | S Authorized TimeStamps | S OsRecovery Signatures | S Delete Security Key/Database WARNING: Removing 'FK' will reset the System to Setup/Audit Mode OK Enroll Factory Defaults or load certificates from a file: Public key certificate: a)EFLSIGNATURE_LIST b)EFL CERT_XS04 (DB) c)EFL CERT_BREAD48 (bin) d)EFL CERT_SHAWX Authenticated UEFI File F1 PE/DIFF Image(CHWES) Source: Binary.External.HMixed +:- Select Screen T1: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit EICI Exit Version 2.20.1274. Copyright (C) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc.

▶Key Exchange Key

The Key Exchange Key (KEK), which is held by the operating system vendor, can be updated by the holder of the PK and be used by secure boot to protect access to signatures databases. The options are Details, Export, Update, Append, and Delete. Select Details to display detailed information of KEKs. Select Export to save the current KEKs to a FAT formatted USB flash drive. Select Update to load the factory defaults or load KEKs from a file on the external device. Select Append to load the factory defaults or load KEKs from a file on the external device. Select Delete to clear the current KEKs or to delete only one certificate from the key database. (Refer to page 189 for the Export process. Refer to pages 190, 191, 192, and 193 for the Update process.)

Auto Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American Mostrends, Inc. Security Vendor Keys Modified Provision Factory Defaults (Disabled) Restore Factory Keys Reset To Setup mode Export Secure Boot variables Enroll Effi Image Device Guard Ready Remove 'IEFI DA' from DB Restore DB defaults Secure Boot variable | Size Fe Platform Key(N) | 1465 Key Exchange Keys | 1500 Authorized Signatures | 4263 Forbidden. Signatures | 5724 Authorized Timestamps | 1565 OSRecovery Signatures | 1465 Key Exchange Keys Details Export Update Append Delete Enroll Factory Defaults or load certificates from a 1181 1. Public Key Certificates: a) EFL SIGNATURE_LIST b) EFL_CERT_XSOP (DER) c) EFL_CERT_BSA040B (DIN) d) EFL_CERT_SHAWXX 2. Authenticated EEFI Variable: 3. EFI REDOFF Image(BHA256) Key Source: Factory.External,Mixed +: Select Screen TI: Select Item Enter: Select +/-1 Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESG: Exit Version 2.20.1874, Copyright (C) 2019 American Mostrends, Inc.

Append: Use the arrow keys to select Append.

Aptio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American Hegatrends, Inc. Security Vendor Keys Provision Factory Defaults Restore Factory Keys Reset To Setup mode Export Secure Boot variables Enroll EFI Image Device Guard Ready Remove 'UEFI DA' from DB Restore DB defaults Secure Boot variable | Size | No Platform Key(N) | 1466 Key Exchange Keys | 1467 Authorized Signatures | 4563 Forbidden Signatures | 3724 Authorized Timestamp | 1585 OsRecovery Signatures | 1466 Modified D:\100\100\1 Key Exchange Keys Details Export Update Append Delete 71 Factory 1 Factory 1 Factory Enroll Factory Defaults or load certificates from a file: 1. Public Key Certificate: a) DFI SIGNATURE_LIST b) DFI CERT_XSOS (DER) c) DFT CERT_BBAD04B (BIN) d) DFI CERT_SHAWOO 2. Authenticated UEFI Variable: 3. EFI PE/COFF Image(SHAESG) Key Source: Factory, External,Mixed +/- Select Screen TI: Select Item Enter: Select +/-i Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Detinized Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESC: Exit

Press and the following screen will appear.

Ratio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc. Security Vendor Keys Provision Factory Defaults Restore factory keys Reset To Setup Mode Export Secure Boot variables Enroll Efi Image Device Guard Ready Remove 'IEFI OR' from O Restore ID defaults Secure Boot variable | 1 Platforms Key(Th) Key Exchange keys Authorized Signatures Forbidden Signatures Authorized Timestamps 156 OscRecovery Signatures 14661 Modified IDIsabled Append Press 'Yes' to load factory default 'KEK' or 'No' to load IT from a file on external media Yes No Enroll Factory Defaults or load certificates from a file: 1.Public key certificate: a)IEFLSDVATURE_LIST b)IEFLCERT_X809 (DEM) c)IEFLCERT_BSADN8 (BIN) d)IEFLCERT_SHWXX Authenticated UEFI File: F1: PE/COFF Image(SHA25) Source: tary.External,Mixed Select Screen T4: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F5: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESC: Exit

To load the factory defaults, navigate to Yes and press . The following screen will appear.

Atoio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2017 American Negatrends, Inc. Security Provision Factory Defaults [Disabled] Reset to Setup Mode Encoll Efi Image Save all Secure Boot variables Secure Boot variable | Size | KeySWI Key Source Platform Key(H) 1466 | 11 Default Key Exchange Keys | 1560 | 11 Default Authorized Signatures | 4289 | 91 Def Forbloden Signatures | 3724 | 771 Def Authorized TimeStamp | 1565 | 11 Def Oshccovery Signatures | 1466 | 11 Def Append Success OK Enroll Factory Defaults or load certificates from a file: 1.Public key Certificate in: a)EPI_SIGNATURE_LIST b)EPI_CERT_XSOS (DER encoded) c)EPI_CERT_BREAD4B (Din) d)EPI_LEKT_SHA256_204_5i2 2.Authenticated HEFI Variable 3.EPI PE/CPPF Image(SHA256) Key Source: Default,External,Mixed,Test +: Select Screen TI: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt: P1: General Help P2: Previous Values P3: Optimized Defaults P4: Save & Exit ECC: Exit version 2.19.1208. Copyright (C) 2017 American Negatrends, Inc.

To load KEKs from a file on the external device, navigate to No and press . Refer to pages 192 and 193 on how to load KEKs from a file on the external device.

Auto Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc. Security Vendor Keys Modified Provision Factory Defaults [0] [0] [0] Restore Factory Keys Result to Setup Mode Export Secure Boot variables Enroll Effi Image Device Guard Ready Remove 'UEFI OR' from Do Restore OS defaults Secure Boot variable | S Platform Key(s) Key Exchange Keys | 1 Authorized Signature(1) Forbidden Signature(1) Authorized Timestamp(1) OsRecovery Signature(1) [0] 11 Factory Append Press 'Yes' to load factory default 'KEK' or 'No' to load IT from a file on external media Yes No Enroll Factory Defaults or load certificates from a file: 1. Public Key Certificate: a) EFLLSIGNATURE_LIST b) EFL CERT_XSOS (DER) c) EFT CERT_EPAOBO (bin) d) EFL CERT_SHAKXX Authenticated UEFI able: FI PE/DOFF Image(SHAUSE) Sources: tory.External,Mixed Select Screen 14: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Datalized Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESO: Exit Version 2.30.3874. Copyright (C) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc.

Delete: Use the arrow keys to select Delete and press . Navigate to Yes and press to clear the current KEKs.

Ratio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American MegaTrends, Inc. Security Vendor Keys Provision Factory Defaults Restore factory keys Reset To Setup mode Export Secure Boot Variables Enroll Efi Image Device Guard Ready Remove 'UEFI OR' from DB Restore to defaults Secure Boot Variable | SLoe Ka Platform Key(Dy) | 1466 Key Exchange Keys | 3560 Authorized Signatures[ 4263] Forbidden Signatures[ 3724] Authorized TimeStrans[ 1563] OsRecovery Signatures[ 1466] Modified ID is possible Key Exchange keys Details Export Update Append Delete 71 Factory 1 Factory 1 Factory Enroll Factory Defaults or load certificates from a file: 1.Public Key Certificate) a)EFL SIGNATURE_LIST b)EFL_CERT_XSOS (DBM) c)EFL_CERT_BREAD048 (bin) d)EFL_CERT_SHAWX 2.Authenticated UEFI Variable 3.EFI PER DIFF IMAGE(SHAES) KEY SOURCE: Factory.External,Mixed +/-: Select Screen TI: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt: F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESC: Exit version 2.20.1374. Copyright (C) 2019 American MegaTrends, Inc.

Notio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc. Security Vendor Keys Modified Provision Factory Defaults [Disabled] Restore Factory Keys Reset To Setup Mode Export Secure Boot variables Enroll Efi Damage Device Guard Ready Remove 'LEFT OR' from DE Restore On defaults Secure Boot Variable | S Platform Key(D) Key Exchange Keys Authorized Signatures Forbidden Signatures Authorized Timestamps | 36 OscDiscovery Signatures | 1461 1 Factory Delete Security Key/Database Press 'Yes' to delete the variable, or 'No' to delete only a certificate from the key database Yes No Enroll Factory Defaults or load certificates from a file: 1.Public key Certificate: a)EFLSIGNATURE_LIST b)EFL CERT_XSOS (DER) c)EFT CERT_BREAD08 (BIN) d)EFL CERT_SHAWXY Authenticated UEFI able: FI PE/IOFF Image(###56) Source: tory.external,Mixed Select Screen TI: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values FS: Optimized Defaults F3: Save A Exit ESC: Exit

Navigate to No and press to delete only one certificate from the key database.

Aio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American Hegatrends, Inc. security Vendor keys Modified Enroll Factory defaults on load certificates from a file: Provision Factory Defaults DIsabled 1Public Key Certificates aEPI_SIGNATURE LIST bEPI_COUNT_XSUN (DBN) cEPI_COUNT_REABOGS (bind) dEPI_COUNT_SPARKS Device Remove Restore Select a Signature List to be removed from a key database List: Six, PageCount | Size | owner QUID | Certificate Legend X.508 | 1 | 1516 | T7FMS-BD-... | Microsoft Corporation KEK CR 2011 Key Exchange Keys 1501 | 1 Factory Authorized Signatures 4263 | 3 Factory Forbidden Signatures 3924 | 71 Factory Authorized Timestamps 1565 | 1 Factory OSRecovery Signatures 1456 | 1 Factory +: Select screen 14: Select Item Enter: Select +/- Change Opt. C1: General Help P2: Previous Values P3: Optimized Defaults P4: Save & Exit CGI: Exit Version 2.20.1274. Copyright (C) 2019 American Hegatrends, Inc.

▶ Authorized Signatures

Authorized Signature Database (DB) contains authorized signing certificates and digital signatures. The options are Details, Export, Update, Append, and Delete. Select Details to display detailed information of Authorized Signatures. Select Export to save the current DB to a FAT formatted USB flash drive. Select Update to load the factory defaults or load DB from a file on the external device. Select Append to add variables to the existing DB. Select Delete to clear the current DB or to delete only one certificate from the key database. (Refer to page 189 for the Export process. Refer to pages 190, 191, 192, and 193 for the Update process. Refer to pages 194 and 195 for the Append process. Refer to page 196 for the Delete process.)

Notio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American Negatrends, Inc. security Vendor Keys Provision Factory Defaults Restore Factory Keys Reset To Setup Mode Export Secure Boot variables Enroll Efi Image Device Guard Ready Remove 'EFT OK' from DB Restore DB defaults Secure Boot variable | Size Ka Platform Key(Th) | 1465 Key Exchange Keys | 1560 Authorized Signatures[ 4363] Forbidden Signatures[ 3724] Authorized Timestampos[ 1565] (Discovery Signatures)[ 1466] Modified (Disabled) Authorized Signatures Details Export Update Append Delete +/- Select Screens T1: Select Item Enter: Select +/- Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Defaulted Defaults F4: Save B Exit ESG: Exit Enroll Factory Defaults or load certificates from a file: 1.Public Key Certificates: aEFTLSNATURE_LIST bEFTLSERT_XS(FD) cEFTLSERT_RISROAD(Bind dEFTLSERT_SHRDX 2.Authenticates EFTI Variable: 3.EFT PE/DOY (Image(SHACSA)) KEY SOURCE: Factory,External,Mixed Version 2.20.1874, Copyright (C) 2019 American Negatrends, Inc.

▶Forbidden Signatures

Forbidden Signature Database (DBX), which is the inverse of DB, contains forbidden certificates and digital signatures. The options are Details, Export, Update, Append, and Delete. Select Details to display detailed information about Forbidden Signatures. Select Export to save the current DBX to a FAT formatted USB flash drive. Select Update to load the factory defaults or load DBX from a file on the external device. Select Append to add variables to the existing DBX. Select Delete to clear the current DBX or to delete only one certificate from the key database. (Refer to page 189 for the Export process. Refer to pages 190, 191, 192, and 193 for the Update process. Refer to pages 194 and 195 for the Append process. Refer to page 196 for the Delete process.)

Auto Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American Guatemala, Inc. Security Vendor Keys Modified Provision Factory Defaults ID(Disabled) Restore Factory Keys Reset To Setup Mode Export Secure Boot variables Delroll Eff. Range Device Guard Ready Remove 'UEFI Oil' from DB Restore DB defaults Secure Boot variable | $126 | Ka Platform Key(K) | 1466 Key Exchange Keys | 1560 Authorized Signatures | 4561 Forbidden Signatures Details Export Update Append Delete T/I Factory Authorized Timestamps | 1561 | 1 Factory OsRecovery Signatures | 1461 | 1 Factory Forblnden Signatures Details Export Update Append Delete Enroll Factory Defaults or load certificates from a file: LPublic key certificate: dIEFLSIGNATURE_LIST dIEFLERT_XS09 (DER) dIEFLERT_BSA04B (Din) dIEFLERT_SHAVXX 2 Authenticated UEFI Variable: 3.EFI PECOFF Image(SWAP5a) Key Source: Factory.Enternal,Mixed +: Select Screen TI: Select Item Enter Select +/-1 Change Opt: F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save it Exit ESC: Exit Version 2.20.1274. Copyright (C) 2019 American Guatemala, Inc.

▶ Authorized TimeStamps

Authorized Timestamp Database (DBT) is used to issue and check signed time stamp certificates. The options are Details, Export, Update, Append, and Delete. Select Details to display detailed information on Authorized Timestamps. Select Export to save the current DBT to a FAT formatted USB flash drive. Select Update to load the factory defaults or load DBT from a file on the external device. Select Append to add variables to the existing DBT. Select Delete to clear the current DBT or to delete only one certificate from the key database. (Refer to page 189 for the Export process. Refer to pages 190, 191, 192, and 193 for the Update process. Refer to pages 194 and 195 for the Append process. Refer to page 196 for the Delete process.)

AdT10 Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2017 American Regatrends, Inc. Security Provision Factory Defaults [Disabled] Reset to Setup Mode Enroll Eff Image Save all Secure Boot Variables Secure Boot variable | Size | Keyset | Key Source Platform Key(DO) | 1456 Key Exchange Keys | 1550 Authorized Signatures | 4859 Forboden Signatures | 5724 Authorized Timestamps | 1556 OSRecovery Signatures | 1456 Key Management Save to File Set New Append Erase Enroll Factory Defaults or load certificates from a +1: 1.Public Key Certificate ins a:EPI_SIGNATURE_LIST b:EPI_CERT_X500 (DDR encoded) c:EPI_CERT_BHA204B (bin) d:EPI_CERT_SHA256,394,512 2.Authenticated UEFI Variable 3.EPI PE/COFF: Dwage(SHA256) Key Source: Default,External,Mixed,Test +: Select Screen T1: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESG: Exit Version 2.19.1268, Copyright (C) 2017 American Regatrends, Inc.

▶OsRecovery Signatures

OsRecovery Signatures Database (DBR) contains secure boot authorized recovery variables. The options are Details, Export, Update, Append, and Delete. Select Details to display detailed information of OsRecovery Signatures. Select Export to save the current DBR to a FAT formatted USB flash drive. Select Update to load the factory defaults or load DBR from a file on the external device. Select Append to add variables to the existing DBR. Select Delete to clear the current DBR or to delete only one certificate from the key database. (Refer to page 189 for the Export process. Refer to pages 190, 191, 192, and 193 for the Update process. Refer to pages 194 and 195 for the Append process. Refer to page 196 for the Delete process.)

Avio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2017 American Negatrends, Inc. Security Provision Factory Defaults [Disabled] ► Reset to Setup Mode ► Encoll Eff Image ► Save all Secure Boot Variables Secure Boot Variable | Size | Key&W | Key Source ► Platform Key(OK) | 1466 ► Key Exchange Keys | 1566 ► Authorized Signatures | 4269 ► Forbidden Signatures | 3724 ► Authorized TimeStands | 1565 ► Discovery Signatures | 1466 Key Management Save to File Set New Append Erase Enroll Factory Defaults or Load certificates from a file: 1.Public Key Certificate in: a:EPI_SIGNATURE_LIST b:EPI_CERT_X509 (DEM encoded) c:EPI_COUNT_BXA0048 (bin) d:EPI_COUNT_SHA006_984_512 2.Authenticated EEFI WorldJe 3.EPI PERCOFF Images(SHA256) Key Source: Default,External,Mixed,Test +: Select Screen T1: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Datalized Defaults F4: Save & Exit GOD: Exit version 2.13.1208. Copyright (C) 2017 American Negatrends, Inc.

Appendix G

Configuring iSCSI Settings

Internet small computer system interface (iSCSI) is a protocol that defines how block-level data transports between the iSCSI initiator and iSCSI target over an Internet protocol (IP) network. The iSCSI initiator (client/host) enables a connection to the iSCSI target and initiates I/O requests. The iSCSI target can be a group of storage devices or an intermediate device attached to storage devices. The iSCSI initiator and iSCSI target must connect to an IP network. To have iSCSI settings available, refer to instructions stated in the G.1 section. The G.2 section explains iSCSI settings.

G.1 PCIe/PCI/PnP Features

Press during system boot to enter the BIOS Setup utility. Navigate to the Advanced tab. Use the arrow keys to select PCIe/PCI/PnP Configuration and press to access the menu items.

Ratio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2017 American Megatrends, Inc. Main Advanced Event Logs PMI Security Boot Save & Exit ▶ Boot Feature ▶ CPU Configuration ▶ Chipset Configuration ▶ Server ME Configuration ▶ PCH SATA Configuration ▶ PCH SATA Configuration ▶ PCIe/PCI/PDF Configuration ▶ Super III Configuration ▶ Serial Port Console Redirection ▶ ADMI Settings ▶ Trusted Computing ▶ ISCCI Configuration ▶ Intel(R) Virtual RFID on CPU PCI, PCI-X and PCI Express Settings. +/-: Select Screen 1#: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESG: Exit Version 2.13.1208. Copyright (C) 2017 American Megatrends, Inc.

Note: Be sure to have configuration information for the iSCSI initiator and iSCSI target before starting iSCSI settings.

Onboard LAN1 Option ROM

Use the arrow keys to select Onboard LAN1 Option ROM and press . The options are Disabled, Legacy, and EFI. Set this feature to EFI.

PCI Bus Driver Version PCI Devices Common Settings: Above 45 Decoding SR-0DV Support HMO HIGH Base HMO HIGH Angularity Size PCI PDBP/SPAR Support Maximum Read Request HMO F0 Base NWE Firmware Source VIA Priority PCI SLOT1 PCI-E 3.0 X4IN X6I CPU SLOTS PCI-E 3.0 X8 OPRON CPU SLOTS PCI-E 3.0 X8 OPRON CPU SLOTS PCI-E 3.0 X16 OPRON CPU SLOTS PCI-E 3.0 X16 OPRON R.I2 PCI-E 3.0 X4 OPRON Onboard LAN Device Onboard LAN1 Option ROM Onboard LAN2 Option ROM Onboard Video Option ROM Network Stack Configuration [Enabled] [Disabled] [SSF] [2766] [Enabled] [Auto] [PSI] Onboard LAN1 Option ROM Disabled Legacy EPC [Legacy] [Legacy] [Enabled] [Legacy] [Legacy] Select which firmware function to be loaded for onboard LAN1. ++: Select Screen T1: Select Item Enter: Select +/- Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESC: Exit Version 2.19.1268, Copyright (C) 2017 American Newsrends, Inc.

Note: If Onboard LAN1 Option ROM is set to EFI, all features for onboard LAN option ROM will be set to EFI by the EFI driver. Additionally, these features will become unavailable except Onboard LAN1 Option ROM.

Network Stack Configuration

Use the arrow keys to select Network Stack Configuration and press to access the menu items.

PCI Bus Driver Version PCI Devices Common Settings: Above 4G Decoding SR-10V Support MMCI High Audio MMCI High Granularity Size PCI PERS/SEER Support Maximum Read Request MMCI0 Base NAME Firmware Source VAR Priority PCI SLOTS PCI-E 3.0 X4(26 X8) OPRDM CPU SLOTS PCI-E 3.0 X5 OPRDM CPU SLOTS PCI-E 3.0 X6 OPRDM CPU SLOTS PCI-E 3.0 X16 OPRDM CPU SLOTS PCI-E 3.0 X16 OPRDM H.2 PCI-E 3.0 X4 OPRDM Onboard LAN Device Onboard LAN1 Option ROM Onboard Video Option ROM Network Stock Configuration AS.01.1E [Enabled] [Disabled] [Set] [2560] [Disabled] [Auto] [20] [AMI Native Support] [Onboard] [Legacy] [Legacy] [Legacy] [Legacy] [Legacy] [Legacy] [Legacy] [Legacy] [Legacy] [Legacy] [Legacy] [Legacy] [Legacy] [Legacy] [Legacy] [Legacy] [Legacy] [Legacy] [Legacy] [Legacy] [Legacy] [Legacy] [Legacy] [Legacy] [Legacy] [Legacy] [Legacy] [Legacy] [Legacy] [Legacy] [Legacy] [Legacy] [Legacy] [Legacy]

Ipv4 PXE Support/Ipv6 PXE Support

To enable lpv4/lpv6 PXE boot support, use the arrow keys to select and set lpv4 PXE Support/Ipv6 PXE Support to Enabled.

Antio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2017 American Megatrends, Inc. Advanced Network Stock [Enabled] IPv4 PXE Support [Enabled] IPv4 HTTP Support [Disabled] IPv6 PXE Support [Enabled] IPv6 HTTP Support [Disabled] PXE boot unit time 0 Media detect count 1 Enable IPv4 PXE Boot Support. If disabled IPv4 PXE boot option will not be created ++: Select Screen T4: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Have B Exit ESQ: Exit Version 2.19.1808. Copyright (C) 2017 American Megatrends, Inc.

Note: Enable both lpv4 PXE Support and lpv6 PXE Support to have iSCSI settings available. In some cases, enabling either one feature may also have iSCSI settings available depending on the configuration of iSCSI initiator and iSCSI target.

For the changes to take effect, save settings, and restart the system. Press during system boot to enter the BIOS Setup utility. When the BIOS main screen appears, navigate to the Advanced tab. Use the arrow keys to select iSCSI Configuration and press to access the menu items.

Auto Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2017 American Megatrends, Inc. Main Advanced Event Logs IPMI Security Boot Save a Exit ▶ Boot Feature ▶ GPU Configuration ▶ Chipset Configuration ▶ Server NE Configuration ▶ PDS SATA Configuration ▶ PCH SATA Configuration ▶ FCIE/PCI/PDF Configuration ▶ Super IO Configuration ▶ Serial Port Console Redirection ▶ ADPI Settings ▶ Trusted Computing ▶ IECSI Configuration ▶ Intel(CK) Virtual RMS on CPU ▶ Intel(CK) Ethernet Connection X722 for 10GBASE-T - AC:IP:6B1... ▶ Intel(CK) Ethernet Connection X722 for 10GBASE-T - AC:IP:6B1... Configure the iSCSI parameters. +: Select Screen 1#: Select Ives Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESC: Exit Version 2.15.1298. Copyright (C) 2017 American Megatrends, Inc.

G.2 Configuring iSCSI Settings

iSCSI Initiator Name

Use this feature to enter the unique initiator name in iSCSI qualified name (IQN) format.

Ratio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc. Advanced ICSI Initiator Name Iqn.kid.sxc1.iscsl_ Add an Attempt Attempt 1 Attempt 2 Delete Attempts Change Attempt Order ICSI Initiator Name Iqn.kid.sxc1.iscsl_ The worldwide unique name of iCSI Initiator. Only IOM format is accepted. Range is from 4 to 223 +1: Select Screen T4: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESC4 Exit Version 3.20.1874. Copyright (C) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc.

Add an Attempt

Use the arrow keys to select Add an Attempt.

Add to Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American Negatrends, Inc. advanced ICSI Initiator Name ign kid.snc1.icsi Add on Attempt ► Add on Attempt ► Attempt 1 ► Attempt 2 ► Delete Attempts ► Change Attempt Order +: Select Screen #: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit E00: Exit Version 2.20.1874. Copyright (C) 2019 American Negatrends, Inc.

Press and the following screen will appear. Use the arrow keys to select the desired media access control address (MAC address), network interface card (NIC) port.

Add to Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American Regatrends, Inc. Rovanced MAC AC:IF:SB:00:00:25 MAC AC:IF:SB:00:00:27 PFA Bus 1 | Dev 0 | Func 0 +/-: Select Screen T1: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESG: Exit

Press and the following screen will appear.

Ratio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc. advanced ISC51 Attempt Name ISC51 Mode Internet Protocol Connection Retry Count Connection Establishing Timeout ONI-format ISID Configure ISID Enable DHCP Initiator IP Address Initiator Subnet Mask Gateway Target Name Target Address Target Port Boot LIN Authentication Type Save Changes Attempt S [Disabled] [IP4] 0 1000 20150800026 80026 [Disabled] 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 3250 0 [None] The human name defined for this attempt. Maximum length is up to 12 characters ++: Select Screen T4: Select Item Enter: Default +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save B Exit ESC: Exit

iSCSI Attempt Name

This feature displays the iSCSI attempt name.

Aptio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American Hgatirends, Inc. Advanced ISCEI Attempt Name ISCEI Mode Internet Protocol Connection Retry Count Connection Establishing Timeout ODI-format ISID Configure IID Enable DHCP Initiator IP Address Initiator Subnet Mask Gateway Target Name Target Address Target Port Boot LAN Authentication Type Save Changes Attempt 3 [Disabled] [IPv4] 0 1000 201768800026 800026 [Disabled] 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 S259 0 [None] The human name defined for this attempt. Maximum length is (into 12 characters) +: Select Screen T1: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESC: Exit

iSCSI Mode

Use this feature to set the iSCSI mode. The options are Disabled, Enabled, and Enabled for MPIO. Multipath I/O (MPIO) is a feature that allows the system to route I/O through the available paths if the active path fails (be sure to have more than one physical path connected to the system).

Aio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc. Advanced iSCSI Attempt Name Attempt 1 iSCSI Mode [Unsplied] Internet Protocol [IPV4] Connection Retry Count 0 Connection Establishing Timeout 1000 OUI-format ISO 201568800026 Configure ISOID ISCSI Mode Disabled Enabled Enabled for HP10 Enable DHCP Initiator IP Address Initiator Subnet Mask Gateway Target Name Target Address Target Port Boot LUN $260 0 Authentication Type [None] Save Changes Disabled, Enabled, Enabled for HP10 ++: Select Screen T1: Select Item enter: Select --+: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESC: Exit Version 2.20.1876, Copyright (C) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc.

Note: Enabling the feature, iSCSI Mode, is required for iSCSI configuration.

Internet Protocol

Use this feature to set the Internet protocol. The options are IPv4, IPv6, and Autoconfigure.

Ratio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc. Advanced ICSI Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc. INTERTAL ISCSI Attempt Name INTERTAL ISCSI Mode [Disabled] Internet Protocol [IPv4] Connection Retry Count 0 Connection Establishing Timeout 1000 OMI-format ISO DC1F68800026 Configure ISO Internet Protocol IPv4 IPv6 Autoconfigure Enable DHCP Initiator IP Address Initiator Secret Mask Gateway Target Name Target Address Target Port 3269 Boot LUN 0 Authentication Type [None] Save Changes Initiator IP address is system assigned in JNS mode. In Autoconfigure node, ICSI driver will attempt to connect ICSI target via IPv4 stack. If failed then attempt IPv6 stack. +:- Select Screen T1: Select Item Enter: Select -:- Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Dutilized Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESC: Exit

Connection Retry Count

The valid range is 0\~16. Use this feature to enter the number of logon sessions allowed for the iSCSI initiator to restart with the iSCSI target if the first logon connection fails.

Actio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc. Advanced iSCSI Attempt Name Attempt 1 iSCSI Mode [0.0.0.0]# Internet Protocol [IPv4] Connection Retry Count 2 Connection Establishing Timeout 1000 UID-format UID 3CS760800026 Configure UID 800026 Enable DHCP [Disabled] Initiator IP Address 0.0.0.0 Initiator Subset Mask 0.0.0.0 Status 0.0.0.0 Target Name Target Address Target Port 5250 Boot LIN 6 Authentication Type [None] Save Changes The minimum value is 0 and the maximum is 15.0 means no retry. +: Select Screen T4: Select Item Enter: Select +/-1 Change Opt.. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save it Exit ESC: Exit version 2.20.1874. Copyright (C) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc.

Connection Establishing Timeout

Use this feature to set the logon connection establishing timeout (in milliseconds). The valid range is from 100 milliseconds to 20 seconds.

Action Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American Negatrends, Inc. Advanced IBCSI Attempt Name IBCSI Mode Internet Protocol Connection Retry Count Connection Establishing Timeout Oil-format ISID Configure ISID Enable DHCP Initiator IP Address Initiator Subset Mask Gateway Target Name Target Address Target Port Boot LIN Authentication Type Save Changes Attempt 1 (Disabled) [IPv4] 0 1000 20168800026 880026 [Disabled] 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 3250 0 [None] The timeout value in milliseconds, The minimum value is 100 milliseconds and the maximum is 20 seconds. +: Select Screen F1: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save A Exit EKC: Exit Version 8.30.1874. Copyright (C) 2019 American Negatrends, Inc.

OUI-format ISID

This feature displays the default ISID in OUI format. The value (in six bytes) is derived from the MAC address of the NIC port that you selected earlier.

Ratio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American Negatrends, Inc. Advanced ISCST Attempt Name Attempt 1 ISCST Mode [Displaced] Internet Protocol [IPvA] Connection Retry Count 0 Connection Establishment Timeout 1000 OUI-format ISID 201768800026 DARITURE ISID 0.0.0.0 Enable DHCP [Disabled] Initiator IP Address 0.0.0.0 Initiator Subnet Mask 0.0.0.0 Gateway 0.0.0.0 Target Name Target Address Target Port 3250 Boat LAN 0 Authentication Type Done! Save Changes The timeout value in milliseconds, The minimum value is 100 milliseconds and the maximum is 20 seconds. +: Select Screen #: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESCR Exit

Configure ISID

Press to configure the ISID. The default value is derived from the last three bytes of the OUI-format ISID. Also, only the last three bytes of the ISID are configurable.

ATIO Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc. Advanced ISO-80026 Interrupt 1 ISO-80 Mode [0:ISO1@1] Internet Protocol [IPv4] Connection Retry Count 0 Connection Establishing Timeout 10:00 OUT-format ISO DC3F68800026 Configure ISID Enable DHCP Initiator IP Address Initiator Secret Mask Gateway 0.0.0.0 Target Name Target Address Target Port Boot LIM B260 0 Authentication Type [None] Save Changes OUT-format ISO in 6 bytes, default value are derived from MRC address, Only .80T 3 bytes are configurable. Examplet update DBECCODEEFF to ORBECFO7501 by Input F07501. +: Select Screen 14: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit ISO: Exit Version 2.20.1874. Copyright (C) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc.

Enable DHCP

Use this feature to disable/enable dynamic host configuration protocol (DHCP) server service for the iSCSI initiator. The options are Disabled and Enabled.

Antio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc. Advanced [ESC] Attempt Name Attempt 3 [ESC] Mode [Disabled] Internet Protocol [IPV4] Connection Retry Count 0 Connection Establishing Timeout 1000 [OSC]-format ISID DCIF688000% Enable DHCP Configure ISID Disabled Enabled Enable DHCP Initiator IP Address Initiator Subnet Mask Gateway 0.0.0.0 Target Name Target Address Target Port $250 Boot LIM 0 Authentication Type [None] Save Changes Enable DHCP +: Select Screen T4: Select Items Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help. F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESC: Exit Version 2.20.1274. Copyright (C) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc.

Note: Set the feature, Enable DHCP, to Disabled if you would like to specify the iSCSI initiator IP address/subnet mask/gateway.

Initiator IP Address (available when Enable DHCP is set to Disabled)

Use this feature to enter the desired iSCSI initiator IP address.

Aio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2017 American Megatrends, Inc. Advanced ISCISI Attempt Name 1 ISCISI Mode (Dissubled) Internet Protocol (IPA) Connection Retry Count 0 Connection Establishing Timeout 1000 DUI-format ISID 201F68W9E02E Configure ISID C#B02E Enable DHCP Initiator IP Address 0.0.0.0_ Initiator Subnet Mask Gateway 0.0.0.0 Target Name Target IP Address 0.0.0.0 Target Port 3250 Boot LUN 0 Authentication Type [None] Save Changes Enter IP address in dotted-derimai notation. +:- Select Screen T1: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESC: Exit Version 2.13.1268. Copyright (C) 2017 American Megatrends, Inc.

Initiator Subnet Mask (available when Enable DHCP is set to Disabled)

Use this feature to enter the desired iSCSI initiator subnet mask.

Initio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2017 American Regatrends, Inc. advanced IOSCI Attempt Name 1 IOSCI Mode (Disabled) Internet Protocol (IP4) Connection Retry Count 0 Connection Establishing Timeout 1000 ONI-Format ISID 201F6009802E Configure ISID Unidoc Enable DHCP Initiator IP Address Initiator Secret Mask Gateway 0.0.0.0 Target Name Target IP Address 0.0.0.0 Target Port 3250 Door LUN 0 Authentication Type (None) Save Changes Enter IP address in dotted-decimal notation. +: Select Screen T1: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save A Exit ESC: Exit Version 2.13.1208. Copyright (C) 2017 American Regatrends, Inc.

Gateway (available when Enable DHCP is set to Disabled)

Use this feature to enter the desired iSCSI initiator gateway.

Moto Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2017 American Negatrends, Inc. Advanced ISCST Attempt Name 1 ISCST Mode (D:) 1998 Internet Protocol (IP) Connection Retry Count 0 Connection Establishing Timeout 1000 DWI-format ISO DCIF60W0R0CE Configure ISO ONTOE Enable DHCP SATWAY Initiator IP Address 0.0.0.0_ Initiator Subset Port Gateway 0.0.0.0 Target Name Target IP Address 0.0.0.0 Target Port 3250 Boot LOM 0 Authentication Type [More] Save Changes Enter IP address in dotted-decimal notation. +: Select Screen T1: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save H Exit ESD: Exit Version 2.15.1998. Copyright (C) 2017 American Negatrends, Inc.

Get target info via DHCP (available when Enable DHCP is set to Enabled)

Use this feature to disable/enable dynamic host configuration protocol (DHCP) server service for the iSCSI target. The options are Disabled and Enabled.

Auto Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2017 American Megatrends, Inc. advanced IBCSI Attempt Name 1 IBCSI Mode [Disabled] Internet Protocol [IP4] Connection Retry Count 0 Connection Establishing Timeout 1000 Configure DHCP Enable DHCP Initiator IP: 0,0,0,0 Set target info via DHCP Target Name [Disabled] Target IP Address 0,0,0,0 Target Port 3250 Boot LAN 0 Authentication Type [None] Save Changes Get target info via DHCP Disabled Enabled +: Select Screen 11: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt: F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit GSD: Exit Version 2.15.1268. Copyright (C) 2017 American Megatrends, Inc.

Note 1: Set the feature, Get target info via DHCP, to Disabled if you would like to specify the iSCSI target name/IP address/boot LUN.

Note 2: LUN stands for logical unit number, which is used to identify a logical/physical disk.

Target Name

Use this feature to enter the desired iSCSI target name in IQN format.

Ratio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2017 American Megatrends, Inc. Advanced ISCST Attempt Name 1 ISCST Mode (Disabled) Internet Protocol (IPA) Connection Retry Count 0 Connection Establishing Timeout 1000 Target Name En In Get target info via DHCP (Disabled) Target name Target IP address 0.0.0.0 Target Port 2259 Boot LAM 0 Authentication Type [None] Save Changes The worldwide unique name of the target... Only log, format is accepted. +: Select Screen T: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save B Exit GSD: Exit Version 2.19.1808. Copyright (C) 2017 American Megatrends, Inc.

Target Address

Use this feature to enter the desired iSCSI target IP address.

Ratio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc. advanced IOSCI Attempt Name Attempt 1 IOSCI Mode [IPV60135] Internet Protocol [IPV4] Connection Retry Count 0 Connection Establishing Timeout 1000 DNS format ISO 201560800026 Target Address Set target info via DNS Target mode [Disabled] Target Address Target Port $260 Boot LAN 0 Authentication Type [None] Enter Target address in IPV4, IPV6 or URL format. You need to configure DNS server Address in advance If input a URL string. +/- Select Screen I1: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save B Exit ESC: ExIT Version 2.20.1874. Copyright (C) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc.

Target Port

This feature displays the iSCSI target port.

Ratio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2017 American Megatrends, Inc. Advanced BOSI Attempt Name 1 BOSI Mode [Disabled] Internet Protocol [IP4] Connection Retry Count 0 Connection Establishing Timeout 1000 Configure ISID 09826 Enable DHCP [Enabled] Initiator IP: 0.0.0.0 Set target info via DHCP [Disabled] Target Name Target IP Address 0.0.0.0 Target Port $250 Boot LIN 0 Authentication Type [None] Save Changes Target Port +: Select Screen F1: Select Item enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit CSC: Exit Version 2.19.1208. Copyright (C) 2017 American Megatrends, Inc.

Boot LUN

Use this feature to enter the LUN ID of boot LUN.

Ratio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2017 American Megatrends, Inc. Advanced ISCSI Attempt Name 1 ISCSI Mode [Disabled] Internet Protocol [IP4] Connection Retry Count 0 Connection Establishing Timeout 1000 Configure ISOI Owner Enable DHCP Boot LIN Initiator IP: 0.0.0.0 Get target Info Via DHCP [Disabled] Target Name Target IP address 0.0.0.0 Target Port 3250 Boot LIN 0 Authentication Type [None] Save Changes Hexadecimal representation of the LU number. Examples pre-4752-394F-8676-3539, 6704-3-1556-127, 4186-3 +: Select Screen F4: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save A Exit ESC: Exit Version 2.19.1208. Copyright (C) 2017 American Megatrends, Inc.

Authentication Type

Use this feature to set the authentication method. The options are CHAP and None.

Atoio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2017 American Megatrends, Inc. advanced ISCSI Attempt Name 1 ISCSI Mode (D:\isoblcd) Internet Protocci (IP4) Connection Retry Count 0 Connection Establishing Timeout 1000 Configure ISID Authentication Type Enable DHCP DHAP Initiator IP : 0.0.0.0 None Get target info via DHCP (D:\isoblcd) Target Name Target IP Address 0,0,0,0 Target Port 3250 Boot LIN 0 Authentication Type (More) Save Changes Authentication method: DHAP, Kerberos, or None +:-: Select Screen TI: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESC: Exit Version 2.19.1268. Copyright (C) 2017 American Megatrends, Inc.

Note: Challenge handshake authentication protocol (CHAP) is a protocol used to verify the identity of the peer of a connection.

CHAP Type (available when Authentication Type is set to CHAP)

Use this feature to set the CHAP type. The options are One way and Mutual.

Ratio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2017 American Megatrends, Inc. Advanced Configure ISID Enable DHCP Initiator IP: 0.0.5.0 Set target Info via DHCP Target Name Target IP Address Target Port Boot LUN Authentication Type CHAP Type CHAP Name CHAP Secret Reverse CHAP Name Reverse CHAP Secret Save Changes Back to Previous Page None, One way CHAP or mutual CHAP CHAP Type One way Mutual [Mutual] +: Select Screen T4: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESC: Exit version 2.13.1908. Copyright (C) 2017 American Megatrends, Inc.

Note 1: If one way (unidirectional) CHAP authentication is performed, the iSCSI target authenticates the iSCSI initiator.

Note 2: If mutual (bidirectional) CHAP authentication is performed, the iSCSI target and iSCSI initiator authenticate each other.

CHAP Name (available when Authentication Type is set to CHAP)

Use this feature to enter the CHAP name authenticated by the iSCSI target.

Auto Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2017 American Megatrends, Inc. Advanced Configure ISO Enable DHCP Initiator IP: 0.0.0.0 Get target Info Via DHCP Target Name DHAP Name - Auth DHAP Type DHAP Name DHAP Secret Save Changes ► Back to Previous Page DHAP Name [One way] ++: Select Screen 14: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESC: Exit Version 2.19.1268. Copyright (C) 2017 American Megatrends, Inc.

CHAP Secret (available when Authentication Type is set to CHAP)

Use this feature to enter the CHAP secret (12\~16 characters) authenticated by the iSCSI target.

Auto Setup Utility - Copyright ISO 2017 American Megatrends, Inc. Advanced Configure ISID Enable DHCP Initiator IP: 0.0.0.0 Get target Info via DHCP Target Name Target IP Address Target Fort Boot LUN Authentication Type DHMP Type DHMP Name DHMP Secret Save Changes Back to Previous Page One way The minimum length is 12 bytes and the maximum length is 15 bytes. +: Select Screen T4: Select Item Enter Select +/- Change Opt.. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESC: Exit Version 2.19.1208, Copyright (C) 2017 American Megatrends, Inc.

CHAP Status

This feature displays the CHAP status.

Auto Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc. Advanced OUI-Format ISO Configure ISO Enable DHCP Initiator IP Address Initiator Subset Mask Gateway Get target Info via DHCP Target Name Target Address Target Port Boot LUN Authentication Type CHMP Type CHMP Name CHMP Status Reverse CHMP Name Reverse CHMP Secret Reverse CHMP Status [Disabled] 3260 0 [CHMP] [Mutual] [Not Installed] [Not Installed] Save Changes ► Back to Previous Page The minimum length is 12 bytes and the maximum length is 16 bytes. +: Select screen T4: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save R Exit ESG: Exit Version 2.50.1873, Copyright (C) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc.

Reverse CHAP Name (available when CHAP Type is set to Mutual)

Use this feature to enter the CHAP name authenticated by the iSCSI initiator.

Auto Setup Utility - Copyright IC7 2017 American Megatrends, Inc. Advanced Configure ISID C9800E Enable DHCP [Enabled] Initiator IP: 0.0.0.0 Get target Info via DHCP [Disabled] Target Name Reverse DHCP Name Anti DHAP Type [Mutual] DHAP Name DHAP Secret Reverse DHCP Name Reverse DHCP Secret Save Changes ► Back to Previous Pass Reverse DHCP Name +: Select Screen F4: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt... F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit DHCI Exit version 2.19.1203, Copyright IC7 2017 American Megatrends, Inc.

Reverse CHAP Secret (available when CHAP Type is set to Mutual)

Use this feature to enter the CHAP secret (12\~16 characters) authenticated by the iSCSI initiator.

Netto Setup Utility - Copyright IC? 2017 American Megatrends, Inc. Advanced Configure ISIP Enable DHCP Initiator IP: 0.0.0.0 Get target Info Via DHCP Target Name Target IP Address Target Port Boot Lth Authentication Type CHAP Type CHAP Name CHAP Secret Reverse CHAP Name Reverse CHAP Secret Save Changes Back to Previous Page The minimum length is 12 bytes and the maximum length is 15 bytes. [Disabled] 0.0.0.0 Create New Reverse CHAP Secret [Mutual] ++: Select Screen T4: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults For Save R Exit ESC: Exit Version 2.19.1265. Copyright (C) 2017 American Megatrends, Inc.

Reverse CHAP Status (available when CHAP Type is set to Mutual)

This feature displays the reverse CHAP status.

NOI-Format ISID Configure ISID Enable DHCP Initiator IP Address Initiator Subnet Mask Gateway Get Target Info via DHCP Target Name Target Address Target Port Boot-LUN Authentication Type DHIP Type DHIP Name DHIP Secret DHIP Status Reverse DHCP Name Reverse DHCP Status Reverse DHCP Status [Disabled] 3260 0 [CHIP] [Mutual] [Not Installed] [Not Installed] Save Changes Back to Previous Page The minimum length is 12 bytes and the maximum length is 16 bytes. +/-: Select Screen T1: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save B Exit ESQ: Exit

Save Changes

Use the arrow keys to select Save Changes and press to save settings shown on the screen.

Ratio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2017 American Negatrends, Inc. Advanced ISCBI Mode [Disabled] Internet Protocol [IP4] Connection Retry Count 0 Connection Establishing Timeout 1000 Configure ISID 09802E Enable DHCP [Disabled] Initiator IP + 0.0.0.0 Get Target Info via DHCP [Disabled] Target Name Target IP Address 0.0.0.0 Target Port 3260 Spot LUN 0 Authentication Type [None] Save Changes ► Back to Previous Page Must reboot system manually for changes to take place. ++: Select Screen TA: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Spt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESC: Exit Version 2.19.1958, Copyright (C) 2017 American Negatrends, Inc.

Note: For the changes to take effect, save settings, and restart the system.

Back to Previous Page

Use the arrow keys to select Back to Previous Page and press .

Ratio Setup Utility - Copyright IC? 2017 American Negatrends, Inc. Advanced HOSCI Mode [Disabled] Internet Protocol [IP4] Connection Retire Count 0 Connection Establishing Timeout 1000 Configure ISID 09802E Enable DHCP [Enabled] Initiator IP: 0.0.0.0 Get target Info via DHCP [Disabled] Target Name Target IP Address 0.0.0.0 Target Port 3260 Boot LUN 0 Authentication Type [None] Save Changes ▶ Back to Previous Page Back to Previous Page +:- Select Screen F1: Select Items Enter: Select +:- Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F2: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESC: Exit Version 7.19.1208. Copyright (C) 2017 American Negatrends, Inc.

The user will be returned to the main screen of iSCSI Configuration as shown below.

Ratio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc. Advanced ICSI Initiator Name ipxLid.mci Israel ► Add so Attempt ► Attempt 1 ► Attempt 2 ► Delete Attempts ► Change Attempt Order The worldwide unique name of ICSI Initiator. Only IOM format is accepted. Range is from 4 to 53 +: Select Screen T4: Select Item Enter Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save B Exit. ESC: Exit version 2.20.1874. Copyright (C) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc.

Delete Attempts

Use the arrow keys to select Delete Attempts.

Initio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc. advanced MSCS Initiator Name jqukid.smc1.bsc1 ► Add an Attempt ► Attempt 1 ► Attempt 2 ► Delete Attempts ► Change Attempt Order Objecto one or more attempts ++: Select Screen TI: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESC1 Exit version 2.20.1874. Copyright (D) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc.

Press and the following screen will appear.

Moto Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American Newsrends, Inc. ADVANCED Attempt 1 Disabled Attempt 2 Disabled Default Changes and Exit Discard Changes and Exit MAC: AC:IF:68:60:00:36, FFA: Bus 1 | Dev 0 | Func 0, ICSI mode: Enabled, IP version: IPv4 +: Select screen 14: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESC: Exit Version 2.00.1274, Copyright (C) 2019 American Newsrends, Inc.

Attempt 1

Use the feature to disable/enable Attempt 1. The options are Disabled and Enabled.

Ratio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American Newsrends, Inc. Advanced Attempt 1 Attempt 2 Consult Changes and Exit Discard Changes And Exit Disabled Disabled Attempt 1 Disabled Enabled MAC: AC:1F:68:60:00:35, PPA Bus 1 | Dev 0 | Func 0, JOSI mode: Enabled, IP Version: IPv4 +: Select Screen T1: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESC: Exit Version 2.20.1874, Copyright (C) 2019 American Newsrends, Inc.

Attempt 2

Use the feature to disable/enable Attempt 2. The options are Disabled and Enabled.

Ratio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American Netsrends, Inc. Advanced Attempt 1 Attempt 2 Default Changes and Exit Discard Changes and Exit [Disabled] [Disabled] Attempt 2 Disabled Enabled HA6: AC:IF:68:60:00:25, PTAs Bus 1 | Dev 0 | Func 0, ICSB1 mode Enabled, JP Version: IPv4 +: Select Screen TI: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESCY Exit Version 2.20.1876. Copyright (C) 2019 American Netsrends, Inc.

Commit Changes and Exit

Press to save changes and return to the main screen of iSCSI Configuration.

Ratio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American Newsrends, Inc. Advanced Attempt 1 Attempt 2 Commit Changes and Exit Discord Changes And Exit [Disabled] [Disabled] Commit Changes and Exit +: Select Screen TI: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESC: Exit Version 2.20.1874. Copyright (C) 2019 American Newsrends, Inc.

Discard Changes and Exit

Press to return to the main screen of iSCSI Configuration without any change.

Auto Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American Hegatrends, Inc. ADVANCED Attempt 1 Attempt 2 Commit Changes and Exit Discard Changes and Exit Discard Changes and Exit +: Select Screen T1: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save it Exit ESC: Exit version 2.20.1678. Copyright (C) 2019 American Hegatrends, Inc.

Change Attempt Order

Use the arrow keys to select Change Attempt Order.

Ratio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American Newsrends, Inc. advanced ISCBI Initiator Name + Add an Attempt - Attnent 1 - Attnent 2 - Delete Attempts - Change attempt Order Change the order of Attempts using +/- keys. Use drive keys to select the attempt then press +/- to move the attempt down/down in the attempt under list. +: Select Screen TA: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESC: Exit Version 8.20.1274, Copyright (C) 2019 American Newsrends, Inc.

Press and the following screen will appear.

Ratio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American Negatrends, Inc. advanced Change Attempt Order Attempt 11 Attempt 31 Consult Changes and Exit Discard Changes And Exit Change the order of Attempts using +/- keys. Use arrow keys to select the attempt then press +/- to move the attempt down in the attempt order list. +: Select Screen 14: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Original Defoults F4: Save & Exit ESC: Exit Version 2.20.1274. Copyright (C) 2019 American Negatrends, Inc.

Change Attempt Order

This feature is to change the Attempt order. Use arrow keys to select the desired Attempt, then <+/-> keys to move up/down the selected Attempt. For instance, move up the selected Attempt by using <+> key. Move down the selected Attempt by using <-> key.

Ratio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American Hgatrends, Inc. Advanced Change Attempt Order Attempt 1 Attempt 2 Submit Changes and Exit Discard Changes and Exit Change Attempt Order Attempt 1 Attempt 2 Change the order of Attempts using +/- keys. Use arrow keys to select the attempt then press +/- To move the attempt up/down in the attempt order list. +:- Select Screen T4: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESC: Exit! Version 2.20.1274. Copyright (C) 2019 American Hgatrends, Inc.

Commit Changes and Exit

Press to save changes and return to the main screen of iSCSI Configuration.

Aotio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American Newsrends, Inc. Advanced Change Attempt Order [Attempt 1] [Attempt 2] COMMIT Changes and Exit Discord Changes and Exit Commit Changes and Exit +: Select Screen T4: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit EOC: Exit Version 2.20.1274, Copyright (C) 2019 American Newsrends, Inc.

Discard Changes and Exit

Press to return to the main screen of iSCSI Configuration without any change.

Action Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American NewsTrends, Inc. Advanced Change Attempt Order Attempt 11 (Attempt 2) Commit Changes and Exit Discount Changes and Exit Distard Changes and Exit +: Select Stream 11: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save it Exit ESC: Exit version 2.20.1274. Copyright (C) 2019 American NewsTrends, Inc.

Appendix H

Configuring Network Interface Card (NIC) Settings

The appendix describes settings of onboard Intel® LAN devices via the BIOS Setup utility supported by the Unified Extensible Firmware Interface (UEFI) driver.

H.1 Network Interface Card (NIC) Settings

Press during system boot to enter the BIOS Setup utility. Navigate to the Advanced tab. Use the arrow keys to select PCIe/PCI/PnP Configuration and press to access the menu items.

Antio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2017 American Megatrends, Inc. Main Advanced Event Logs PCI Security Boot Save & Exit ▶ Boot Feature ▶ OPU Configuration ▶ Chipset Configuration ▶ Server ME Configuration ▶ BCH SATA Configuration ▶ BCH SATA Configuration ▶ PCIe/PCI/MP Configuration ▶ Super IO Configuration ▶ Serial Port Console Andirection ▶ ACFI Settings ▶ Trusted Computing ▶ ISCSI Configuration ▶ Interface Virtual MAX on CPU PCI, PCI-X and PCI Express Settings. +: Select Screen TI: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. FI: General Help F2: Previous Values FI: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESG: Exit Version 2.13.1268. Copyright (CI) 2017 American Megatrends, Inc.

Onboard LAN1 Option ROM (available when NIC(s) is(are) detected by the system)

Use the arrow keys to select Onboard LAN1 Option ROM and press . The options are Disabled, Legacy, and EFI. Set this feature to EFI.

PCI Bus Driver Version PCI Devices Common Settings: Above 4G Decoding SR-IOV Support MND High Base MND High Granularity Size PCI PCRR/SEWR Support Maximum Read Request HMEF0 Base NAME Firmware Source VM Priority PCIe SLOTL PCI-E 3.0 X4 (IN X8) CPU SLOTL2 PCI-E 3.0 X8 OPRON CPU SLOTL3 PCI-E 3.0 X9 OPRON CPU SLOTL4 PCI-E 3.0 X16 OPRON CPU SLOTL6 PCI-E 3.0 X16 OPRON H.D PCI-E 3.0 X4 OPRON Onboard LAN Device Onboard LAN1 Option ROM Onboard LAN2 Option ROM Onboard Video Option ROM Network Stack Configuration Onboard LAN1 Option ROM Disabled Legacy EPC [Legacy] [Enabled] [Legacy] [Legacy] [Legacy] Select which firmware function to be loaded for onboard LAN1. +: Select Screen 14: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESC: Exit

Note: If Onboard LAN1 Option ROM is set to EFI, all features for onboard LAN option ROM will be set to EFI by the EFI driver. Additionally, these features will become unavailable except Onboard LAN1 Option ROM.

For the changes to take effect, press to save the settings and exit the BIOS Setup utility. Press during system boot to enter the BIOS Setup utility. Navigate to the Advanced tab. The feature(s) for onboard Intel® LAN device(s) will become available for configuration as shown below.

Mio Setup Utility - Copyright ICI 2017 American Regatrends, Inc. Main Advanced Event Logs IPMI Security Boot Save & Exit Boot Feature CPU Configuration Chipset Configuration Server MT Configuration PCH SATA Configuration PCH switch Configuration PCIe/PCI/PNP Configuration Super ID Configuration Serial Fort Console Redirection ACSI Settings Trusted Computing IBCSI Configuration Output Virtual RAM or CPU IntelOIS Ethernet Connection X732 for 108/86E-T - ACIIP/408... IntelOIS Ethernet Connection X732 for 108/86E-T - ACIIP/408... Configure 10 August Ethernet device parameters +/-: Select Screen T1: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESC: Exit version 2.13.1205. Copyright (C) 2017 American Regatrends, Inc.

Use the arrow keys to select the desired onboard LAN device as shown below.

Notio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2017 American Megatrends, Inc. Main Advanced Event Loss PMI Security Boot Save & Exit Boot Feature CPU Configuration Chipset Configuration Server ME Configuration PCI4 SATH Configuration PCI5 sSATA Configuration PCI6/PCI7/PCI8 Configuration Super 10 Configuration Serial Port Console Modirection ACSI Settings Trusted Computing BOSCI Configuration Data/MS-Vertical/MS-ON CPU Initial/OS Ethernet Connection x73E for 108948E-T - AC11F1081... NAMION Ethernet Connection x73E for 108948E-T - AC11F1081... Configure 10 Gigabit Ethernet device parameters +:- Select Screen T1: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESC: Exit Version 7.15.1208. Copyright (C) 2017 American Megatrends, Inc.

Press and the following screen will appear. It displays detailed information for the selected onboard LAN device.

Auto Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2017 American Megatrends, Inc. Advanced NIO Configuration BLOCK LEDS 0 UEFI Driver Intel(R) 4000E 2.1.14 Adaptor PBA 02000-000 Device Name Intel(R) Ethernet C... Chip Type Intel X702 PCI Device ID 370F PCI Address 19:00:00 LINK STATUS ID(connected) MAC Address AC:17:68:09:00:25 Virtual MAC Address 00:00:00:00:00:00 Click to configure the network device port. +: Select Screen T4: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. P1: General Help P3: Previous Values P3: Optimized Defaults P4: Save a Exit ESC: Exit Version 2.19.1268, Copyright (C) 2017 American Megatrends, Inc.

Blink LEDs

This feature allows the user to set the LED blink duration (in seconds). The valid range is 0\~15 (seconds).

NIO Configuration NIO LEDs UEFI Driver Adaptor PBA Device Name Chip Type PCI Device ID PCI Address Link Status MAC Address Virtual MAC Address 0 Intel(R) 4002E 2.1.15 02000-000 Intel(R) Ethernet C... Intel X782 3762 (9:00:00) [Disconnected] 4C:IF:68:05:80:2E 00:80:00:00:00:00 Identify the physical network port by blinking the associated LED. +: Select Screen TI: Select Item Enter Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Utilized Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESC: Exit Version 2.13.1206 Copyright (C) 2017 American Megatrends, Inc.

NIC Configuration

Use the arrow keys to select NIC Configuration.

Ratio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2017 American Megatrends, Inc. RHOVANCED ▶ BIOS Configuration 8LINK LEDs 0 UEFI Driver Intel(R) 400GE 2.1.14 Adaptor PBA 020400-000 Device Name Intel(R) Ethernet C... Chip Type Intel X122 PCI Device ID 3702 PCI Address 19:00:01 Link Status ID(connected) MAC Address AC(17):65:09:00:3F Virtual MAC Address 00:00:00:00:00:00 Click to configure the network device port. +: Select Screen T4: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Obtained Defaults F4: Save & Exit E6G: Exit Version 2.15.1998. Copyright (C) 2017 American Megatrends, Inc.

Press and the following screen will appear.

Auto Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2017 American Megatrends, Inc. Advanced Link Speed Have On LAN [Auto Negotiated] [Enabled] Enable power on of the system via LAN. Note that Configuring Make on LAN in the operating system does not change the value of this setting, but does override the Behavior of wake on LAN in OS controlled other states. +: Select Screen T4: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt, F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save S Exit END: Exit.

Wake on LAN

Use the arrow keys to select Wake On LAN and press . The following screen will appear. The options are Disabled and Enabled. Set this feature to support system wake-up via the selected LAN device.

Aio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American Negatrends, Inc. Advanced Link Speed Make on Use Auto Negotiated (Dissolved) Enable on Link Disabled Enabled Enables the server to be powered on using an in-band Logic packet. +: Select Screen I1: Select Item enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Dated Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESC: Exit Version 2.20.1874, Copyright (C) 2019 American Negatrends, Inc.